


CDPmtGMT DEPOSIT. 


it SiiBiiili,*** 




■iwKi 





































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































/ 


t 












J 


A TEXT-BOOK 

ON 

HYGIENE AND PEDIATRICS 


From a Chiropractic Standpoint 


BY 

JOHN H. CRAVEN, D.C., Ph.C. 

DEPARTMENT OF HYGIENE AND PUBLIC HEALTH ; 
PROFESSOR OF PHILOSOPHY, DEPARTMENT OF ORTHOPEDY, 
THE PALMER SCHOOL OF CHIROPRACTIC, 
DAVENPORT, IOWA 


FIRST EDITION 
1924 


» • 


Published by 

JOHN H. CRAVEN 

Davenport, Iowa 


u. s. A. 


>C,MS 


Copyright 1924, by 
JOHN H. CRAVEN, D.C., Ph.C. 

DAVENPORT, IOWA 


Printed in the United States of America 


HAMMOND PRESS 
W. B. CONKEY COMPANY 
CHICAGO 


APB-? 24 

©C1A778088 


''lA'O j 



DEDICATION 

In grateful recognition of his wise counsel and 
valuable aid in the production of this work, in 
sincere appreciation of the firm principle for 
which he has ever stood even in the face of 
almost overwhelming opposition and many times 
alone save for the few who understood him, and 
because of the love I bear him for having saved 
the life of my son, I count it a privilege as 
well as a very great pleasure to dedicate this 
book to B. J. Palmer, D.C., Ph. C., scientist, 
philosopher, author, but best of all just my plain, 
frank, candid friend, B. J. of Davenport. 

John H. Craven 















































































































































PREFACE 

More than ten years ago when I began teaching hygiene in 
the Palmer School of Chiropractic, I realized the need of a 
text-book that would deal with this subject from a chiropractic 
standpoint. 

Many points maintained by hygienists are not in accord 
with the teaching of Chiropractic, since they are proven untrue 
by our philosophy. For this reason much subject matter in 
such text-books was of no value to our students; hence the 
necessity for a chiropractic hygiene text. 

It has been no easy task to prepare this subject matter in 
view of the conflicting teachings and ideas pertaining to the 
various phases of hygiene, but the principles of Chiropractic 
are in no way compromised and the student, from a casual 
perusal of any one particular phase of the subject, should not 
draw conclusions that any medical theories of dis-ease are 
being tolerated. 

An effort has been made to include only that part of hygiene 
pertaining to our science. Since sanitation pertains especially 
to the environment, the approach to its study is the same 
regardless of the viewpoint from which it is considered. 

Section II, dealing with the care of the infant and the 
adjusting of children, has been written in response to the 
hundreds of inquiries which have come in from the practicing 
chiropractors in the field requesting such a work. This is not 
intended as an exhaustive study in the care of the infant; its 
purpose is merely to give a general understanding to those 
who are interested in adjusting babies. 

The technic used in adjusting children is of great impor¬ 
tance and is so considered. 

It is sincerely hoped that this hygiene will fill the long- 
felt need on the part of our Faculty for such a text, and 
that pediatrics considered chiropractically will be of assistance 
to those in the field who have requested a work on this subject. 

February, 1924. John H. Craven 








































































































' 




- 




* 































. 
















TABLE OF CONTENTS 


PAGE 

Dedication..5 

Preface.• . . . 7 

SECTION I 

CHAPTER PAGE 

I. Introduction.13 

II. Housing Hygiene. 28 

III. Air.44 

IV. Ventilation.65 

V. Heating.79 

VI. Lighting.95 

VII. Water. 106 

VIII. School Hygiene.140 

IX. Industrial Hygiene.156 

X. Definitions.171 

XI. Immunity.181 

XII. Germs.195 

XIII. Disinfection and Fumigation.207 

XIV. Hygiene and Sanitation of the Sick Room . . . 217 

XV. Food.231 

XVI. Food Poison.245 

XVII. Milk ..254 

XVIII. Meat.267 





















10 


TABLE OF CONTENTS 


SECTION II 


CHAPTER PAGE 

I. The Baby.277 

II. Dentition.299 

III. Analyzing Infants.307 

IV. Adjusting Infants.321 

V. Respiratory System.327 

VI. Digestive Tract.353 

VII. Miscellaneous.373 

Index.393 










CHAPTER I 
INTRODUCTION 


INTRODUCTION 


Origin of Word Hygiene 

Hygiene Defined 

personal 

public 

Sanitary Science 
Sanitary Art 

Distinction Between Sanitation and Hygiene 

Aim and Function of Hygiene and Sanitation 
to increase internal resistance 

TO IMPROVE ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 

Internal and External Cleanliness 

ESSENTIAL TO HEALTH 
CHIROPRACTORS INTERESTED IN 

Sewerage System of the Body 
chyme 

CHYLE 

ABSORPTION 

ELIMINATION 

Three Viewpoints on Hygiene 

MEDICAL 

layman's 

CHIROPRACTIC 

Advantages of Proper Sanitary Environment 
Cause of Dis-ease 

NOT RESULT OF EXTRINSIC CONDITIONS 

INTERFERENCE WITH TRANSMISSION OF MENTAL IMPULSES 

Sources of Communication 

MAN 

ANIMALS 

SO-CALLED COMMUNICABLE DIS-EASES 

12 


SECTION I 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


CHAPTER I 

INTRODUCTION 

Origin of the Word Hygiene 

Hygeia was the name given the Greek goddess of health. 
In her statues she was always represented as a woman of 
perfect health and beauty, and was worshipped as the goddess 
of health. She was supposed to be the daughter of Esculapius, 
the god of medicine. In Greek mythology Esculapius attained 
great fame as a physician, having power not only to prevent 
dis-ease, but also to raise the dead. A temple was erected 
to Hygeia near that of her father. Here the people came to 
worship. There was even a statue of Hygeia in the temple 
of her father. Thus we see, from time immemorial, health 
and medicine have been associated. 

Hygiene Defined 

From the word Hygeia we get the word hygiene, which 
means health. Hygiene is defined as the science and the art of 
promoting health; the science of the preservation of human 
health by the removal of the cause of dis-ease. It is some¬ 
times defined as the science of health. Hygiene is divided 
into two classes, personal and public. 

Personal Hygiene is the science of the promotion of the 
individual's health and deals with personal habits, such as 
eating and drinking; personal cleanliness; personal activities 
such as work, recreation, self-restraint. The handling of 
children comes under this branch of hygiene. The human 

13 



14 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


machine is limited by the limitations of the physical, which 
necessitates the observance of these laws governing the 
expression of life. 

Public Hygiene deals with the methods and processes 
necessary to preserve and promote the health interests of 
the public. It deals with man collectively rather than indi¬ 
vidually. This includes consideration of the environment, 
such as cleaning of streets, disposal of the dead, and proper 
hygienic methods in buildings and in public places. 

Sanitary Science 

Sanitary science includes the sum total of the knowledge 
of those principles and processes necessary to maintain per¬ 
sonal and public health. It is an inductive science and there¬ 
fore depends upon observation and verification in determining 
the general laws and truths of health and the relation between 
cause and effect in public and personal health. 

Sanitary Art 

Sanitary art is the practical application of those principles 
which are necessary to create a proper environment for man 
in his present artificial state of living, not only for the indi¬ 
vidual, but for the public as well. 

Distinction between Sanitation and Hygiene 

The term sanitation or sanitary science is often used 
synonymous with the term hygiene although there is a dif¬ 
ference in their meaning and usage. The term sanitation or 
sanitary science has been used largely in Great Britain and in 
this country, although both terms are used in America but 
with somewhat different meanings. 

In reality there is a very important distinction between 
the two terms hygiene and sanitation. Hygiene may be con¬ 
sidered the broader term which may be made to include 
everything relating to health, but more particularly those 
things which relate to the person. Sanitation or sanitary 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


15 


science relates more to the environmental conditions and 
their relation to the health of the individual or the com¬ 
munity. 

This distinction is drawn more sharply by reason of the 
developments along the line of sanitary engineering on the 
one hand and the biological and physiological developments 
on the other. 

Sanitary science has been largely under the supervision 
and in the hands of sanitary engineers, while hygiene has been 
almost entirely in the hands of the medical profession. 

Aim and Function of Hygiene and Sanitation 

Medically the aim and function of hygiene is to increase 
the internal resistance of the individual and thus prevent 
dis-ease and prolong life. The aim and function of sanita¬ 
tion or sanitary science is to improve the environmental con¬ 
ditions and thus prevent dis-ease and prolong life of the 
individual. 

Doctor Price gives the aim and function of hygiene as: 
“The prevention of disease, the prevention of premature 
death, and the promotion of normal health of individuals 
and the community by the removal of the causes of disease, 
destruction of the causes, improvement of the environmental 
conditions, and by the increase of the vital resistance of the 
individual and members of communities.” The premise here 
is correct, but the conclusions as to the methods which are 
to be used in accomplishing the desired end are erroneous. 

Internal and External Cleanliness 

There is a distinction between internal cleanliness and 
external cleanliness. It is a mistaken idea that because the 
external is clean, the internal will be correspondingly clean. 
Cleanliness is absolutely essential to health, but by this we 
mean internal cleanliness. There must be external cleanliness 
also, but perfect external cleanliness will not necessarily result 
in perfect health. 


16 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


Vital resistance of the body is not determined by the 
degree of external cleanliness nor by the perfect sanitary con¬ 
dition of the environment. However, it can never be said that 
Chiropractic does not believe in cleanliness. Chiropractic, of 
all the sciences, lays great stress on hygiene and sanitation. 
Our greatest teacher in all things is Nature and if there is 
any one thing that Chiropractic insists upon more than any 
other, it is that we live according to the laws of Nature and 
the closer we live to Nature, the more nprmal will be our 
functions. When we study the laws of Nature, we find the 
secret of sanitation. Everywhere in Nature we find laws in 
operation which result in the destruction of waste material 
and in the purification of the environment. 

From the standpoint of common decency we are interested 
in sanitation or cleanliness, yet an immaculately clean envi¬ 
ronment will not result in perfect health or in the cure of 
disease. The streets and alleys of the city may be kept clean 
and in a sanitary condition, yet the inside of the homes may 
be filled with filth. So the environment of man may be in 
a perfect condition so far as sanitation is concerned, yet the 
body may be filled with all kinds of poison and refuse. 

Sewerage System of the Body 

The human body is a machine which performs certain 
functions and in order that these functions be performed there 
is a constant process of activity; this means that the tissues 
which make up the body are being constantly worn out the 
same as the part of any other machine. This necessitates a 
constant process of repair. 

In order that this process of reparation be carried on, new 
material must be added to the machine; this is done by means 
of food. The food is taken into the mouth and properly mas¬ 
ticated and mixed with the secretions of the glands of the 
mouth; it is then carried through the esophagus into the 
stomach. Here other digestive juices are added to it and 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


17 


thoroughly mixed by the vermicular motion of the stomach 
until the process of gastric digestion is completed; then this 
chyme, as it is now called, passes into the small intestines, 
where other secretions are added and chemical changes are 
brought about until this process of intestinal digestion is 
completed. This product is given the name of chyle. 

During the time these processes have been going on, the 
process of absorption has been taking place whereby this 
digested food has been utilized in building up the tissue cells 
that are being constantly worn out by the activities of the 
body. The digested products are being taken up by the serous 
circulation and carried to every cell in the body. That which 
one cell gives off as an elimination, another may take up as 
food, finding just the chemical composition necessary to its 
life and development. Finally all of the waste material is 
collected and eliminated from the body through the organs 
of elimination. Innate Intelligence has provided a wonderful 
sewerage system for the purpose of taking care of the sewage 
of the body. This system is much more perfect than any 
system ever invented by man, but it is possible for it to get 
out of order. The remarkable thing about it is that the In¬ 
telligence within the body is capable of correcting the dis¬ 
orders if the interference with transmission to the affected 
parts is removed. All that is necessary from the outside is 
to remove that which is interfering with the transmission of 
the mental impulses. 

As long as there is interference with the transmission of 
mental impulses we may apply all the laws and principles 
of hygiene and sanitation, yet the internal condition will not 
be hygienic or sanitary. We may, by an artificial means, 
remove the waste material that has accumulated, but this will 
not stop the process of accumulation. 

In view of the fact that the above mentioned processes 
of absorption and elimination are taking place, let us assume 
that there is a subluxation at the kidney place (K.P.) imping- 


18 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


ing the nerves and interfering with the transmission of mental 
impulses to the kidneys. With decreased current the kidneys 
are unable to perform their normal amount of function and 
as a result the waste material, poisons, or in other words 
the sewage that is supposed to pass out through this channel 
of excretion, are retained in the body. The poison thus 
retained is spread over the entire body and there is likely to 
be excessive perspiration which will have a strong odor of 
urine. This is because the skin, in its excretory function, is 
called upon to throw off the waste material which normally 
should be excreted by the kidneys. Although there is no 
perspiration there will still be a very offensive and objection¬ 
able urinary odor from the patient’s body. From a hygienic 
standpoint it is necessary for that patient to bathe very often, 
but no matter how often he bathes, there is still that odor of 
urine and it is impossible for him to get rid of it. One may 
thoroughly and frequently cleanse that patient externally, but 
there will remain that unsanitary internal condition. 

Trying to get rid of the odor of urine and to create a 
sanitary internal condition in a case of this kind by external 
bathing and by the observance of sanitary laws would be 
like trying to keep a boat from sinking by dipping the water 
out when it was running in twice as fast as one could dip 
it out. It would be better to stop the leak. If the roof of 
one’s house leaks he does not try to keep the house dry by 
mopping up the water and putting chlorid of lime about the 
rooms to absorb the moisture. This may be done as an 
adaptative measure to the condition that exists because of 
the defect in the roof, but to correct the condition one must 
go directly to the roof and repair it so that no more damage 
may be done the interior of the house. 

So in the case of the K.P. subluxation and the unsanitary 
condition resulting from the accumulation of waste material 
in the body, it is folly to try to correct the condition by any 
other method than by removing the cause. The sewage must 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


19 


be carried out through the natural channels and any attempt 
to dispose of it by any other or artificial means will meet with 
absolute failure. 

Three Viewpoints on Hygiene 

According to Dr. B. J. Palmer there are three viewpoints 
of hygiene; that is to say, there are three aspects from which 
the subject of cleanliness may be considered: namely, the 
medical, layman’s and chiropractic hygiene. The chief dif¬ 
ferences are: the medical hygiene tries to make the internal 
condition sanitary by the application of external means; the 
layman’s hygiene makes the external condition sanitary by 
the application of external means; the chiropractic hygiene 
makes the internal condition sanitary by permitting the in¬ 
ternal forces to operate unhindered in the body. 

We see that from every viewpoint, hygiene means cleanli¬ 
ness. The only real difference in these viewpoint's consists 
in the methods used to obtain this desired end. The layman 
maintains a sanitary external condition by observing the laws 
of Nature. When dirt accumulates on the outside which 
creates an unhygienic and objectionable condition, he uses 
soap and water to cleanse the outside. His unhygienic con¬ 
dition is outside of the body and he uses outside means to 
rid himself of that condition. It is very obvious that this is 
a perfectly proper procedure and if correctly and systemat¬ 
ically applied it will produce a hygienic external in so far as 
that condition is influenced by external environment. 

The most baffling unsanitary and unhygienic conditions 
are the internal, and yet if these conditions are considered in 
the light of the same common sense as is applied to the ex¬ 
ternal conditions, no great amount of difficulty will be expe¬ 
rienced in coping with them. However, great difficulties will 
be experienced if an effort is made to keep the internal in a 
proper sanitary condition by the application of external means. 
This has been well demonstrated in the application of medical 


2—Feb. 24 


20 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


hygiene. However, the author does not want to be under¬ 
stood as implying that a great deal of good has not been 
accomplished in the investigations that have been made along 
the line of hygiene and more especially in sanitary science. 
But when chiropractic philosophy is properly understood, it 
will be readily seen that it is far better to clean the inside 
from the inside than to attempt cleaning the inside from the 
outside. With all due regard it must be said that up to the 
time of the introduction of chiropractic hygiene all the efforts 
were to clean the inside from the outside, but Chiropractic 
says the inside must be cleansed from the inside and this con¬ 
tention has been amply proven in the results obtained through 
chiropractic adjustments. 

Advantages of a Proper Sanitary Environment 

The body is capable of great possibilities in intellectual 
adaptation. It is possible for Innate Intelligence to maintain 
a degree of health in widely different conditions. Even where 
the environment is extremely adverse and objectionable Innate 
will adapt herself to the abnormal condition and maintain the 
normal processes of life in the body. However, it must be 
remembered that a greater amount of internal force is required 
to bring about an intellectual adaptation to an adverse environ¬ 
ment than to a normal, natural or more perfect environment. 

There must be a constant process of adaptation to the 
environment even though that environment be a most desirable 
one. All internal processes must of necessity be adaptative 
to external conditions. Drummond says, “Life is uninter¬ 
rupted correspondence with proper environment.” This is 
true of the expression of life. If the correspondence with 
the environment is interfered with there will be a correspond¬ 
ing interference with the expression of the life in the body. 

The more adverse the environment the greater the amount 
of force required to bring about this adaptation. Likewise, 
the reverse is true—adaptation to a more desirable environ- 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


21 


ment requires less internal force. We should not compel 
Innate Intelligence to do things that we could do educationally 
and save the body that extra amount of internal force. To 
illustrate, one should not unnecessarily expose his body to 
the cold and thus force Innate to expend internal energy to 
adapt the body to that condition. One might better put on 
proper clothing to protect the body. On the other hand, one 
should not go to the other extreme and make a hothouse plant 
of his body. 

A proper sanitary environment should at all times be 
maintained that there may not be an unnecessary drain on 
the adaptative forces of the body. 

Cause of Dis-ease 

Chiropractic does not accept the theory that dis-ease is 
caused by extrinsic conditions. There may be a great varia¬ 
tion in the environment and yet Innate Intelligence be able 
to maintain health. If there is sufficient interference with 
the transmission of mental impulses through the nerves, there 
will be dis-ease in the body regardless of the perfect environ¬ 
ment that may be artificially produced. If the transmission is 
normal the individual may take the so-called dis-ease germs 
into his body and feel no ill effects for they will be excreted 
as so much waste material which can not be used in the 
metabolism of the body. But if there are subluxations which 
interfere with the transmission of mental impulses and reduce 
the process of excretion the tissues will become abnormal and 
proper culture media will be formed in which there will be 
developed the germs which act as scavengers for the purpose 
of destroying the waste matter which accumulates. The 
cause of dis-ease is within the body itself. The cause of 
dis-ease is interference with transmission of mental impulses 
from the brain to the periphery, thus preventing the organ 
from performing its full and normal function. This results 
in a lack of coordinate action between the organs of the body 


22 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


and interferes with the intellectual adaptation to external 
conditions. 

The question may be raised at this time relative to the 
effects produced by the introduction of poison into the body 
and relative to germs being classed as poisons producing 
certain effects in the body. 

We will not endeavor at this time to fully deal with these 
questions, for in order that the student understand thoroughly 
the chiropractic idea of these things, it will be necessary to 
study many points, both in connection with the hygiene and 
also with the philosophy of Chiropractic. 

This point is thoroughly covered in the philosophy under 
the head of the Poison Cycle. We will simply state briefly 
here that a poison is anything which can not be used in the 
metabolism of the body and which, if allowed to remain in 
the body, will be carried to the tissue cells and do harm. In 
this event Innate will at once begin a process of elimination. 
If the channels of excretion are not normal and the organs 
are unable to do their work properly because of the inter¬ 
ference with the transmission of mental impulses, it can readily 
be seen that the poison will be retained in the body and do 
harm. The character of the injury will be governed by the 
character of the poison retained. 

Again, it is clearly explained in the philosophy how the 
introduction of poison into the body may produce subluxations 
and thus cause an interference with transmission and reduce 
the adaptative action on the part of Innate to the poison 
introduced. The student is referred to Volume V, Chiro¬ 
practic Library, for further explanation on this point. 

Sources of Communication 

Generally speaking, there are two main sources whereby 
dis-ease is communicated: (a) man himself; (b) the animals. 
Almost all of the so-called communicable dis-eases of man 
are peculiar to man alone and are not found in animals except 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


23 


as they are ‘ communicated to them for experimental pur¬ 
poses. It is interesting to note that the lower animals are 
much more free from contagious dis-eases than man. As a 
matter of fact, the lower animals are seldom found to be 
infected. It is true that the domesticated animal is more 
susceptible . to dis-ease than the wild animal living in the 
natural state. 

Following is a list commonly given as communicable dis¬ 
eases peculiar to man and according to medical theory com¬ 
municable from man to man. Even among those who accept 
this theory there is quite a difference of opinion as to the 
dis-eases that should be included in this list. Smallpox, 
chicken-pox, cholera, leprosy, dengue, relapsing fever, measles, 
mumps, scarlet fever, infantile paralysis, typhus fever, yellow 
fever, malaria, syphilis, tuberculosis and typhoid fever. It is 
maintained by hygienists that the greatest source of infection 
is man himself. No longer is it thought that the environment 
is the main source of infection. It is believed by Rosenau and 
others that the water, soil, air and food may be the media 
conveying dis-ease from man to man; these, however, are not 
now considered as the main source of infection. Rosenau 
says, “Most of the microorganisms causing the communicable 
dis-eases of man are frail and soon die in our environment, 
as in the air, soil or water. Most of them are obligate 
pathogens and can not, or do not, grow and multiply under 
the adverse conditions of our environment.” And yet these 
frail little creatures are supposed to cause dis-ease in man. 
We wish the student to bear this in mind for we will have 
more to say in this respect later on. 

It is sufficient to state here that the above named dis-eases 
maintained by some to be caused by germs are corrected by 
chiropractic adjustments. Chiropractic has proven that in¬ 
stead of dis-ease being caused by the germ the germ is pro¬ 
duced by the dis-ease. 































































































































































. 













































CHAPTER II 
HOUSING HYGIENE 


HOUSING HYGIENE 


GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 

Site 

RELATION TO HEALTH 
EFFECT OF DAMP SITE 

Aspect 

MOST SUITABLE 
ARRANGEMENT OF ROOMS 
DIRECT RAYS OF THE SUN 

Soil 

RELATION TO HEALTH 
MOST SUITABLE SOIL 

Ground Water and Ground Air 

FLUCTUATION OF 

DISTANCE OF GROUND WATER FROM SURFACE 
GROUND AIR FORCED INTO BREATHING ZONE 
DRAINAGE OF GROUND WATER 
ASSISTANCE IN PROCESS OF PURIFICATION 
ILL EFFECTS OF WATER-LOGGED SITES 

Stagnant Water 

ILL EFFECTS OF 
METHODS OF DISPOSAL 

BUILDING CONSTRUCTION 

Foundation 

RELATION TO THE BUILDING 
CHARACTER AND PREPARATION OF 
PREVENTION OF DAMPNESS 

Walls 

MATERIALS USED 
CONSTRUCTION 

Floors 

SANITARY REQUIREMENTS 
MATERIALS USED 
CONSTRUCTION 


26 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


27 


Roof 

MATERIALS TO MEET SANITARY REQUIREMENTS 
FIREPROOF 

HEAT CONDUCTION THROUGH 

House Dampness 

OBJECTIONS TO 

SOURCE OF DAMPNESS 

METHOD OF PREVENTION 

ILL EFFECTS OF HOUSE DAMPNESS 

Fireproofing 

ADVANTAGES OF FIREPROOFING 
METHODS USED IN FIREPROOFING 
CONSTRUCTION 

House Plumbing 

SYSTEM OF PIPES 

FIXTURES 

TRAPS 

SEAL 

WATER TO CARRY AWAY SEWAGE 


CHAPTER II 


HOUSING HYGIENE 

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 


Site 

From a hygienic standpoint the building site bears a cer¬ 
tain relation to health and this should not be overlooked. 
This is in perfect accord with the chiropractic philosophy as 
to the expression of life in the body. The building site may 
be so unnatural as to create an environment which would 
draw too heavily upon the adaptative forces of the body. In 
this case Innate would find difficulty in maintaining a state 
of coordination. 

The artificial methods of living must be made to conform 
as nearly as possible to the needs of the body. Damp sur- 



Mode! Site 


roundings might have no ill effects upon the individual who 
was living a very active life outdoors “roughing it,” but place 
that individual in a damp, poorly lighted and poorly heated 
house where he is less active and his expression of life will 

28 













CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


29 


be materially affected. Innate requires a proper environment, 
although not necessarily a perfect one, but it must be such 
that an adaptation can be maintained. 

If the building site is damp it will require special methods 
to prevent the dampness from entering the house. This is 
expensive and if the site is too humid such a method will 



prove highly unsatisfactory. If the location is cold the house 
is very likely to be cold. The site should be well adapted 
to the needs of the building. 


Aspect 

The importance of the aspect should not be overlooked. 
A southeasterly facing is generally considered best, because 





















30 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


it is dry and mild and has the morning sun and yet is not 
exposed to the hot afternoon sun. 

The main living rooms should be so arranged as to admit 
the direct rays of the sun some time during the day. This 
can best be accomplished when these rooms are on the south¬ 
east. Each room should be so arranged with respect to 
window space that there will be ample lighting and proper 
ventilation of the whole house. Care must be exercised, how¬ 
ever, that there is not too much window space which will give 
excessive heat in summer or too much cold in winter. 

In large dwellings there is a tendency for the halls and 
stairways to be poorly lighted and poorly ventilated. This 
should not be. Ample provision supplying light through 
windows, and ventilation from the outside should be made to 
insure plenty of light and air. 

Bedrooms should be well lighted and if possible direct 
sunshine should be admitted some time during the day, pref¬ 
erably in the morning. 

Soil 

The soil bears a close relation to health. The porous soils 
such as sand and gravel are considered the most healthful 
because they are driest. But there are objections to these, 
since they are easily polluted by leaky drains and cesspools, 
and are capable of holding a notable volume of ground water 
and ground air. Such air is almost invariably impure. The 
rain percolates through the soil until it reaches an impervious 
stratum which prevents it from penetrating any further, and 
it is held in the interstices or interspaces of the soil and forms 
the ground water. 

Ground Water and Ground Air 

There is a certain fluctuation of ground water and ground 
air. As the water rises the air is forced out of the ground, 
and as it recedes air is drawn in to occupy its place. There 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


31 


are other factors which influence the ground air, such as the 
perflating action of the wind and certain climatic changes. 
Thus the ground may be spoken of as breathing. 

If the ground water is near the surface the ground air 
will be noticeably moist and will produce a dampness of the 
atmosphere which will result in a decided cooling of the air 
by evaporation. If the ground water is deep the ground air 
will be comparatively dry, although the ground near the sur¬ 
face is generally moist owing to the capillary attraction and 
evaporation from the surface of the ground water. For this 
reason it is important that damp soils be properly drained to 
permanently lower the level of the ground water. This may 
be accomplished by properly laid tile. This will reduce the 
fluctuation of the ground water since it will be carried off 
when it rises to the level of the drains- In this way the 
ground air will not be forced out into the breathing zone to 
pollute the atmosphere. 

The ground air is impure due to the organic matter in the 
soil. This organic matter is decomposed by microorganisms 
that feed upon such material and break it up into simpler 
combinations, carbonic acid, ammonia and water. These 
processes of fermentation and decay result in a purifying 
action converting the complex organic matter into products 
which growing vegetation is capable of assimilating. The 
' presence of oxygen, moisture and warmth is essential to the 
proper execution of these processes. We can thus see that 
ample provision has been made for the natural purification 
and utilization of animal and vegetable matter. Nature pro¬ 
vides the oxygen in the ground air, the necessary moisture 
is derived from the ground water and the temperature of 
the earth is generally sufficient to supply the needed warmth 
for this natural process of purification. 

If the ground water rises too near the surface or if the 
building site is water-logged, the water may be drawn off 
by means of a subsoil drainage. This will also prevent fluctua- 


32 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


tion of ground water, for as this water rises the ground air 
is forced out and causes the atmospheric air to become damp. 
This brings about a cooling of the air. The moisture will 
ascend by capillary attraction into the walls of the houses; in 
the evaporation from the inner surfaces, heat will be absorbed 
from the surrounding objects and this will cause the houses 
to become damp and cold. 

This drainage may be accomplished by placing unglazed 
porous tiles with the ends in apposition, but not jointed in the 
subsoil. The fluctuation of ground water is of little conse¬ 
quence in itself; but we can see that in this way the water 
in wells may become polluted, impure ground air may be 
forced into houses, and dampness may thus be produced. 

Stagnant Water 

Stagnant water favors the breeding of mosquitoes and the 
development of certain dis-eases, malaria and cholera for 
example; hence the necessity for proper drainage. Trees are 
sometimes planted in such districts and they, together with 
the subsoil drainage, render the conditions more healthful. 
The trees and other vegetation in hot climates absorb the 
water from the ground and then it is evaporated from the 
leaves and in this way soil is made drier. 

BUILDING CONSTRUCTION 

Foundation 

In the building of a house the foundation must receive 
just consideration. As the foundation holds the entire struc¬ 
ture, such material must be used as to give adequate support 
to this weight. Care must be exercised in the evacuations that 
the basement be protected from dampness and that the entire 
site beneath the foundation be properly drained. The ground 
water should be ten feet beneath the surface of the site. 

It is recommended by some hygienists that the basement 
floor be of cement six inches thick to prevent the entrance 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


33 


of ground air and moisture. This should be covered with a 
wood floor. 

The preparation of the foundation is comparatively easy 
where the ground is solid, but if the site be water-logged, 
marshy, quicksand, or entirely under water, its preparation 
then becomes a problem that may baffle the best engineers. 
Artificial foundation beds may have to be resorted to. These 
are accomplished in several ways. One very common method 
is to drive wooden piles into the ground, saw off the tops and 
construct the foundation on these piles. Another method is 
that of the cofferdam. 

The foundation having been properly prepared, care must 
be taken that the footings or base course of the walls are of 
sufficient strength to bear the weight of the superstructure. 
The footings should be of stone or concrete and should be 
a little thicker than the walls. 

Precautions for a dry basement must also be considered. 
This subject will be discussed under House Dampness. 

The air of the basement must be kept pure by proper 
ventilation, since it is being constantly drawn up into the 
house. This will receive some attention in the chapter on 
Ventilation. 

Walls 

The walls of the house may be of brick, stone, timber or 
concrete. The method of construction will depend upon the 
material used. If timber is utilized the security of the walls 
will be governed by the timber posts, sills and plates. The 
materials used should be as little absorbent of moisture as 
possible. All wood should be well seasoned. 

Floors 

In order to meet all sanitary requirements the “floors 
must be secure and proof against air, dust, sound, vermin, fire 
and water.” But it is not often that the floors meet all these 


34 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


sanitary demands. Ordinary floors are made of hard boards 
tongued and grooved, tightly fitted and laid upon joists placed 
about one foot apart; the under surface is lathed and plastered 
to form the ceiling of the room below, or some sort of patent 
ceiling may be used. However, there is great objection to the 
space thus left between the floor and the ceiling, as it becomes 
a receptacle for dust and greatly endangers the spread of fire. 

It is better, according to sanitary demands, to have the 
floor of reinforced concrete, or the space within filled with 
mineral wool or asbestos; or the floor may be made of steel 
beams encased in terra-cotta with interspaces made of con¬ 
crete. 

Roof 

For roofing some nonabsorbent material is best. Wood 
shingles are possibly the most common in this country, 
although they are rapidly being replaced with composition 
shingles. The wood shingles are somewhat absorbent and 
are inflammable. Slate and tile are also used. The slate is 
a good conductor of heat, and is hot in summer and cold in 
winter. Tiles are heavy but are warm in winter and cool in 
summer. Lead, zinc and copper have all been used, but they 
are good conductors of heat and for various other reasons are 
not exactly desirable. The best method of preventing too 
rapid conduction of heat is to have an air space between the 
roof and the ceiling of the top floor. 

House Dampness 

Great care should be exercised to prevent the entrance of 
moisture into the house. A damp house is very objectionable. 
In a newly constructed building there is always more or less 
dampness coming from green lumber, mortar and plaster. 
This is known as building water. Before a new house is 
occupied it should be thoroughly dried by a fire in stoves or 
furnaces. Dampness from building water is only temporary 
and easily eliminated. 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


35 


Moisture in houses from damp sites, leaky drains, porous 
building material which admits rain and other similar causes, 
require the attention of an engineer who understands water¬ 
proof construction. 

Moisture from the ground water may ascend the walls 
of the building by capillary attraction. This may be pre¬ 
vented by properly draining the site and by placing a hori¬ 
zontal water-proof course in the walls. This may consist of 
asphalt one-half inch thick or a course of slate or other material 
through which the moisture will not penetrate. 

The ill effects of a damp house upon the health of the 
occupants can hardly be overestimated. Such houses are cold, 
being difficult to heat and ventilate. The bodily heat is too 
rapidly withdrawn. This necessitates adaptative action on 
the part of Innate Intelligence and requires an unnecessary 
expenditure of internal energy. 

Aside from a damp house having an ill effect upon health 
by creating an environment which is not conducive to the 
expression of life indoors, the dampness tends to produce 
moulds and otherwise injure the furniture and hangings. This 
results in a musty odor and creates a condition conducive to 
the development of cockroaches and water bugs. These con¬ 
ditions are repulsive to the finer sensibilities. 

It is a recognized fact that Innate Intelligence is able to 
adapt the body to various conditions and people who appear 
to be in a state of comparatively good health may be found 
in such environments, but why should we force Innate to 
adapt the body to such adverse conditions when we may edu¬ 
cationally improve the surroundings and make them more 
healthful? The educated mind is the expression of the same 
Innate Intelligence that is adapting the body to the environ¬ 
ment, so it is only reasonable that the educated mind should 
be used in as intelligent a manner as the Innate mind. It is 
the function of the educated mind to bring about an educated 
adaptation to the environment through the educated body and 


3 


36 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


to study the laws of nature and adapt them to the needs 
of the body. 

So it is in perfect accord with chiropractic philosophy 
that a proper dwelling be provided wherein the condition is 
such that there may be perfect adaptation to all the needs of 
the body. This is as much a part of the chiropractor’s work 
as is any other part of his duties and obligations to the sick. 
He need not be able to do all these things, but he should 
know what conditions are conducive to the expression of life 
in the body and why others are not. 

Fireproofing 

The expression, fireproof, is a misnomer. There are no 
materials that are absolutely fireproof, but there are many 
that, are fire resisting. A material may be ignition-proof but 
not capable of resisting high temperatures. Some metals will 
withstand higher temperatures than others. 

Fire protection is important from the standpoint of 
hygiene, since it is a factor in preventing loss of life and 
property. It will also be observed that fire-resisting material 
and fireproof construction is more sanitary than soft absorbent 
materials and improper house construction. 

Three methods are used in reducing the danger from fire: 
First, by the use of fire-resisting building material; second, 
by proper fireproof construction; third, by providing ample 
fire escapes and fire extinguishers. 

In a fireproof building all inflammable materials are elimi¬ 
nated and such materials as brick, reinforced concrete, stone 
and burnt terra cotta are used. As has been stated before, 
these materials are not fireproof but only fire-resisting. They 
will all be affected by fire if the intensity is great enough. 

In the construction of fireproof buildings, only fire-resisting 
materials are used. No wood nor other combustible materials 
are utilized. All spaces, air wells and air shafts are eliminated 
as far as possible. The floors are constructed of rolled wrought 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


3 7 


iron on steel floor beams, or of Portland cement. The roofs 
are made of burnt terra cotta, rolled wrought iron or cement. 

The stairways and landings are of brick, stone, cement, 
iron or steel, all wood being eliminated even for windows and 
doors. The partitions are constructed of fireproof material 
such as hollow tile. 

Every building should be provided with ample fire escapes 
to furnish plenty of exits in case of fire. This is accomplished 
by providing wide stairways and by furnishing sufficient fire 
escapes on the outside of the building. These fire escapes 
should be constructed of metal or some fire-resisting mate¬ 
rial. 

House Plumbing 

A system of house plumbing consists of pipes carrying the 
water into the house, the fixtures or receptacles which are 
used to receive the waste and refuse from the household and 
the processes that are performed in the house. The latter 
includes the fixtures of the bathroom—the stool, bath tub, lava¬ 
tory and foot tub; those of the kitchen such as the sink; 
those of the laundry; and the system of pipes which carry 
the refuse from the house into the main sewer. 

Between the pipes which carry the water into the house 
and those which, carry the sewage out are placed the house 
fixtures. There is a pipe leading to each fixture which carries 
the water to dilute the sewage, and a pipe leading from each 
of these fixtures carrying the sewage to the main house drain. 
The admission of sewer gas into the house through the fix¬ 
tures is prevented by the trap which contains water known 
as the seal. The trap is of no value unless it is properly 
sealed. The trap is simply a bend in the pipe, as shown in 
the illustration, in which water is contained. This water 
keeps the sewer air from coming back into the house. 

A system of house plumbing, in order to meet the require¬ 
ments of hygiene, must be properly trapped. There is a small 


38 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


trap for each fixture and in some cities an additional outside 
trap is required which protects the entire system. 

When some fixture loses its seal then there is great danger 
of sewer air coming into the house. The main causes for traps 
becoming unsealed are: the forcible ejection of the seal by 
the momentum of the flush; loss of seal through siphon; the 



evaporation of the water when the fixture is not in use; and 
by capillary attraction as when waste paper or some similar 
material is left in the trap and projects through. Siphonage 
is caused by a large volume of water passing down through 
a vertical pipe with which the fixture is connected. 

The loss of the seal by evaporation may be prevented by 
frequent use of the fixture, or if the fixture is not to be used 























CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


39 


for some time the trap may be filled with oil or some substance 
that will not evaporate. The loss of the seal from momentum 
may be averted by providing proper flushing tanks, while the 
protection from capillary attraction may be effected by not 
allowing anything to remain in the trap which will exert this 
capillary attraction on the water in the trap. 

Prevention of siphonage is accomplished by providing 
proper ventilation for each trap so there may be a column 
of air which may be drawn upon in lieu of the seal. 

Care should be taken that the seal does not become foul. 
The fouling of the seal is the result of back pressure from 
the sewer and may be avoided by providing a vent pipe 
through which the air may pass from the sewer and thus 
relieve the pressure on the seal. 

The sewage is carried from the house by the house sewer 
into the street sewer, from the street sewer into the district 
sewers, and then into the large trunk sewers. There are also 
relief sewers, storm sewers, under drains, and intercepting 
sewers. The entire system is known as the sewerage system. 

The amount of water required to carry away the sewage 
varies in different cities. In the smaller towns it may be as 
low as fifty gallons a day per capita, while in some of the 
larger cities it may be as much as 200 gallons per capita 
per day. 

At one time the sewer gas was considered the greatest 
menace to workmen in the sewers. But it has been found 
that there is little danger from this gas. Sewer air is very 
objectionable because of the very foul odor, but even those 
who contend that germs cause dis-ease maintain that there is 
little danger of contracting dis-ease from breathing sewer air. 






CHAPTER III 

AIR 


AIR 

CONSTITUENTS OF AIR 

General Considerations 

AIR, MIXTURE OF GASES 
ATMOSPHERE 
AQUASPHERE 
PETROSPHERE 
FUNCTION OF AIR 

Oxygen 

PER CENT OF OXYGEN 
USE IN BODY 

AMOUNT REQUIRED VARIES 

Nitrogen 

MORE IMPORTANT TO PLANT LIFE 
USE IN BODY 

% 

Argon 

MEANING OF NAME 
AMOUNT IN ATMOSPHERE 
ARGON GROUP 

Carbon Dioxide 

AMOUNT IN AIR 
SOURCES OF 
PROPERTIES OF 
COURSE IN BLOOD 

Ozone 

NOT CONSTANT ELEMENT 
WHERE FOUND 
HOW FORMED 

Ammonia 

HOW PRODUCED 
WHERE FOUND 

Other Constituents 

HYDROGEN PEROXIDE 

HELIUM 

KRYPTON 

NEON 

XENON 

NITROGEN AND SULPHURIC ACID 

42 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


43 


AIR PRESSURE 

Normal Air Pressure 

AVERAGE PRESSURE 
INTELLECTUAL ADAPTATION 

Reduced Air Pressure 

INCREASED RATE OF BREATHING 
EXPERIMENT 

SYMPTOMS IN REDUCED AIR PRESSURE 

Increased Air Pressure 

CONDITIONS IN SAME 
DANGER FROM 

Caisson Dis-ease 

SEVERE PAIN IN MUSCLES AND JOINTS 
diver’s PALSY 
BENDS , 

HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE OF AIR 
Humidity 
relative 

ABSOLUTE 

Cold Dry Air 

ADAPTING BODY TO CHANGE 
HEAT STROKE 

HEAT EVAPORATION NECESSARY 

Warm Moist Air 

INTERFERENCE IN ADAPTATION 
EFFECTS UPON BODY 

Cold Damp Air 

PRODUCES CHILLING OF BODY 

INTERFERES WITH INTELLECTUAL ADAPTATION 

Warm Dry Air 

very desirable 

LOSS OF MOISTURE FROM BODY 

Proper Temperature and Humidity 


CHAPTER III 

AIR 

CONSTITUENTS OF AIR 

Air is a mixture of gases, not a chemical compound, which 
envelops the earth and it is estimated to be at least one 
hundred miles high. This gaseous envelope is known as the 
atmosphere. The water upon the earth’s surface is called the 
aquasphere. The solid substance composing the earth is 
known as the petrosphere. 

Air performs a very important function in the interchang¬ 
ing of gases in respiration and in the regulation of bodily 
temperature. The gases contained in the atmosphere are 
given by most authorities in the following proportions, per 
volume: 


Oxygen . 20.93% 

Nitrogen . 78.10% 

Argon . 0.94% 

Carbon Dioxide . 0.03% 


With traces of helium, krypton, neon, xenon, 
hydrogen, ammonia, ozone and hydrogen peroxide. 

It is also found that there is a varying amount of water 
in the air, as well as dust and other substances. It is worthy 
of note that the air maintains a wonderful uniformity of com¬ 
position over the entire surface of the earth. This is un¬ 
doubtedly due to the fact that the atmosphere is in constant 
motion which maintains its proper mixture. It must also be 
noted that the air is not a chemical compound but is a mixture 
of gases. 

Oxygen (O) 

Probably the most important element in air is the oxygen 
which represents about one-fifth of its composition. This 

44 






CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


45 


percentage is maintained with very slight variation; for in¬ 
stance, the percentage of oxygen in towns will be slightly less 
than 20.93%, about 20.87%. 

When the atmosphere contains only 11% or 12% of oxygen 
it becomes dangerous, and death results when the percentage 
gets as low as 7.2%. A candle will not burn with the oxygen 
at 16%. Slight variation in the amount of oxygen is of no 
special importance. 

The amount of oxygen in the air has little to do with 
the amount absorbed in respiration, as this is governed more 
by the need of the body than by the amount taken into the 
lungs. 

Nature has made a wonderful provision in the protection 
of the body from extreme changes in the amount of oxygen 
in the air. This provision increases the degree of intellectual 
adaptation which is possible in the body. This is shown by 
the fact that there is a larger amount of oxygen contained 
at all times in the lungs than is required to supply the red 
blood cells. It is maintained that the alveolar air contains 
normally 16% of oxygen. The red blood cells are practically 
saturated with oxygen as they leave the lungs; however, this 
amount of oxygen may not be needed by the tissue cells which 
the red blood cells supply and the amount they absorb upon 
their return will depend upon what they have given off to 
the tissue cells. 

It can readily be seen that the air in the lungs at no time 
contains the full percentage of oxygen, since one at no time 
completely exhales the entire amount of air. In this way 
the residual air loses some of its oxygen and collects carbon 
dioxide. 

Animal life is sustained by the oxygen in the air while 
the carbon dioxide is essential to plant life. The oxygen is 
carried into the lungs during the inhalation which is pro¬ 
duced by the expression of Innate Intelligence through the 
organs of respiration. The oxygen passes into the blood and 


46 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


is combined loosely with the hemoglobin of the red blood 
corpuscles; then under the direction of Innate it is carried 
to all the tissue cells of the body. Here the oxygen leaves 
the blood and is used in the oxidation which is necessary in 
the metabolism of the body. 

The amount of required oxygen varies with different con¬ 
ditions that obtain in the body and is dependent upon age, 
the activity of the individual and his condition of health. 
Some authors assert that the average person will inhale about 
thirty-four pounds of air in twenty-four hours. This would 
mean a little over seven pounds of oxygen. Only about one- 
fourth of the oxygen inhaled is absorbed; therefore, according 
to these figures the individual would absorb on an average 
of about two pounds of oxygen in twenty-four hours. 

Nitrogen (N) 

The nitrogen in the air is of more importance to plant life 
than to animal life. It is of little significance from a hygienic 
standpoint, yet it is an important constituent of all matter 
containing protein. Nitrogen tends to regulate or influence 
the rate of combustion by diluting the oxygen in the air. 
Respiration does not seem to affect the amount of nitrogen 
in the air as there is no noticeable difference between the 
amount of nitrogen in the inspired and expired air. 

Argon (A) 

In 1894 Lord Rayleigh and Prof. William Ramsay dis¬ 
covered a gaseous substance in the atmosphere which had 
no chemical affinity. They gave this element the name argon 
which means in the Greek, “inactive.” So far as is known 
argon will not combine with any other element. 

The atmosphere contains about 0.94% argon, but so far, 
according to Rosenau, it has not been demonstrated in the 
body. Argon has no hygienic significance. Helium, krypton, 
xenon, neon and afgon form what is known as the argon 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


47 


group, since they will not unite with other elements to form 
compounds. These elements are all found in very small 
quantities in the atmosphere. 

Carbon Dioxide (C0 2 ) 

Carbon dioxide is a gas, a very small amount of which is 
found in the atmosphere. About 0.03% is ordinarily expressed. 
This means there are three parts of carbon dioxide in 10,000 
parts of atmosphere. This is a very small percentage, but 
when we consider the enormous bulk of atmosphere we appre¬ 
ciate the fact that the total amount is beyond our compre¬ 
hension. It is claimed that there is more carbon in the 
atmosphere in the form of carbon dioxide than there is in 
all other forms on the earth. 

In densely populated areas there is a slight increase in 
the amount of carbon dioxide. It may reach 0.04% or even 
0.05%. There is also likely to be more carbon dioxide in the 
air close to the soil than there is a few feet above. This is 
because the processes going on in the soil tend to produce 
this gas and hence the soil air contains a larger percentage. 
The air receives its carbon dioxide from such sources as res¬ 
piration, fermentation, from chemical action in the soil, from 
mineral springs, and from oxidation of organic matter. 

Carbon dioxide is a transparent, odorless and colorless gas. 
It is a very important constituent in the atmosphere and a 
very slight variation either in its increase or decrease will 
vitally interfere with both animal and vegetable life. Green 
plants in the sunlight absorb great quantities of carbon dioxide 
and give off oxygen. The body obtains its carbon from the 
food that is taken in while the oxygen is obtained from the 
air that is breathed. It is maintained that one acre of ordi¬ 
nary tree land will withdraw as much as four and one-half 
tons of carbon dioxide from the air in one season. Carbon 
dioxide is also absorbed by water; hence the oceans and other 
large bodies of water perform a very important function in 


48 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


this respect. In certain localities, such as industrial centers, 
a very large amount of carbon dioxide is given off into the 
air; but this is quickly taken up and thoroughly mixed with 
the atmosphere by the constant motion which is maintained 
by the varying temperature, air pressure and other involved 
factors. It is not allowed to accumulate in any one place in 
larger amounts than normal. In this way the proportion is 
kept the same at all times. 

Hygienists maintain that the regulation of breathing is 
largely dependent on the concentration of carbon dioxide in 
the air cells of the lungs. This, however, is not true since 
the process of respiration is not a question of chemical action 
nor the influence of any chemical element in the lungs or in 
any part of the respiratory system. The breathing, like all 
other functions of the body, is under the direct control of 
Innate Intelligence within the body. 

Innate Intelligence, recognizing the need for more oxygen 
in the tissue cells, will bring about an intellectual adaptation 
by increasing the respiration. This does not take place, how¬ 
ever, until the need has exceeded the already adaptative pos¬ 
sibility when the reserve amount of oxygen contained in the 
residual air in the lungs has been exhausted. 

In inspiration the air is taken into the lungs and the oxygen 
is taken up by the hemoglobin of the blood as before stated; 
then the oxygen is given off to the tissue cells. The hemo¬ 
globin absorbs the carbon dioxide from the tissues and it is 
then carried back to the lungs where the process is reversed. 
That is, the carbon dioxide is given off and the oxygen is 
absorbed by the hemoglobin. 

The carbon dioxide which is carried to the lungs by the 
venous blood escapes into the air cells. The resistance which 
it meets here depends upon the percentage of carbon dioxide 
present in the alveolar air. Normally the percentage of the 
carbon dioxide in the alveolar air is maintained at a pressure 
of about 5% of an atmosphere. If the pressure becomes less 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


49 


than this Innate Intelligence will adapt herself to this con¬ 
dition by decreasing the respiration until the normal per¬ 
centage is again attained; or if the pressure goes above 
normal Innate will increase the rate of respiration until the 
amount of carbon dioxide has been decreased in the alveolar 
air, for this poisonous gas must be eliminated. This shows 
how Innate at all times is working in an adaptative way to 
maintain equilibrium in the body. 

Ozone (0 3 ) 

Ozone is not a constant element in air, although of such 
potency that a very small amount may be of great importance. 
In centers of population it is usually absent. In thickly 
wooded sections and at sea it will be found in large quantities, 
but even here only traces will be found. It is thought to be 
formed by the friction of the sea water against the air in 
connection with the respiration of vegetation. It is also formed 
in nature by electric discharges during storms. 

Ammonia (NH 3 ) 

Normally there is only a trace of ammonia in air. It is 
produced by the decomposition of organic matter. This 
accounts for the larger amount being found in the air near 
the ground. Ground air may contain ammonia in sufficient 
quantity to be perceptible to the senses. 

Other Constituents 

Hydrogen peroxide is a very active oxidizing agent. Rain 
water and snow contain very small traces of it. Hydrogen 
peroxide is not constant in air, but may be found in very 
small quantities. 

Air also contains small traces of helium, krypton, neon, 
xenon, which have no important bearing from a hygienic 
standpoint. Nitric, sulphuric and other acids will at times 
be found in the atmosphere. These acids are formed prin- 


50 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


cipally from industrial processes and will, therefore, be found 
near industrial centers, rather than in the open country or 
at sea. 

AIR PRESSURE 
Normal Air Pressure 

Ordinary air pressure on the surface of the earth at sea 
level is, in round numbers, fifteen pounds to the square inch. 
It has been found that the average sized man is exposed to 
about 34,000 pounds of pressure. This pressure may be in¬ 
creased or decreased, and if the change takes place gradually 
so that Innate Intelligence will have time to adapt the body 
to the change, no harm will result. There is a limit, how¬ 
ever, either in a decrease or in an increase of pressure to 
which the body may be adapted. 

This intellectual adaptation obtains in every tissue cell of 
the body as well as in all of its secretions and chemicals so 
it can be seen that any sudden change in the atmospheric 
pressure will disturb the equilibrium of the entire body. 

Reduced Air Pressure 

When the atmospheric pressure is decreased it has the 
same effect on the individual that the breathing of rarefied or 
diluted air has. In this event the adaptation consists in an 
increased rate of breathing. It is also asserted that the num¬ 
ber of red blood corpuscles is increased, which in turn increases 
the capacity of the blood to carry oxygen. In the diminished 
air pressure there is a marked decrease in the amount of 
oxygen absorption and this accounts for the increase in. the 
respiration and quickened pulse rate. 

As previously stated, if the change from a normal air 
pressure to a greatly decreased pressure takes place gradually, 
thus giving Innate sufficient time to bring about an adapta¬ 
tion, man will be enabled to live in a healthy state in a 
rarefied air. As the altitude is increased the air pressure is 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


51 


decreased. This is because there is less air above to exert 
pressure. Naturally the air near the earth has the greatest 
weight above it to exert compression. The air pressure de¬ 
creases gradually until, it is assumed, it is gradually thinned 
into a perfect vacuum. If oxygen is added to the air it is 
possible to maintain life at a remarkably reduced air pressure. 
A bird was kept alive by P. Bert in oxygenated air at a 
pressure of 0.1 of an atmosphere. 

The symptoms produced in diminished air pressure will 
vary with the general conditions of the individual. People 
suffering from cardiac disturbances will be affected most by 
high altitudes. This is possibly the first symptom to be 
manifested in rarefied air. If there is any inclination toward 
heart weakness it will be observed when the air pressure is 
decreased. 

The effects of reduced air pressure will vary with circum¬ 
stances. There will be increased and deep breathing, with 
an increase in the pulse rate. There is likely to be dizziness 
and ringing in the ears. The sense of hearing, of sight and 
possibly of sensations, become impaired. There may be 
drowsiness and the patient may have a strong desire to sleep. 
The intellectual faculties become dull. Where the change has 
taken place very suddenly to the decreased air pressure there 
will be syncope, dyspnea, dizziness, nausea and weakness. 
These symptoms are commonly known as mountain sickness. 

Increased Air Pressure 

The greatest air pressure in nature is at sea level. Even 
the increased pressure in the deepest mines is so slight that 
it has no physiological significance; hence man is exposed 
to increased air pressure only under artificial conditions. This 
subject will be referred to again under the head of Industrial 
Hygiene. 

Some of the conditions under which man is exposed to 
increased air pressure are, for example, divers in diving bells 


4 


52 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


and diving suits, and caisson workers. At a depth of ten 
meters of water the air in a diving bell is compressed to one- 
half its original bulk, and as a result the pressure of air is 
doubled. At thirty meters, or about 100 feet, the pressure is 
quadrupled, exposing the diver to four atmospheres or about 
sixty pounds per square inch. 

The danger in increased air pressure is not in going from 
a normal pressure to a high pressure, nor does the danger 
come from the high pressure. The danger is not from the 
compression, but rather from the decompression. The in¬ 
dividual must be brought from the increased air pressure to 
the normal air pressure very gradually, allowing Innate suffi¬ 
cient time to adapt the body to the normal pressure of fifteen 
pounds to the square inch. If this is done no great amount 
of harm will result, although there are some men who are 
not able to withstand these changes. This shows a lack of 
intellectual adaptation through the body on the part of its 
Innate. In an experiment P. Bert exposed dogs to an air 
pressure of ten atmospheres, or about 150 pounds to the square 
inch, and then released them very gradually, producing no 
ill effects. 

When the air pressure is increased it results in an increase 
in the absorption of the gases of the atmosphere. There is 
an increased amount of oxygen taken up by the blood and 
the tissues absorb large amounts of nitrogen. When the 
pressure is released slowly these gases gradually escape from 
the lungs and no bubbles will be formed. 

During compression the symptoms are not so severe as 
those during and after decompression. During compression 
the symptoms are a deepening but slowing of the respiration, 
a slowing of the pulse rate, and an interference in evapora¬ 
tion in the water vapor. The increased pressure on the ear 
drums will cause pain in the ears and sometimes the ear drums 
rupture. There may be an alteration in the voice, headache 
and dizziness. However, in a short time, intellectual adapta- 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


53 


tion takes place and equilibrium is established by the internal 
change and there is at least temporary relief from these 
symptoms. 

Caisson Dis-ease 

The greatest risk to health and life occurs during the time 
the individual is coming from the high to normal pressure 
after the decompression has entirely taken place. This may 
produce a condition known as caisson dis-ease. It may be sev¬ 
eral hours after the workman has been taken from the decom¬ 
pressing chambers before the symptoms appear. Gradual 
decompression is the only thing that will prevent the mani¬ 
festation of these symptoms. When the workman shows any 
symptoms of caisson dis-ease he should be rushed back into 
the compression chambers and kept there a short time until 
Innate has a chance to establish equilibrium in the pressure 
of the body, and he should then be taken very gradually 
through the decompression chambers. 

The symptoms that appear after decompression are vertigo, 
nose bleeding, nausea and vomiting. The most common symp¬ 
tom is the severe pains in the muscles and joints which is 
known by the layman as bends. There may also be temporary 
or permanent paralysis called diver’s palsy. In the more 
severe cases there will be unconsciousness, and even death. 

When the workman is taken too quickly from the high 
pressure there is formed gas and air emboli. These may form 
in the labryinth of the ear, in the spinal cord, in the brain, 
in the heart, or in any other vital part of the body and not 
only be distressing but may even prove fatal. 

It must be remembered that the conditions produced by 
changes in the air pressure may be classed as traumatic, im¬ 
munity from which is not entirely a question of uninterrupted 
transmission. If there are subluxations in the spine at the 
time the workman goes into the caisson, or if subluxations 
are produced at the time of decompression, the interference 


54 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


thus produced will interrupt the process of intellectual adapta¬ 
tion. Such subluxations should be adjusted, but it must be 
remembered that if emboli are formed or if bends occur the 
result or the relief is a question of the natural processes of 
Innate in the body, and the results will depend entirely upon 
the ability of Innate to cope with the traumatic condition. 
Innate Intelligence operates through the body according to 
law, and it is possible for the body to become so affected and 
deteriorated that it becomes a physical impossibility for her 
then to repair it and restore it to normal. 

We have seen that the normal air pressure at sea level is 
fifteen pounds to the square inch. In order that the body 
will not be crushed by this weight it is necessary to have 
an internal resistance to equal this weight. This internal 
resistance is maintained in the body by the tone of all of its 
parts; it is maintained by the expression of mental impulses 
in the tissue cells. 

We have also observed that the combining of chemicals 
is influenced by the pressure exerted; therefore, in order that 
the chemical combinations of the body be constant there must 
be equilibrium established between the external pressure and 
the internal resistance. This is maintained through the adapt¬ 
ability of the expression of Innate in the body. As the change 
takes place externally there is a corresponding adaptative 
change taking place internally and this all requires time. 
Therefore, in passing the body from one air pressure to that 
of another degree, there must be a sufficient amount of time 
intervening to allow Innate Intelligence to bring about the 
necessary adaptation. 

The changes that take place under differing degrees of 
air pressure are not purely the result of chemical changes in 
the body as is maintained by some, but in all these processes 
we see the evidence of intelligent action which we believe 
is the result of the reasoning of the intelligence in the body. 
One evidence of this is that when the workman is brought 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


55 


gradually from an increased air pressure to the normal air 
pressure the gases that have been absorbed by the tissues 
under the abnormal condition will be given off through the 
normal channels, and less injury will be done.' It is interesting 
to note that in Nature, man is not exposed to a greater air 
pressure than that at sea level; it is only under artificial, man- 
invented environments that the body is called upon to with¬ 
stand a greater pressure than the normal. It may also be noted 
that without the inventions of man it requires quite a little 
time for man to be transported from the air pressure at sea 
level to that of the higher altitudes as on the mountain tops. 
This gives Innate Intelligence an opportunity to bring about 
an adaptation to this change, since the change in the pressure 
takes place so gradually. But with man-made inventions, 
such as the automobile and aeroplane, one may transfer him¬ 
self from sea level to great heights where the pressure is less 
in a very short time. This does not allow sufficient time for 
adaptation to take place and is much different from the slow 
process of climbing the mountains. 

So we see that, after all, most of the necessity for im¬ 
mediate adaptation of the body to changed environmental con¬ 
ditions is the result of the work of the educated mind of man, 
and not the result of the laws of Nature. In Nature we seldom 
see the necessity for sudden or extreme adaptation. But under 
our present artificial means of living there are such cases, 
and these necessitate a study of the artificial conditions as 
well as a study of the Innate laws of adaptation that there 
may be as far as possible an educated adaptation to the 
environment. 

HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE OF AIR 
Humidity 

Water vapor is present at all times in the atmosphere. 
It is the least constant of all of the air constituents, varying 
greatly under different conditions. The temperature produces 


56 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


a greater change in the amount of aqueous vapor in the air 
than any other factor. There may be so much water vapor in 
the air that the air is spoken of as being completely saturated. 
This is known as absolute humidity. If there is any excess 
over and above this complete saturation, it is given off as dew; 
it is spoken of then as having reached the dew point. It must 
be remembered that this absolute humidity does not represent 
a constant amount of water vapor, for the amount of moisture 
necessary to produce complete saturation varies with the 
degree of temperature. It is erroneous to speak of the air 
holding water. 

“As a matter of fact, the air has nothing to do with it, for 
it has always been clearly observed that the presence of water 
vapor in any given space is independent of the presence or 
absence of air in the same space. The amount of aqueous 
vapor which a space contains depends entirely upon the tem¬ 
perature and not upon the presence of the air.”—Rosenau in 
Preventive Medicine and Hygiene. 

The higher the temperature the greater the amount of 
water vapor in one cubic foot of air at a temperature of 
10° F., while at 100° ,F. there would be 19.1 grains at com¬ 
plete saturation. Since increased temperature increases the 
amount of aqueous vapor and this aqueous vapor in turn 
absorbs heat, we thus see a reciprocal action of the aqueous 
vapor upon the temperature. 

Absolute humidity is all of the water vapor that may be 
contained in the air at a given temperature. Relative humidity 
is the difference between the amount of water vapor that must 
be contained in the air at a given temperature to reach abso¬ 
lute saturation and the amount actually contained in the air 
at that same temperature. 

If the relative humidity of the air in a room becomes as 
high as 85% the moisture will begin to condense and form 
on the walls and objects. This makes the room damp and 
interferes with the ventilating and heating of the room. 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


5 7 


There is less water vapor contained in the air at high 
altitudes, the air being cooler. A large amount of rainfall 
does not necessarily produce an increase in the relative 
humidity. That is to say, a country with a very high average 
of rainfall is not necessarily a damp country so far as the 
atmosphere is concerned. 

Cold Dry Air 

Cold dry air is exhilarating and tends to quicken meta¬ 
bolism in the body, while warm damp air is depressing and 
tends to retard metabolism. 

The body possesses great possibilities of adaptation to the 
varying degrees of temperature and humidity through the 
action of Innate Intelligence. With the aid of the educated 
mind in bringing about adaptation in the way of clothing, for 
example, it is possible to increase the range of temperature 
and humidity to which the body may be adapted. 

Due to the fact that heat is being constantly formed in 
the body by the different processes that are carried on within, 
it naturally follows that this heat must be carried out of 
the body or it will accumulate and result in harm to the 
tissues, producing what is known as heat stroke. This heat 
dissipation is greatly influenced by the humidity, or in 
other words, the amount of water vapor in the air. The 
temperature of the air also has some influence on heat dissi¬ 
pation. 

Cold air is made to feel colder by an increase in the amount 
of moisture while warm or hot air is made hotter by increas¬ 
ing the moisture. The reason for this is that the moisture 
in the cold air favors heat conduction, hence draws the heat 
from the body at a more rapid rate than is normal, while the 
moisture in the hot air hinders evaporation. 

Innate Intelligence is able, through the specially devised 
machinery of the body, to maintain a perfect balance between 
heat production and heat dissipation or heat loss. Even 


58 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


though the temperature of the air may rise, yet if the body is 
normal it will not produce an increase in the bodily tempera¬ 
ture. Indeed, it is asserted that when the temperature of 
the air goes above 70° F. the bodily temperature would rise 
if it were not for the perspiration which Innate will produce 
through the sweat glands. As long as the perspiration is 
produced and is evaporated from the surface of the body the 
heat production and heat loss will be kept in perfect balance. 
But when something interferes with this adaptative process 
of Innate and the individual can not perspire, there will soon 
be symptoms of overheating and the temperature of the body 
will begin to rise. 

Evaporation is decreased in an atmosphere in which the 
humidity is high. The reason for this is obvious; the atmos¬ 
phere already filled with water vapor is slow to take up more. 
This is because molecules of vapor given off from the body 
collide with those in the air and are returned to the surface 
of the body as moisture. When this condition obtains there 
is an adaptation produced by increasing the amount of blood 
to the skin; this increases the temperature of the surface of 
the body, but allows for an increase in the heat loss by 
radiation, conduction and convection. 

The conductivity of the atmosphere for heat is increased 
by an increase in the humidity; hence a cool damp air will 
chill the body for the reason that the conductivity is increased 
and bodily heat is lost more rapidly through conduction. In¬ 
creased humidity interferes with the evaporation of perspira¬ 
tion ; hence a hot, moist air is heating to the body and deprives 
the body of force, making the patient feel sluggish and 
fatigued. 

There is much moisture given off from the body each day. 
It is estimated by Pettenkofer, Voit, Rosenau and others that 
the average individual under ordinary circumstances will give 
off through the lungs about 290 grams, and from the skin 
from 500 to 1800 grams daily. If this fact is kept in mind 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


59 


some idea of the necessity of proper ventilation will be 
appreciated. 

Warm Moist Air 

Workers fatigue much more easily when in warm moist 
atmosphere. Work is done much more rapidly in cool dry 
air and the efficiency of the worker is noticeably raised; in 
warm damp air the bodily temperature rises and the pulse 
rate increases. 

Mental and physical activities are reduced in an atmosphere 
of high humidity and increased temperature. This is due 
mainly to the reluctance on the part of the individual to put 
forth an effort sufficient to perform any great amount of 
work. There is a general feeling of languor because of the 
enervating effect of the air. 

There is no serious injury resulting from working in such 
an atmosphere, unless there is an increase in the bodily tem¬ 
perature, and then there may be serious results to the health 
unless relief is obtained. When the humidity has reached the 
point of complete saturation and the temperature is above 
88° F., compensation can no longer obtain through evapora¬ 
tion and heat stroke may result. The most noticeable effect 
of warm moist air under ordinary circumstances is reluctance 
to put forth any mental or physical exertion, and a loss of 
appetite. With a temperature at 75° F. and the relative 
humidity 80%, an individual not accustomed to such will 
require complete rest. 

It will be noticed that under such conditions Innate Intelli¬ 
gence is constantly working to bring about intellectual adapta¬ 
tion and that she is able to do so to a remarkable degree. 
The glands of the body are used to produce secretions which 
constantly bathe the tissues and keep them cool in the high 
temperatures, and at a proper degree of warmth in the low 
temperatures. The fact that the individual is indisposed to 
mental and physical activity in such an atmosphere is adapta- 


60 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


tive on the part of Innate. This inactivity is suggested by 
means of the languid feeling in order that the body will not 
be over-exercised and thus will not increase the amount of 
heat in the body; because under these circumstances the 
process of evaporation is interfered with and this is one of 
Innate’s principal means of regulating the temperature of 
the body. 

Perspiration is an adaptation on the part of Innate, for 
in this way the surface of the body is kept moist and as this 
moisture evaporates the body is cooled; otherwise the tem¬ 
perature of the body would increase with every rise in the 
temperature of the atmosphere. Not only does this help to 
regulate the bodily temperature, but it keeps the surface tissue 
of the body soft. If there was no perspiration, the surface of 
the body would soon become dry, parched and hard. The 
skin would become scaly and would crack and become chafed. 

Because of these adaptative processes it is possible for the 
body to be adjusted to great extremes in temperature. The 
body may become accustomed to extremely high temperatures 
even with high relative humidity, providing the change takes 
place gradually and sufficient time is allowed for the processes 
of adaptation to take place. 

It is very important that the kidneys be able to perform 
their normal function in order that these processes of adapta¬ 
tion may take place. The kidneys are important not only 
because of the function which they perform in the excretion 
of poisons, but because of the function which they perform 
in relation to the serous circulation. This is important because 
of the secretions that are involved. This subject will be 
treated more fully under the subject of Water. 

Cold Damp Air 

The body quickly becomes chilled in a cold damp air 
because the increase in the water vapor increases the con¬ 
ductivity of the air for heat. It can thus be seen that the heat 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


61 


producing processes of the body must be increased in order 
to maintain the normal temperature of the body. As we 
know, all activity of the body requires an expenditure of 
energy, so if the body is exposed to a cold damp air for an 
abnormal length of time it will necessitate an increased 
expenditure of internal energy to meet the increased demands 
for heat and thus dissipate forces that should and would, 
under normal conditions, be utilized in the metabolism of 
the body. If the heat production is at a minimum in the 
body, which it may be, due to several factors such as old age, 
infancy, or dis-ease, this exposure to lowered temperature 
and high humidity will result in injury to the body. 

An interference with the transmission of mental impulses 
to the kidneys resulting in a decrease in their functional 
activity may mean a retention of poisons in the body and 
produce a condition diagnosed as rheumatism, for example; or 
an interference with the serous circulation may result in the 
tissue cells being under-nourished. Both of these conditions 
will interfere with the processes of intellectual adaptation. 
Educationally, man may help in the adaptation by proper 
clothing and by giving attention to proper exercise. 

Warm Dry Air 

By far the most desirable air is the warm, relatively dry 
air; but as has already been noted, it is possible to have an 
atmosphere with a relative humidity that is too low. If the 
air is abnormally dry, and at the same time warm, there will 
be a great loss of body moisture due to the increased evapora¬ 
tion. When the loss of water from the body reaches 21% 
death ensues. In an experiment performed by Rubner and 
Lewaschew it was found that a man weighing about 127 
pounds gave off about 54.1 grams of water in an hour in a tem¬ 
perature of 68° F. with a relative humidity of 82% ; the same 
individual in a temperature of 68° F., but with a relative 
humidity of 82%, gave off only 15.3 grams. 


62 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


Proper Temperature and Humidity 

The most desirable atmospheric conditions are obtained 
at a temperature of 68° F. to 70° F., with the relative humidity 
from 40% to 60%. This is given only as a general average 
and will necessarily vary with many conditions, such as sea¬ 
sons of the year and occupation. 

Moderately cool and relatively dry air increases the activi¬ 
ties of the body, makes breathing easy and more frequent, 
and hence increases the circulation of the blood. Innate is 
thus enabled, in such an atmosphere, to bring about more 
perfect metabolism. 

Proper temperature and humidity of the air in houses, 
impurities found therein, source of impurities and their effect 
upon health, will all be considered thoroughly under Hygienic 
Housing. 


CHAPTER IV 
VENTILATION 


VENTILATION 


» 


Introduction 

VENTILATION DEFINED 
RATE OF RESPIRATION 

VOLUME OF AIR INSPIRED AND EXPIRED 
CAPACITY OF THE LUNGS 
AMOUNT OF AIR REQUIRED PER HOUR 
OBJECT OF VENTILATION 

Sources of Impurities in Air 

RESPIRATION OF PERSONS 

IMPURITIES FROM HEATING AND ILLUMINATION 
ACCIDENTAL SOURCES 
EFFECTS OF FOUL AIR 

Requirements of a Ventilating System 

EXCHANGE AND CIRCULATION OF AIR 
ILL EFFECTS OF VITIATED AIR 
REBREATHING AIR 
nature’s PURIFICATION METHODS 
NECESSITY FOR VENTILATION 

Natural Means of Ventilation 

THROUGH WINDOWS AND DOORS 
AMOUNT OF CUBIC SPACE PER PERSON 
THROUGH SPECIAL DUCTS 

Mechanical Ventilation 

DEVICES REQUIRED 
PLENUM SYSTEM 
VACUUM SYSTEM 

Washing the Air Before Admitting to House 


64 



CHAPTER IV 

VENTILATION 

Introduction 

Ventilation as defined by Webster is, “To cause fresh air 
to circulate; to cause inside resident impure air to be removed 
and replaced with fresh, pure air, whether it be in building, 
streets, mines, or sewers.” 

Shakespeare speaks of sleep as “Nature’s second course.” 
Fresh air may well be called “Nature’s tonic.” Everything 
else necessary for good health may be provided, but if there 
is not a sufficient amount of fresh air the tissues of the body 
can not perform their functions. It is quite as necessary to 
have plenty of fresh, pure air as it is to have a proper amount 
of wholesome food and pure water. Ordinarily not enough 
attention is given the subject of ventilation, especially of the 
average home. 

The average adult breathes at the rate of seventeen or 
eighteen respirations per minute. At each respiration about 
thirty cubic inches of air passes in and out of the lungs. The 
air in the lungs loses 4% of oxygen and absorbs about 3.5% 
to 4% carbon dioxide. The nitrogen remains the same. The 
temperature of expired air is raised to about 98.4% F. and 
contains approximately 5% aqueous vapor. 

This volume of air inspired and expired during gentle 
respiration, which is, as has been said, about thirty cubic 
inches, is known as tidal air. By forced inspiration another 
100 cubic inches of air in addition to the tidal air may be 
taken into the lungs. This is known as complemental air. 
By forced expiration it is possible to expel from the lungs 
100 cubic inches of air over and above the 30 cubic inches of 
tidal air; this is known as the supplemental air. There is 

65 


66 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


another 100 cubic inches which can not be expelled by the 
most’violent expiration; this is the residual air. The supple¬ 
mental air can, by forced expiration, be expelled from the 
lungs, but the residual air can not. Altogether there is in 
the lungs during forced inspiration about 330 cubic inches of 
air. An average adult gives off about 0.71 cubic feet of carbon 
dioxide per hour. 

Taking into consideration the amount of air breathed into 
the lungs per hour and the amount of impurities carried into 
the breathing zone by the expired air, it can readily be seen 
that the problem of supplying a sufficient volume of pure air 
in the house is no small problem. 

The amount of fresh air needed for the average adult is 
estimated to be 3,000 cubic feet per hour. The ventilating 
system that does not provide this amount of air per hour 
without objectionable draughts does not meet the require¬ 
ments of modern hygiene. 

In a system of ventilation it is not only a question of pro¬ 
viding a certain volume of air from the outside, but the great 
problem is to provide a sufficient volume of pure air of proper 
temperature and of proper humidity. Air that is laden with 
smoke, dust and suspended matter, or that which contains 
gas or foul odors, is objectionable and does not meet the 
requirements. Therefore, the source of the air becomes im¬ 
portant. The ventilating system must also keep the air in 
proper circulation at a proper velocity. 

The ventilating system of an ordinary building might 
seem a very simple proposition, but when considered care¬ 
fully it is a very great problem and one that requires the 
careful attention of engineers trained in that particular line. 

It is not the object of ventilation to provide an indoor 
condition identical with that outdoors, but it is to maintain 
a condition indoors conducive to a normal expression of indoor 
life. It is quite obvious that if indoor conditions were main¬ 
tained identical with outdoor conditions the desired results 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


67 


could not possibly be obtained, for indoor life demands a 
much different environment. It is necessary to give any 
system of ventilation as much attention as is given a heating 
system in order to obtain the best results. No system will 
work itself. 

Sources of Impurities in Air 

There are many processes carried on within the house 
that add to the impurities of the air. Such sources may be 
classified as follows: respiration of persons, impurities from 
heating and illumination, and accidental sources from proc¬ 
esses carried on within the house, such as house cleaning and 
laundering. 

It will be observed from a study of the amount of air 
inspired and expired and the impurities carried from the body 
in the process that one of the most common sources of vitia¬ 
tion of the air in houses is respiration. That these expired 
poisons may be diluted or carried out of the breathing zone 
it becomes necessary to have an adequate ventilating system. 
If the room is heated by a stove impurities will be added from 
coal dust and the dust of ashes. When the iron is overheated 
it gives off carbon dioxide and other gases. Open fire or an 
open blaze for lighting purposes consumes oxygen, gives off 
carbon dioxide, raises the temperature and increases the 
amount of aqueous vapor. 

Vitiation from accidental sources consists of dust particles 
of organic and inorganic detritus which are added to the air 
from walls, floors, furniture and hangings. Other processes 
such as laundering will add a certain amount of poisons and 
suspended matter to the air. All this reveals the necessity 
for exchanging the inside air for pure outside air. 

Requirements of a Ventilating System 

A ventilating system must not only bring about an ex¬ 
change of air, but it must also keep the inside air in proper 


5 


68 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


circulation during the time it is contained inside. Proper 
circulation of air is one of the most important functions of 
ventilating systems. 

The value of air circulation will be appreciated when it is 
known that an aerial envelope is formed around the body 
when the air is not kept moving and the temperature and 
humidity of this air will resemble that of a very hot, humid 
summer day. The effects will also be similar to those of 
heat exhaustion. This shows the importance of keeping the 
air in circulation in order to carry away the poisons that are 
being constantly excreted from the skin and through the 
respiratory tract. 

The effects of foul air are usually manifested as headache, 
fatigue, lassitude, vertigo, nausea, vomiting, collapse and even 
death. The chronic effects are anemia, debility, lowered 
vitality and disturbances in digestion. Prolonged exposure 
to vitiated air will necessitate increased adaptation on the part 
of Innate Intelligence. If this exposure is carried to an excess 
it will draw upon the adaptative forces of the body and make 
it more susceptible to the invasion of toxins and subject to 
changes which it would not be when under more natural 
environmental conditions. 

It is now affirmed by the best hygienists that there is no 
great objection to rebreathing air if provision is made for 
diffusion of the carbon dioxide and if the bodily odors are 
eliminated. In this way air may be properly warmed and 
kept recirculating; thus there is a saving on fuel. If air is 
to be rebreathed it must first be washed. There is, of course, 
a limit to the length of time air can be recirculated. At no 
time is the recirculated air equal to outside air and because 
this method is not properly regulated and carefully controlled 
it is not considered safe for use. 

Before considering methods for obtaining pure air it is 
interesting to look at Nature’s purifying system. The effect 
of vegetation upon the air is to consume carbon dioxide, 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


69 


especially in the sunlight. The purifying effects of the sun’s 
rays on the organic particles, the washing of the air by the 
rain which carries down the dissolved gases and suspended 
impurities, the natural constant diffusion of the air due to the 
wind, are all natural processes tending to keep the outside 
air in a state of purity. 

Man so far has been unable to find any artificial means 
of purifying the air and therefore must provide means of 
admitting air from the outside in a state conducive to sus¬ 
taining indoor life. 

Natural Means of Ventilation 

Outside air may be polluted with dust, smoke and sus¬ 
pended matter and it is then necessary to free the air of 
these impurities before it enters the house. Especially is 



this true in cities and where large buildings are to be ven¬ 
tilated. The most satisfactory methods of ventilating a large 
building is the plenum and the vacuum systems. 

In the ordinary home, ventilation is through the natural 
openings such as windows and doors, although special open- 















70 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


ings may be provided which will admit fresh air and carry 
out the vitiated air. A great deal of air is admitted through 
the crevice and openings around windows and doors. A very 
simple method of airing a room in cold weather when a direct 
draught is objectionable is to place a board a few inches 
wide and as long as the width of the window beneath the 
lower sash. This prevents the air from coming through the 
open window, but permits it to enter between the upper and 
lower sashes. This also has the advantage of directing the 
air current toward the ceiling. This is very effective in the 
sick room and is so simple that any one can use it. 




The size and shape of the room to be ventilated must be 
taken into consideration as well as the number of persons 
therein. The minimum amount of space allowed for each 
person has been placed by various authors at from 300 to 
1,000 cubic feet, depending upon the nature of the work 
carried on, the size and shape of the room and the type of 
ventilation depended upon. In hospitals where fever cases 















CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


71 


are cared for 2,500 cubic feet are desired, while in govern¬ 
ment barracks each soldier is allowed 600 cubic feet. 

The necessity for a sufficient supp*y of pure air can not 



be over-emphasized. When the windows and doors are used 
to ventilate the house they should be thrown open at different 
times so that the house air may be completely changed. We 
must not, however, go to the other extreme and jeopardize 
the health of the occupants by keeping the temperature too 


















72 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


low, yet it has been proven that cool, fresh air is more easily 
heated than warm vitiated air. 

When air is admitted by special ducts they should be so 
arranged that air may be evenly distributed over the room. 
The relative position of the inlets to the outlets is a question 
upon which the engineers are not exactly agreed. It is 
obvious, however, that their arrangement must admit of a 
complete change of air at proper intervals and that draughts 
will not be established directly between inlets and outlets. 
It is generally conceded that the best results are obtained 
when the inlet is placed above near the ceiling, and the outlet 
placed directly below near the floor. In this way there seems 
to be a more equitable distribution of the entering air and 
less likelihood of a direct draught between the inlet and 
outlet. The outlet should never be directly opposite the 
inlet, since the air will pass directly through the room and 
there will be very little mixing with the room air. If the 
room is crowded it is more desirable to admit the fresh air 
from beneath, but when this is done there must be a great 
number of inlets. In this way the fresh air is admitted more 
directly into the breathing zone and at the same time 
advantage is taken of the natural air currents in the room. 

There are many patent devices on the market for venti¬ 
lating through the windows. Such devices are very good 
and may be used to an advantage. Usually they are so built 
that the air is directed toward the ceiling as it is admitted. 
The same desired end is accomplished by placing a board 
under the lower sash as described above. 

Mechanical Ventilation 

By far the most satisfactory method of ventilating large 
buildings is the mechanical method. This is not practical for 
small buildings or homes because of the special devices that 
are required and the expense of operation. Mechanical ven¬ 
tilation may be accomplished by the plenum system, the 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


73 


vacuum system, or by the combined plenum and vacuum sys¬ 
tems. The most desirable results are obtained when both 
systems are used and used in connection with the heating sys¬ 
tem. Heating and ventilating are so closely related that they 
must be considered one with the other. A poorly ventilated 
room is more difficult to heat and an improperly heated room 
is difficult to ventilate. 

The plenum system consists of a fan to force the air into 
the rooms. These fans are run by water motors or electricity 
whereby the air is forced through ducts into the rooms. This 
system is made necessary by the great buildings, basements 
and large steamships, which could not be inhabited if natural 
ventilation was the only method employed. 

The vacuum system consists of suction fans whereby the 
vitiated air is drawn out of the rooms and replaced by fresh 
air through the natural openings. In this way natural ven¬ 
tilation may be made more efficient, but this method in itself 
is not adequate for large buildings. 

The two systems, vacuum and plenum, are commonly used 
together and when employed in connection with the heating 
device the very best results are obtained. The amount of air, 
the temperature and humidity, and the purity of the air may 
be regulated to a nicety in this way. 

A complete system of vacuum and plenum consists of 
plenum fans for forcing the air into the rooms, vacuum or 
suction fans for the removal of vitiated air, the ducts for con¬ 
ducting the air to and from the rooms, the necessary machinery 
to run the fans, and a proper heating system whereby the air 
may be warmed in the winter and cooled by ice 'coils in the 
summer. It is also necessary to have a device for washing 
the air. 

Washing the Air 

As the air is drawn into the buildings by the plenum fan 
it is passed through a chamber where it is washed. This is 


74 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


C 

l 



Washing Coifs Fan Steam Coils Mot air conduit 

Central Meatjnq Luith toashed air. 














































































CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


75 


done by forcing the air through a spray of water. A water 
curtain is formed by forcing water through perforated pipes 
placed across the chamber from each other and the water 
thus sprayed made to intercept. As the air passes through 
this curtain of water many of the impurities such as dust, 
cinders, bacteria, some of the gases, particles of decomposition, 
and epithelial cells, are removed. Washing does not remove 
carbon dioxide or bodily odors. Washing is one of Nature’s 
methods of cleaning the air as is seen in rain. 

After the air is washed it is passed over tempering coils. 
In the winter the air is warmed and in the summer it is 
cooled in this way. The humidity is also controlled. It can 
thus be seen that this method, although rather expensive, is 
the only real method of ventilating large buildings satis¬ 
factorily. 

























































■ 

































CHAPTER V 

HEATING 


HEATING 


GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 
Heat from Hygienic Standpoint 
Combustion 
Molecular Theory 
Body Heat 

HOW MAINTAINED AT CONSTANT TEMPERATURE 
INFLUENCE OF BODY HEAT ON HOUSE AIR 
INFLUENCE OF TEMPERATURE ON AIR OF BODY 

Proper Temperature of Buildings 
Requirements for Heating System 

LOCAL HEATING 
Radiation 
principle of 

OPEN FIRE 
OBJECTION TO 

Conduction 

HEATING BY STOVE 
OBJECTION TO 

CENTRAL HEATING 

Convection 

CENTRAL 
HOT AIR 
HOT WATER 
STEAM 


78 


CHAPTER V 


HEATING 

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 

Heat from Hygienic Standpoint 

The subjects of heating, lighting and ventilating will be 
treated purely from a hygienic standpoint and in no sense 
from the standpoint of engineering. The proper manner of 
heating a building is not within the scope of hygiene, but 
becomes a question of proper engineering and a subject to 
be considered from that angle. We are concerned only as 
the heating of buildings influences the health of the occupants. 

Combustion 

In parts of the country where the temperature goes below 
60° F. it becomes necessary to provide artificial heat to warm 
houses in order that health may be maintained at the least 
possible expenditure of energy. The most common method 
of producing heat for heating purposes is by combustion. Its 
obedience to certain physical laws is infallible. Heat is lib¬ 
erated from such material as coal and wood by combustion 
and is the result of the chemical action of this combustion; 
it is then transmitted to the rooms to be heated either by air, 
water, or steam unless the combustion takes place in the room 
to be heated; then it is distributed throughout the room by 
radiation from the open fire or conduction from above. 

Molecular Theory 

Up until the beginning of the nineteenth century heat was 
believed to be a substance that had no weight and the name 
caloric was given this hypothetical substance. Davy and 

79 


80 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


Rumford, through a series of experiments, proved that heat 
is a violent agitation of the molecules of matter. From this 
we have the molecular theory that as the velocity of the 
molecules is increased heat is produced and the temperature 
raised. The words heat and temperature are not inter¬ 
changeable. Heat is the cause and temperature is the effect. 
Temperature indicates the presence of heat and the degree 
of temperature represents the intensity of the heat, but not 
the quantity. Heat in the same amount may be imparted to 
two bodies of the same substances, but different mass, and 
one will be hotter than the other; therefore, the specific heats 
of the two substances are different. To illustrate: Place in 
the sun a receptacle containing two gallons of water and one 
containing one gallon of water, both the same temperature. 
Leave them for a given length of time and they will become 
warm, but the one gallon will be warmer than the two, because 
of the difference in the amount of water to be warmed. The 
same amount of heat was applied to each, but this did not 
produce the same temperature in both. Again the same 
quantity of different substances may be exposed to the same 
heat, but the temperature will not necessarily be the same, for 
some substances heat more rapidly than others. It requires 
more heat to raise the temperature of water to a given degree 
than it does the same weight of any other substance, except 
hydrogen. This is the reason water gives off more heat than 
any other substance that cools through the same number of 
degrees. 

Normal heat is produced in the body by the expression of 
calorific mental impulses and by the oxidation which is carried 
on in the tissue cells. The amount of heat produced in the 
body is adaptative to the needs of the body and is under the 
direct control of Innate Intelligence. 

Air is carried into the lungs in respiration and by the action 
of Innate the oxygen is absorbed in the air cells and passes 
into the blood. It is carried in the blood by the hemoglobin 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


81 


to the tissue cells where it comes in contact with the calorific 
mental impulses and combustion takes place. 

Body Heat 

The normal bodily temperature is 98.6° F. Variation above 
or below this point indicates abnormality. This heat can not 
be supplied artificially from without It must be generated 
within the body. It therefore becomes obvious that the tem¬ 
perature outside of the body is not regulated for the purpose 
of supplying the body with heat. The temperature of the 
atmosphere must, however, be regulated in order that there 
may not be an abnormal loss of the bodily heat. The bodily 
heat is being constantly lost to the outside air as follows: 
30% by contact with the air, about 43% by radiation and 
about 27% by exhalation and other losses. We may sit in a 
room that is warm enough, say 75° F., and yet if we are near 
a cold wall we will feel chilly. We say we feel the cold 
coming from the wall, while in reality we feel chilly and cold 
because the body is losing its heat abnormally to the cold 
wall by radiation through the air. 

When the air is comparatively dry the equality of the 
bodily heat is maintained by a steady but imperceptible 
evaporation from the skin. In moist air this evaporation does 
not take place so readily since the air is already laden with 
moisture, so instead of the moisture being absorbed by the 
air it forms on the surface of the body as perspiration. This 
is why one perspires more in a moist air than in an atmosphere 
having a low humidity. When the air is kept in constant 
motion there is an increase both in the evaporation from the 
surface of the body and also in the heat conduction by the 
constant supply of fresh air to take the place of the moisture¬ 
laden and heated air around the body. 

The normal heat given off from the body raises the tem¬ 
perature of the air surrounding the body and tends to create 
upward currents. This is Nature’s method in freeing the body 


82 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


from the envelope of vitiated air which surrounds it as a result 
of the natural processes carried on through it. Therefore, if 
the temperature of the room is too nearly the same as that 
of the body it will be necessary to make more provision for 
the ventilation since the temperature of the body would not 
be enough greater than that of the surrounding air to create 
sufficient movement to carry the vitiated air away from the 
body. That is why a cool room does not require the same 
amount of ventilation that a hot room does. 

Innate Intelligence is capable of adapting the heat of the 
body to a great range in atmospheric temperature, but in order 
to do this there must be a sufficient length of time to enable 
Innate to bring about the necessary adaptative changes in the 
body. If the atmospheric changes take place too rapidly this 
adaptation cannot be effected and the metabolic equilibrium 
of the body will be disturbed. This makes it necessary to 
exercise care in properly heating our dwellings. 

Proper Temperature of Building 

It is certain that temperature of the dwelling should be 
properly regulated and that it should not vary with the tem¬ 
perature outdoors, especially in the winter time. The heat 
equilibrium of the body may be easily disturbed by sudden 
changes in the temperature of the dwelling. Because there 
is an increased expenditure of the internal energy to bring 
about adaptation, the internal forces are dissipated and this 
lowers the resistance of the body and makes the individual 
susceptible to incoordination. 

A high temperature with a relatively low percentage of 
humidity will cause an abnormal evaporation from the skin 
and mucous membrane. This gives not only a sense of chilli¬ 
ness but causes an abnormal dryness of the skin and produces 
an irritation in the throat and nose. On the contrary} the 
bodily heat will be withdrawn too rapidly in a temperature 
that is too low. 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


83 


There are many factors to consider in determining the 
proper temperature of a room or a dwelling. The time of 
year, the processes carried on within the dwelling, the use of 
the rooms—that is, whether they are used for sleeping-rooms, 
living-rooms, or workrooms—all tend to influence the degree 
of temperature most advantageous to the inmates of the room. 

In determining the proper temperature of a room the rela¬ 
tive humidity that is to be maintained must be considered. 
A hot dry air is more desirable than a cool damp air. In 
winter the variation in the temperature of the average dwelling 
should be between 58° F. and 70° F. with a relative humidity 
of 40% to 60%. The temperature should be lower in the 
bedroom than in the living-room. 

The great objection to the average heating system is that 
the air is kept too dry; therefore, it is necessary to keep the 
temperature of the rooms too high in order for the individuals 
to keep warm. 

Requirements for Heating System 

In order for a system of heating to meet the demands of 
hygiene there must be a minimum cost of production and 
absence of impurities produced in the process of heat; the 
heat must be equitably distributed over the house; the tem¬ 
perature must be kept even, thus insuring continuous heating; 
and there must be a proper degree of humidity. There must 
also be freedom from explosions and danger from fire. 

There are three methods of heating; radiation, conduction 
and convection. There are two systems by which these 
methods are used: they are local and central. In local systems 
the heat is produced in the room by combustion or burning 
of fuel in grates and stoves. 

In central heating the heat is produced at a central place 
outside of the rooms and conveyed to them by hot air, hot 
water or steam. 

Even though these three methods of heating are usually 


6 


84 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


given, it is difficult to draw hard and fast lines of demarcation 
between the different methods, for, as a matter of fact, they 
overlap to quite an extent. The element of radiation is in¬ 
volved in both conduction and convection. 

LOCAL HEATING 

Radiation 

The vibrating molecules of a heated substance will set into 
motion the ether of space and in this way the heat may be 
transmitted as wave motion. We have an illustration of this 
in the transmission of heat to the earth from the sun. Ether 
waves are generated by the violent vibration of the molecules 
of the sun and the vibrations are transmitted to the earth and 
they in turn generate molecular vibrations of the bodies of 
the earth. This is spoken of as radiant heat and is illustrated 
by the heat from the open fireplace. 

Open fireplaces give off heat by direct radiation. This 
is the oldest method of heating and has been in use for 
many generations. It is not a satisfactory method, how¬ 
ever. The radiation of heat takes place through air very 
readily, but air is not a good conductor of heat. Heat may be 
radiated from the body very rapidly through the air to cold 
objects. As for instance, sitting near a cold wall one will 
feel chilly due to the radiation of the heat from the body to 
the cold wall, although the air in the room may be sufficiently 
warm to be otherwise comfortable. 

Heat may be readily radiated from an open fire, but it must 
be remembered that the intensity of the radiated heat is 
inversely proportional to the distance of the heated object 
from the place where the heat is produced. To illustrate: 
If one object is one foot from the source of heat, the open 
fireplace, and another object is three feet from the fireplace, 
the object that is farther away will receive only one-ninth 
as much heat as the one nearer. This is one of the dis¬ 
advantages of the open fireplace as a means of heating a 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


85 


room. A fireplace is very cheery and gives a room a com¬ 
fortable appearance and is very popular in the modern home. 
It is adequate to take the chill away when the weather is 
not very cold, but it is certainly a very undesirable means of 
heating a house in cold weather. 



Local heafincj 


Another objection to the open fireplace is that it requires 
a great deal of fuel. About 75% of the heat is lost through 
the chimney. There is, however, an advantage in the open 


























































































86 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


fireplace since it affords an excellent means for ventilation; 
there is always a draft up the chimney. 

Conduction 

Heat is carried through such metals as iron by molecular 
action and such heat transference is known as conduction. 
The fact that heat is transferred through metals by conduction 
is of vital significance in the question of heat losses and dissi¬ 
pation, as through walls of buildings for example. 

If heat be applied to any part of an iron bar or piece of 
metal it will be transferred to all parts of that iron by the 



molecular action until it is all heated. This can be illustrated 
nicely by placing the end of the poker in the furnace fire and 
in a short time the heat will be felt in the other end of the 
poker. 

The stove is a good example of the conduction of heating. 















































CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


87 


The heat is conducted through the iron of the stove to the 
air in the room, and then by convection through the air to 
all parts of the room. The molecules that are in contact with 
the fire first have their motion accelerated by the heat and 
this motion is passed from molecule to molecule until all the 
molecules in the entire iron are accelerated in their motion 
and thus the temperature of the metal is increased. Some 
metals are better conductors of heat than others, owing to 
the difference in the character of the connection between the 
molecules. Silver forms the best conductor of heat among 
the metals and is used as a standard of conductivity. 

In conduction heat is produced inside a fire pot, as in a 
stove, and conducted through the iron then radiated from its 
outer surface. This is also called indirect radiation and is a 
more satisfactory method than the direct radiation since the 
material of the stove will retain the heat for a longer period 
of time and allow for its more equitable distribution. In this 
way it is possible to heat the room more evenly than with an 
open fire. 

One of the objections to this method is that it is local and 
has all the disadvantages of a local heating system. The com¬ 
bustion takes place in the room and as a result there are 
certain amounts of impurities that are admitted into the 
breathing zone. There is the added disadvantage of having 
dirt and dust from the fuel and from the ashes and refuse 
from the process of combustion. These disadvantages are 
not encountered in a central system. 

In extremely cold weather the stoves are likely to become 
overheated in an effort to keep the rooms warm, and over¬ 
heated stoves not only increase the hazard from fires, but tend 
to scorch the air. Red hot iron consumes oxygen and gives 
off carbon dioxide which produces an unfit atmosphere for 
breathing. It is difficult to maintain an even heat in a room 
that is heated by a stove for the stove requires a great amount 
of attention. 


88 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


CENTRAL HEATING 

Convection 

The most desirable system of heating is the central. In 
this system the heat is conveyed from the central heating 
plant to the rooms either by air, hot water, or steam. The 
heat may be produced in the house that is to be heated, usually 
in the basement, or it may be produced at a distance, as in 
the case of steam plants, and carried through pipes to the 
house. There are three principal systems of central heating: 
Hot air, hot water, and steam. 

Heat is carried through air by convection. The air ex¬ 
posed to heat becomes specifically lighter and hence rises and 
the cooler air takes its place. In this way the air of a room 
is heated by its constant movement brought about by this 
phenomenon. The air becomes heated in the air jacket of 
the hot air furnace and creates an upward draft. As soon as 
the cool air rushes downward to take its place a downward 
draft is formed through the cold air ducts. In this way the 
air in the room is kept in circulation and at the same time 
properly warmed. 

Hot air, or as it is sometimes called, furnace heating, is a 
very satisfactory system for an ordinary dwelling or small 
building. It consists of a large stove much as that used in 
local heating. Surrounding this stove is a jacket with an air 
space between it and the stove. Pipes lead from the air space 
through the top of this jacket and convey the air that is 
heated by the stove to the different rooms. The cold air is 
taken from the rooms and conveyed through the cold air 
pipes back to the furnace and is admitted to the air jacket 
from beneath. In this way the warm air, being lighter than 
the cold air, passes upward through the hot air pipes and is 
replaced by the cold air through the cold air pipes. In this 
way there is a constant circulation of air through the pipes. 

This kind of a furnace requires much attention, but not as 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


89 


much as a local heating stove. Great care must be taken that 
the air is not overheated in the air jacket. If it is, the air in 
the room will be dry and stuffy and may even have a scorched 
odor. The furnace should be equipped with a water receptacle 
inside the air jacket. This receptacle should be kept full and 
in this way a proper relative humidity will be maintained. If 
this is not done, the air in the room will be too dry and it 
will require a higher temperature to keep the room com¬ 
fortable. Another objection to this system is that dust and 
dirt are likely to enter the rooms from the furnace. 

The hot water is a very desirable system of heating. 
Heat convection through water is practically the same as 
that through air. The particles of water at the point where 
the heat is applied become lighter as they become heated and 
because of this change naturally rise to the top and the 
particles that are cooler and therefore heavier sink to the 
bottom, thus forming currents. For this reason water heats 
much more rapidly when the heat is applied to the bottom 
than it does when heat is applied at the top of the receptacle. 
These principles are utilized in hot water systems. The hot 
water rises in the radiators and gives off its heat to the cooler 
atmosphere and the cool water returns to the boiler to be 
reheated. In this way there is a constant circulation of the 
water through the system. 

The hot air system is entirely satisfactory for small build¬ 
ings, but is not so desirable for large buildings. For large 
dwellings and public buildings the hot water system is much 
more satisfactory. In the hot water system a water jacket 
is provided instead of an air jacket. The water is carried 
from the boiler over the fire box through pipes to the different 
rooms where it passes through radiators and is returned to 
the boiler by continuous pipes. At the top of the pipes an 
expansion tank is placed to take care of the expansion of 
the water when heated. The heated water circulates freely 
through the system of pipes. Each radiator is provided with 


90 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


a valve to regulate the amount of water admitted and in this 
way the degree of heat may be regulated in the different rooms. 
Each radiator is provided with an air valve to allow the air to 
escape when the water is admitted, or to allow the steam to 
escape in case the system becomes overheated and the water 
is converted into steam. 

This system is easily cared for and easily operated. It 
requires a relatively small amount of coal and maintains a 



very even heat, and when properly operated there will be no 
sudden changes in the temperature of the rooms. There is 
less danger of overheating the air and lowering the humidity 
with this system than with the hot air furnace. 

The radiators may be placed in the rooms that are to be 
heated or they may be placed in the basement and the air 
admitted and passed over the radiator and warmed and then 
forced into the rooms. This is known as the indirect method 
























CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


91 


and is used in connection with the system of ventilation. 
It is used more with steam than with hot water. 

Heating by steam is by far the most satisfactory method, 
especially for larger dwellings and buildings. This system is 
somewhat like that of hot water, except the water is converted 
into steam. The temperature of the pipes and radiators is 
therefore higher than with hot water, but the pipes and 
radiators do not need to be as large. 

Very often this system is used in connection with the 
ventilation. The radiators are placed in the basement or in 
another convenient place and cool fresh air from the outside 
is passed over them and warmed. It is then forced into the 
rooms. Very often this air is washed, as described in the 
chapter on ventilation, and thus freed from suspended matter. 
At the same time the relative humidity can be controlled and 
this is very essential, not only as a means of providing air 
that is most desirable for breathing, but also in point of fuel 
economy, since air of high humidity is more easily heated and 
is more desirable in conserving the heat of the body as has 
already been explained. Steam heating is especially suitable 
for high and irregularly shaped buildings. The fact that the 
radiators and pipes are empty when not in use reduces the 
risk of damage to the house furnishings from bursted or leaky 
pipes. 

It is well to have the radiators placed near windows so 
that in ventilating the air will pass over them and be warmed 
before entering the room. 






CHAPTER VI 

LIGHTING 


LIGHTING 


Adaptability of Eye to Light 

DIFFERENCE IN INTENSITY OF LIGHT 
TIME REQUIRED FOR ADAPTATION 

The Eye 

MECHANISM OF EYE 

ACTION OF LIGHT UPON THE EYE 

INTELLECTUAL ADAPTATION NECESSARY 

Value of Sunlight 

EFFECT UPON HEALTH 
ACTION IN NATURE 

Natural Light in Buildings 

DIRECT RAYS OF THE SUN 

FACTORS DETERMINING THE AMOUNT OF LIGHT ADMITTED 
REFLECTED LIGHT 

LOSS OF LIGHT THROUGH DIFFERENT GLASS 
WINDOW AREA REQUIRED 

Artificial Lighting 

EFFECT UPON THE EYES 
EVOLUTION OF LIGHTING SYSTEMS 
BEST MEANS OF LIGHTING 
OBJECTIONS TO OPEN BLAZE FOR LIGHT 
DIRECTION OF LIGHT 

Psychological Effect of Light 

INFLUENCE UPON THE EMOTIONS 
SOFT LIGHT SOOTHING 
BRIGHT LIGHT STIMULATING 

Systems of Lighting 

direct 

INDIRECT 

SEMI-INDIRECT 

EFFECT OF INSUFFICIENT LIGHT 


94 


CHAPTER VI 


LIGHTING 

Adaptability of Eye to Light 

The eye has a great range of adaptability to the intensity 
of light. This is evidenced by the fact that the eye is readily 
adapted to the intensity of the bright sunlight or to the soft 
rays of the moon. In both instances there is no disturbance 
in vision, even though the intensity of illumination at midday 
when the light is brightest is almost a million times greater 
than the illumination from the full moon on a clear night. 
This adaptation takes place so perfectly and so independent 
of the educated mind that we give little thought to the great 
difference in intensity of light. 

It must be remembered, however, that although this adap¬ 
tation takes place so perfectly and without any apparent 
difficulty, it requires an expenditure of Innate force to accom¬ 
plish this action. If the change takes place too rapidly from 
a soft light to an intense light, without sufficient time for 
adaptative action to take place, the delicate structure of the 
eye will be damaged by the violent light vibrations. The 
change from the soft rays of the moonlight to the intense 
illumination from the bright sun takes place gradually. First, 
the night; next, the gray dawn of morning; and then comes 
the sun, whose rays are softened as they pass through a 
maximum amount of atmosphere near the horizon, and as the 
sun approaches the dome of the arc, the rays become more 
intense, since they pass through less of the earth’s atmosphere. 
Then the process is reversed as the intense light from the 
sun gives way to the softer rays from the moon. 

This gives Innate plenty of time to bring about the adapta¬ 
tive processes so necessary to adjust the eye to these extremes, 

95 


96 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


time being a very important factor in all the processes of 
the body. 

Thus it is appreciated that the subject of lighting is im¬ 
portant from a hygienic standpoint, since improper lighting 
necessitates an unnecessary expenditure of energy and causes 
impaired health. 

The Eye 

That we may better appreciate this adaptability and have 
a clearer understanding of the mechanism through which 
Innate Intelligence accomplishes this adaptative action we 
will review briefly the organ through which we perceive 
light—the human eye. 

The eye consists of a crystalline lens, powerfully refractive, 
held between two transparent liquids called the aqueous 
humor, which is in front of the crystalline lens and the vitreous 
humor, which is behind or posterior to the crystalline lens. 
The aqueous chamber is divided into an anterior and posterior 
chamber by the diaphragm called the iris, through which is 
an opening called the pupil, permitting communication be¬ 
tween the chambers of the aqueous humor. The retina, 
which is composed of nervous tissue, lines the posterior 
five-sixths of the inner surface of the posterior wall of the 
eyeball. At the back of the retina and in the direct visual 
axis is a spot known as the macula lutea, a yellow spot, 
in the center of which is a depression known as the fovea 
centralis. At this point the vision is clearest and it is this 
spot used when we turn our eyes and look directly at an 
object. 

With such a delicate instrument as the eye it is only rea¬ 
sonable that special care and arrangement should be supplied 
to protect it from sudden changes in the intensity of light. 
Otherwise the eye would be greatly injured by the glare of 
light. This adaptation is accomplished by means of regulating 
the amount of light admitted to the retina. This is done 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


97 


through the expression of Innate by regulating the size of 
the pupil. 

When the eye is exposed to light, vibrations are carried 
to the brain through the afferent nerve fibers and Innate 
Intelligence becomes aware of the light. If it is intense and 
is allowed to remain in contact with the retina the delicate 
nerve tissue will be injured. To compensate for this Innate 
Intelligence sends motor impulses to the circular fibers in the 
iris, causing them to contract and decrease the size of the 
pupil and thus shut out a part of the light rays. In a less 
intense light or in the darkness the muscular fibers are re¬ 
laxed, enlarging the pupil and admitting more light. In all 
of this adaptative action there must be sufficient time, 
although the action does take place almost instantly. This 
action is not automatic as some would have us believe, but 
is intelligent and under the direct control of Innate Intelli¬ 
gence. 

If we were living in the natural state of man’s existence 
there would be no need for a consideration of these natural 
laws governing the working of the human body and the in¬ 
telligence which controls these manifestations; but as man 
has increased his knowledge and has made for himself a more 
or less artificial environment, it becomes necessary for him 
to understand the natural laws that he may adapt his artificial 
environment to them. If man lived in the open outdoors 
there would be no need for the artificial lighting of buildings; 
but since he has created buildings it becomes necessary for 
him to study the laws of nature that he may produce a con¬ 
dition in this environment conducive to the expression of life. 
In providing artificial light for our buildings the laws of the 
physical organ of sight must be considered. However, the 
question of lighting is not alone one of artificial production 
of light in our buildings, but also deals with proper admission 
of natural light from natural sources. 


98 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


Value of Sunlight 

The value of the sunlight in respect to health has been 
recognized from time immemorial. Direct rays of the sun 
are essential in the development and expression of animal 
and plant life. The sun’s rays are Nature’s greatest germicide. 
They destroy almost all forms of germ life. Most of the 
chemical reactions are hastened or induced by the action of 
light. Light prevents or retards the development of the lower 
forms of life but promotes the growth of the higher forms. 

Natural Light in Buildings 

From the foregoing statement it is quite obvious that a 
proper amount of light, and if possible the direct rays of the 
sun, must be admitted to the home if it is to afford an environ¬ 
ment at all conducive to the expression of life. It is there¬ 
fore necessary to make special provision for the admission 
of light. The amount of light admitted to a building will be 
determined by its location and aspect, the source of the light, 
whether direct or reflected, the location and size of the open¬ 
ings, and the kind of glass used. The character of the walls 
and other inside surfaces will determine the light diffusion. 

Since direct rays of the sun give more light than those 
reflected, it is desirable to admit them to the house as much 
as possible rather than to depend upon reflected light from 
the surfaces outside, such as the trees and buildings. 

There is a certain loss of light as it passes through window 
glass. This loss is about 8% through plate glass while 
through double glass the loss is 10%, and through milk glass 
there is a loss of 50%. The amount of light in a room may 
be increased by the use of prism or ribbed glass which results 
in a more even distribution of light over the room. 

The window area of rooms in a home should be not less 
than 10% of the floor area, or not less than one square foot 
of glass surface for every seventy cubic feet of interior to 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


99 


be lighted. This is not sufficient, however, for a schoolroom 
or for factories. The schoolroom should have a window area 
not less than one-fourth of the floor space. 

Windows should be placed so as to admit direct rays of 
the sun and should extend within six inches of the ceiling. 
Window shades may be used to regulate the amount of light 
admitted, but care should be exercised in keeping down the 
dust, since it accumulates on the shades and is disturbed 
when they are adjusted. The dust then gets into the breath¬ 
ing zone and becomes objectionable from a hygienic stand¬ 
point. 

Artificial Lighting 

With the present day modern methods of artificial lighting 
it seems there would be little difficulty in lighting our homes 
and other buildings; but the question is not alone one of how 
they are to be lighted, but also how this can best be accom¬ 
plished and not interfere with health and produce eye strain 
and other conditions that are likely to follow improper 
lighting. 

It is interesting to note the evolution of the lighting sys¬ 
tems from the primitive man who carried a burning stick 
from the campfire into his cave and thus realized the pleasure 
of the privacy of his own dwelling, up to the modern lighting 
systems. For centuries man burned wood and other materials 
in their natural state and depended upon these for his illumi¬ 
nation. Then it was discovered that by dipping this raw 
material in animal fat more light could be obtained. Later 
the oil was placed in a container and a wick used. Then 
from this crude grease lamp with its wick evolved the candle, 
which was a great improvement over the former method. 
And so mankind groped in comparative darkness through cen¬ 
turies. It was not until the closing years of the nineteenth 
century that he found a better means of illumination. In 
1879 Edison brought out his wonderful invention, the electric 


7 


100 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


light. Even the evolution of this light would be interesting 
for there have been many improvements over the original. 

It is very obvious that the best method of lighting is by 
the use of the incandescent electric light. It produces the 
desired intensity, does not vitiate the air, requires little atten¬ 
tion, and is operated at a minimum expense. 

The objections to the open blaze for illumination are that 
oxygen is consumed from the air, carbon dioxide and other 
impurities are given off, the light is not constant, since there 
is a tendency to flicker and especially so in a draft, it requires 
more attention, is unhandy to operate and does not give the 
proper amount of illumination. Most of these objections are 
overcome in the electric light. 

The source of light must be so placed that it will not 
strike the eyes directly. Care must be taken that there are 
no surfaces reflecting light directly into the eyes. The light¬ 
ing system must provide illumination of sufficient intensity, 
yet without a glare which produces eye strain. While our 
modern methods of artificially producing light are a great 
boon to civilization, they may also be a great detriment to 
health to say nothing of the discomfort that is caused by 
improper methods of lighting our homes, schools, and work¬ 
shops. 

Psychological Effect of Light 

It is not out of order at this time to mention the effect of 
light upon emotions of the human family. Proper illumina¬ 
tion is commensurate with the particular functions carried on 
within the place illuminated. Note the soft light effects of 
the cathedral and the influence it has on the people who visit 
the place. Enter a church building with its “dim religious 
light” and note the calming effect which it has on the assembly 
of worshippers. To be sure they have gathered in the place 
for worship and are in that state of mind which would be 
expected of those in a revered mood, yet there is no question 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


101 


as to the influence of the surroundings and especially of the 
lighting. It would be quite out of keeping to have the cathe¬ 
dral as brilliantly lighted as the '‘Great White Way.” The 
architecture, the furnishings and the lighting all have a cer¬ 
tain influence upon the minds of the individuals. 

As the dim, soft light has a quieting influence so the bright, 
dazzling light has a stimulating effect. This is observed in the 
lighting of amusement places where the predominating feature 
of the entertainment is hilarity. The pulse may be made to 
beat faster, the thoughts turned from the serious things of life 
to the less serious, and the mind made to desire the activities 
of the pleasurable things of worldly enjoyment by the peculiar 
environment and the intensity of the illumination. Or the 
mind may be soothed into the tranquil moods and the entire 
being made to surge with emotion, while the mind is directed 
from the more frivolous subjects to the deepest thoughts of 
the philosopher with a proper arranging of the surroundings 
and a soothing and delicate lighting over all. While these 
things do not bear directly upon the subject of hygiene in 
the more commonly accepted way, yet they do have a certain 
bearing upon health and the physiological functions of the 
body, especially from the standpoint of environmental in¬ 
fluence upon the body and its adaptation through the action 
of Innate Intelligence. 

Systems of Lighting 

Direct lighting is secured by fixtures which throw the light 
downward into the room from which the eyes are protected 
by properly adjusted shades. Indirect lighting is from bowl¬ 
like fixtures in which electric lights are placed and the light 
rays are reflected upward toward the ceiling with no light 
penetrating the bowl. Semi-indirect is accomplished by using 
a bowl which will permit some of the light days to penetrate. 

The best results are obtained by a combination of the 
direct and indirect methods of lighting and in some cases by 


102 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


a semi-indirect way. It has been observed that the direct 
rays of light should not fall squarely into the eyes. It is 
also quite essential that in some cases there should be direct 
rays on the work or object under observation. To accom¬ 
plish this and at the same time to keep the light out of the 
eyes there must be a judicial use of shades and other means 
of softening the light. 

There are some objections to the indirect method in that 
all the light is thrown on the ceiling. This gives a very soft 
light in the room, but is not sufficiently bright and faces lose 
their expression; there is insufficient modeling of objects, and 
the interior will be almost devoid of character. This form of 
lighting, therefore, is undesirable for home and offices, but is 
not objectionable for places of amusement. 

There are also objections to the direct system since the 
strong direct light makes too harsh shadows and a light glare 
which is very objectionable. By properly diffusing this direct 
light and adding sufficient upward light we get a much more 
effective and pleasing illumination. 

By using the two systems, or better still, by combining the 
two systems into the semi-indirect, a method is obtained which 
will furnish an abundance of light and at the same time give 
one that is so perfectly diffused there will be no objectionable 
shadows and no harmful glare. 

Insufficient light may be quite as injurious to the eyes as 
too much light. As a matter of fact it is not so much a ques¬ 
tion of too great an intensity as it is of the proper light direc¬ 
tion; it is hardly possible to get a light of greater intensity 
than that of the sun, but we are very careful that the sun’s 
direct rays do not enter the unprotected eye; neither is it 
good to permit the reflection of the rays into the eyes, as 
from a printed page. 

(For schoolroom lighting see chapter on School Hygiene.) 


CHAPTER VII 

WATER 


WATER 

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 
Necessity for Proper Supply 
History of Public Supply 
Composition of Water 

CHEMICAL ELEMENTS 
FOREIGN INGREDIENTS 

States of Aggregation 
Universal Solvent 
Necessity for Water in Body 
Chemically Pure Water 

HOW OBTAINED 
TASTE of water 
Hard and Soft Water 

PERMANENT 

TEMPORARY 

Elimination of Water from Body 
Amount of Water Needed for All Purposes 

FOR THE BODY 

FOR DOMESTIC PURPOSES 

FOR CITY USE 

Water Waste 

CAUSES FOR 
USES OF METERS 

SOURCES OF WATER SUPPLY 

Rain Water 

SUPPLY NOT RELIABLE 
EASILY POLLUTED 
FILTERING NECESSARY 
DESIRABLE FOR LAUNDRY PURPOSES 

Surface Water 

STREAMS 

LAKES 

IMPOUNDING RESERVOIRS 

SOURCES OF IMPURITIES IN SURFACE SUPPLY 

104 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


105 


Ground or Subsoil Water 

WELL WATER 
SPRING WATER 
TEMPERATURE IN WELLS 
SHALLOW AND DEEP WELLS 
CONSTRUCTION OF WELLS 
SOIL AS A FILTER 

METHODS OF PURIFICATION 

Natural Methods of Water Purification 

BY FREEZING 
SELF-PURIFICATION 
WATER VEGETATION 
DILUTION 

STORAGE AND SEDIMENTATION 
SUNLIGHT 

Artificial Methods of Water Purification 

DISTILLATION 

BOILING 

FILTRATION 

CHEMICAL PURIFICATION 

Swimming Pools 

SANITATION OF 

SWIMMERS INSTRUCTED IN POOL SANITATION 

SEWAGE AND REFUSE DISPOSAL 
Methods of Sewage Disposal 
dry 

WET 

Sewage Purification 

SCREENED 
SEPTIC METHOD 

Refuse Disposal 

INCINERATION 
CITY COLLECTORS 


CHAPTER VII 


WATER 

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 

Necessity for Proper Supply 

One of the most important requisites in maintaining the 
organization of the material in the living body is a proper 
supply of water. It is absolutely indispensable to the expres¬ 
sion of animal and vegetable life. Although not classed as a 
food it enters into the composition of food and hence becomes 
an essential article of diet. 

The greatest value has always been placed upon a suffi¬ 
cient supply of pure water. The history of the race shows 
that the earliest settlements were made with a view to obtain¬ 
ing a supply of water; they were either on waterways or in 
places where water was easily obtainable from springs or 
shallow wells. 

Water is needed not only as an article of diet, but it is also 
required for sanitary purposes: for cleansing the body exter¬ 
nally, for washing clothes, and also for sprinkling streets and 
for other purposes such as sewage disposal in the thickly 
populated centers. Even in ancient times great sums of money 
were expended for the public supply of water. 

History of Public Water Supply 

A bit of history on this subject might be of interest to 
some. It is asserted by historians that there are aqueducts 
in China dating back to prehistoric times. Channels cut in 
solid rock have been revealed in Jerusalem in recent excava¬ 
tion which indicate that they were used for conveying the 
water supply from the country near Bethlehem and Hebron. 
There have been found in these excavations channels of 

106 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


107 


earthen pipes cemented together and covered with rough 
rocks. The fact is also quite well established that water was 
brought to Athens from Mount Hymettos and Mount Pen- 
telikon. 

As early as 312 B. C. water was carried to Rome through 
an aqueduct ten miles long. It is estimated that the cost of 
construction of this aqueduct was about $12,700,000. An¬ 
other was begun in 272 B. C., the length of which was forty- 
five miles. The water carried by this aqueduct was not used 
for drinking but for irrigating purposes and for flushing drains. 

Altogether there were at least nine aqueducts that sup¬ 
plied the ancient city of Rome. Of these nine, three are still 
used to supply modern Rome. One of these was finished by 
Agrippa in 27 B. C. 

We see by the foregoing that from time immemorial there 
has been a great expenditure of energy and money in produc¬ 
ing a proper water supply for the human family. It also 
reveals the fact that the ancients knew something about engi¬ 
neering projects which some of us are likely to consider as 
modern accomplishments. 

Composition of Water 

Water is not, as was previously supposed, an elementary 
substance. In 1781 it was shown by Cavendish that it con¬ 
sisted of two parts of hydrogen and one part of oxygen (H 2 0), 
and that it could be made synthetically by combining hydro¬ 
gen and oxygen in this proportion, and that it could be sep¬ 
arated analytically by various methods into its component 
parts. 

By volume, water is composed of two parts of hydrogen 
to one part of oxygen; by weight, one part of hydrogen to 
eight parts of oxygen. However, pure water does not exist 
in Nature since water is a universal solvent and in Nature 
it comes in contact with so many substances; therefore, it 


108 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


contains many substances in solution. Chemically pure water 
is found only in the chemist’s flask. 

Water is a liquid which is clear, colorless and odorless. 
To be palatable it should be cool, soft, well aerated and free 
from sediment and suspended impurities. One cannot judge 
the purity of water by any one of these qualities, for water 
that is palatable and gives no offense upon drinking might be 
polluted with that which would be detrimental to health. The 
palatability of water may be due to the carbonic acid present, 
which results from the decomposition of products contained 
in it. 

The carbon dioxide, which is present in rain water, is 
obtained from the air through which the rain passes. Carbon 
dioxide is also taken up by the water as it percolates through 
ground covered with vegetation. The presence of this gas 
increases the solvent powers of the water. Water may also 
contain metal in solution such as iron, arsenic and copper. 

The important foreign ingredients in water are those of 
organic origin, such as microscopic plants, vegetable fungi, 
detritis of vegetable life, minute insects, infusoria, ova of 
insects, minute parasites, and animal debris. Water usually 
contains millions of various micro-organisms, mostly harm¬ 
less, although at times it may also contain so-called pathogenic 
germs. 

States of Aggregation 

Water is formed into the solid state, ice, at zero degrees 
centigrade. At 100° C. water boils and is converted into gas 
or vapor, although water is contained in the air in the gaseous 
form at ordinary temperatures. Between these two limits, 
0° C. and 100° C. water obtains in the liquid form which is 
its most common state. Water is the most widely distributed 
of all the substances. It is practically incompressible. When 
heated it contracts until it reaches 4° C., or 39.2° F., and is 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


109 


at this point taken as the basis for specific gravity of liquids 
and solids. 

Universal Solvent 

Water is the most universal solvent known in Nature. 
Practically all substances yield to it. Most of the water taken 
into the body passes through unchanged, although it is only 
reasonable to suppose that some of it is broken up into its 
elements and united with other compounds of the body. 

Necessity for Water in Body 

Water composes about 70% of the entire weight of the 
body (about 58.5% per volume). A very great amount of 
water is required by the tissue for the performance of the 
bodily functions. As the gears of machinery must be bathed 
in oil to prevent undue wear, so must the tissue cells be bathed 
in water (secretions) that there be no undue wear. The tissue 
cells are spoken of as being aquatic in their habits. 

Rosenau in summarizing the use of water in the body 
says: ‘‘It enters into the chemical composition of the tissues; 
it forms the chief ingredient of all the fluids of the body and 
maintains their proper degree of dilution, and thus favors 
metabolism; by moistening various surfaces of the body, such 
as mucous and serous membranes, it prevents friction; it 
furnishes in the blood and lymph a fluid medium by which 
food may be taken to remote parts of the body and the waste 
material removed, thus promoting rapid tissue changes; it 
serves as a distributor of bodily heat; it regulates the body 
temperature by the physical process of absorption and evapora¬ 
tion.” 

Chemically Pure Water 

Chemically pure water can be obtained only by distilla¬ 
tion ; it is undesirable, however, for drinking purposes because 
of its insipidity. Before such water is agreeable for drinking 


110 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


it must be aerated; this may be accomplished by agitation or 
by passing it through a porous substance containing air. One 
of Nature’s methods of aerating water is found in mountain 
streams where the water flows down over rocks. The same 
thing is accomplished by fountains and waterfalls. It is the 
mineral matter and the gases held in solution that give water 
its taste, and it is the difference in these minerals and gases 
that causes the individual to dislike the taste of water which 
he is not accustomed to drinking. But this is purely a matter 
of taste and has no value from a hygienic standpoint, for 
the most impure water, water that contains so-called patho¬ 
genic germs, may taste very good. 

Turbid or muddy water is not necessarily impure from a 
hygienic standpoint when found in rivers, but when subsoil 
water becomes turbid it should be regarded with suspicion. 

Hard and Soft Water 

The question of hard and soft water is one that must of 
necessity receive some consideration, but it is of more im¬ 
portance from an economic standpoint than from a sanitary 
standpoint. Soft water is generally considered to be more 
desirable for drinking purposes, and it is certainly more 
desirable for cooking. From an economical standpoint, soft 
water is more preferable as the hard water requires more soap 
to produce a lather. 

Hardness of water is spoken of as being temporary or 
permanent. If the water remains hard after having been 
boiled it is known as permanently hard water. Hardness of 
water is due to the presence of the soluble salts of the alkaline 
earth metals, especially calcium and magnesium. Temporary 
hardness is due to calcium or magnesium carbonate held in 
solution as a bicarbonate by the dissolved carbon dioxide. 
The hardness is temporary because the carbon dioxide is 
driven off by boiling, and the soluble bicarbonates are pre¬ 
cipitated as insoluble carbonates. 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


111 


Permanent hardness, on the other hand, is due mainly 
to sulphates and chlorides of calcium or magnesium. These 
salts are stable and therefore are not precipitated by boil¬ 
ing. 

Elimination of Water from Body. 

Water is excreted from the body through the various 
channels. The kidneys excrete about 50%, the lungs about 
20%, the skin about 28%, while the other 2% is excreted 
through the feces and other minor channels. 

Amount of Water Needed for All Purposes 

The amount of water needed for all purposes varies just 
the same as the amount of water needed by the body varies 
with conditioning factors. The locality and the climate will 
enter into the consideration of the amount of water needed 
to meet the requirements of hygiene and sanitation. 

The amount of water required by the human body in 
twenty-four hours varies with many factors. The age of the 
individual and his occupation and health, and climate would 
be conditioning factors. However, authorities are pretty well 
agreed as to the amount necessary. It is estimated that the 
body requires a little less than one gallon of water per day, 
about two quarts taken as drinking water and the balance in 
food. 

There is a wide range of difference in the amounts esti¬ 
mated, for under some conditions, a minimum of seventeen 
gallons, or even twelve gallons, would be sufficient, while 
under other circumstances and in other localities as much as 
300 gallons per day per individual would not be an excessive 
or wasteful amount. The average amount estimated per in¬ 
dividual per day for domestic purposes is placed at seventeen 
gallons for all purposes. In 1918 the statistics showed that 
Buffalo used an average of 260 gallons per capita per day, 
but many cities used much less. In Berlin in 1913 the water 


112 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


consumption amounted to an average of twenty-four gallons 
per capita per day. 

The hygienic importance of these figures is insignificant 
since they are only approximate. There are a number of 
factors that are not taken into consideration. The figures are 
estimated on the number of gallons of water pumped and no 
account whatsoever is taken of the water waste through 
precipitation and loss through leaky pipes. Some engineers 
maintain that fully half the water pumped is lost in these 
various ways. Another thing that must be considered when 
comparing the amount of water used by different cities is the 
industries. Some industries require much more water than 
others, therefore, if a just comparison is to be made between 
cities only the water that is actually passed through the private 
meters must be considered. 

Water Waste 

Consideration of the subject of water would not be com¬ 
plete without some reference to the amount of water that is 
wasted. It seems a small matter to waste water. We some¬ 
times say there is plenty in the river. But the proposition of 
preparing the water for use and getting it to the individual 
for consumption may involve many phases of hygiene from 
several different angles and one of these angles may be in¬ 
dustrial hygiene. To get water into the home and factory 
requires a great many processes such as laying and main¬ 
taining water mains, purifying the water and pumping. This 
involves several industries and trades, so the problem of a 
water supply is far reaching and is of vital importance to the 
community. 

There should never be a sacrifice on the part of hygiene 
and cleanliness for the purpose of saving water. A sufficient 
amount of water should at all times be insisted upon, but 
certainly there should be a strenuous effort to eliminate undue 
waste. 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


113 


The main causes of water waste will be found to be leakage 
in mains and service pipes and waste from defective fixtures 
in the house. All of this leakage and waste should be properly 
attended to because of the direct relation which it bears to 
hygiene and particularly to industrial hygiene. 

The introduction of meters has been an important factor 
in reducing water waste. It is not the thought to limit the 
amount of water used or to deprive one of a sufficient amount, 
but there is nothing to be gained by an unnecessary waste. 
The introduction of meters in Milwaukee reduced the amount 
of water used per tap from 1,781 gallons per day to 644 gal¬ 
lons per day without putting any restrictions upon the con¬ 
sumers. It is an enormous task to provide a sufficient amount 
of pure clean water for a large city and certainly an effort 
should be made to avoid waste. 

SOURCES OF WATER SUPPLY 
Rain Water 

The sources of our water supply may be classified as: 
Rain and snow water, surface water and ground or subsoil 
water. 

The rain and snow water provide a supply for domestic 
purposes. This source cannot be relied upon in some sections 
of the country because of the variable amount of rain fall. 
Rain water is pure from the fact that it has been vaporized 
and then condensed the same as in distillation; but it does not 
remain long in this pure state since it is exposed to so many 
sources of pollution. This water is collected in receptacles 
called cisterns and tanks and used mostly for household pur¬ 
poses. It can readily be seen that water thus stored might 
become polluted from the surfaces with which it comes in 
contact. To prevent this special care would be necessary, 
and in the majority of cases the need for this precaution is 
not recognized. 

This source of water supply is not very desirable since its 


114 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


quantity is variable and also because of the difficulty in storing 
large quantities and in providing protection so that it will 
not become contaminated and thereby rendered unfit for 
household use. 

While rain water in its unpolluted state is a pure water, 
it is not suitable for drinking purposes until it is properly 
aerated. The air contains dust and other suspended impurities 
which will be precipitated with the rain and thus pollute the 
water. However, the amount of pollution is so small that 
it is of little sanitary importance. After the air has been 
cleared of these suspended impurities the rain water will be 
relatively pure. It will be noticed that after a rain the air 
seems clear and clean; this is due to the rain actually washing 
the air. 

It is necessary to filter rain water collected from the sur¬ 
face of roofs because roofs collect impurities from smoke and 
dust. The average filter used for this purpose is usually 
inadequate and receives such little care that it is of slight 
value. 

In the large cities or even in the larger towns the cisterns 
have been replaced with more modern and more satisfactory 
means of water supply. Rain water is soft and therefore is 
most desirable for laundry purposes and is also very desirable 
for cooking. It is not considered as satisfactory for drinking, 
however, as ground water or properly filtered surface water. 
It always contains gases such as nitrogen, oxygen, and carbon 
dioxide. The amount of solids varies. The storage of water 
in cisterns forms a good breeding place for a certain kind of 
mosquito, stegomyia calopus, which is supposed to cause 
yellow fever; but regardless of the supposed pathogenicity 
of this mosquito it is quite objectionable. 

Surface Water 

Surface water is derived from ponds, lakes, rivers and 
creeks; in fact, any water which is in contact with the atmos- 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


115 


phere is known as surface water. Surface water forms really 
the most desirable and satisfactory source of public water 
supply. 

Streams form natural sewers for the regions which they 
drain and ponds and lakes form convenient dumping places 
for the sewage carried by the streams, therefore it will readily 
be seen that the surface water is liable to great pollution from 
these sources. It therefore becomes necessary to purify it by 
some means before it can be used for domestic purposes. 

At one time it was thought that streams purified themselves 
in their flow, but this is now disputed and has been proven 
to be erroneous and should be strenuously denied. There are 
many factors at work in Nature which purify water in its 
natural state. Before civilization brought about so many 
artificial and unnatural conditions it was true that, with the 
small amount of waste material emptied into the streams, 
Nature would, through her natural processes, keep the waters 
of the streams in a state of natural purity. But in the present 
day with not only the sewage of our large cities pouring into 
the rivers and lake, but also the waste material from factories 
and different industries, it becomes necessary to use some 
artificial methods for water purification. 

Lakes, from a sanitary standpoint, form a more desirable 
source of public water supply than rivers. There are several 
reasons for this. First: there is possible a greater dilution 
of the impurities that reach the lake. Second: there is greater 
opportunity for sedimentation which is a very important 
process in water purification. Third: the water is softer than 
river water and freer from organic impurities. 

The greatest problem that a city getting its water supply 
from a lake has to solve is how to keep its sewage from pol¬ 
luting its own water supply. To prevent this, it is necessary 
to place the intake for the water supply far out in the lake. 
The danger from pollution has become so great in some places, 
as in Chicago, that special canals have been constructed to 


116 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


carry the sewage into other channels rather than empty it into 
the lake. 

The impurities from the sewage may travel a great dis¬ 
tance into the lakes. Serious sewage pollution was found ten 
miles out in the lake from the mouth of the Detroit River. 
Pollution has been found as far as eighteen miles from the 
shore in some places. 

So it is readily observed that, notwithstanding the fact 
that the lakes and ponds furnish a more desirable public water 
supply, yet this source is not, by any means, free from objec¬ 
tions. 

The impounding reservoir, which is an artificial reservoir 
for the purpose of storing up water, is another very reliable 
source of public water supply. These reservoirs are often 
built in the mountains by placing a dam across a ravine or 
canyon. The largest dam in the world is the New Croton 
across the Esopus Creek in the Catskill mountains in New 
York. It is 248 feet high, 185 feet thick at the bottom and 
eleven feet thick at the top. This impounding reservoir 
furnishes an addition to the water supply of New York 
City. 

There are many advantages to the impounding reservoirs, 
but there are also many disadvantages. One advantage is 
that the area drained is comparatively small and therefore the 
pollution from that source is lessened; also the storage factor 
which is experienced in this reservoir is an advantage. In 
this way many of the so-called pathogenic microorganisms die 
before they are carried to the consumer. A disadvantage is 
that they are open to the atmosphere and light and this is 
conducive to stagnation because the water is still. This results 
in an increase in the growth of algae and other microscopic 
organisms. The stagnation of the water results in an increase 
of the products of decomposition. This, together with the 
microorganisms and algae, produce the foul smell and bad 
taste of the water. 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


117 


The stagnation of impounding reservoirs and small lakes 
may become a vital factor from a hygienic standpoint. If the 
water is less than twenty feet deep it will be kept in motion 
by the wind and in this way will not become stagnant, but 
if it is more than twenty feet deep the lower portion will re¬ 
main still. This prevents the water from mixing and therefore 
the under portion will become stagnant while the surface will 
not. If the water supply is taken near the surface there will 
not be so much danger from the stagnant water, but even then 
there are times of the year when there is a complete stirring 
up of the water. This mixing of the surface water and the 
bottom water takes place twice a year, in the spring and in 
the fall. This mixing is the result of the changing of the tem¬ 
perature of the surface water. During the summer the sur¬ 
face water becomes warm and the temperature may reach 
80° F. In this way the warm water remains on top but is 
kept stirred up by the wind. The wind will not usually create 
a disturbance for more than twenty feet except in very large 
lakes where it may be as great as forty feet. 

As winter approaches the water cools until finally the tem¬ 
perature of the surface water becomes the same or more nearly 
the same as the bottom water. Then the wind exerts a deeper 
influence and the surface and deep water will mix. During 
this process Vertical currents may be produced. This mixing 
continues until all the water has been thoroughly mixed and 
until the temperature of the surface water goes below the 
point of maximum density which occurs at 4° C. The cold 
water accumulates on the surface where ice is often formed. 
In the spring the process is just reversed. The fall mixing of 
the water is much more thorough and intense than the spring 
mixing. 

The changes brought by this mixing are obvious. The 
surface water contains a large amount of oxygen. The bot¬ 
tom water contains much less oxygen but a great quantity of 
decomposed products. The oxygen is carried to the bottom 


118 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


and there oxidizes and neutralizes some of the products of 
decomposition. 

The sources of impurities in surface water are various. 
One of the most menacing sources is from the sewage which 
is carried from the centers of population. In the rivers it is 
the sewage of the towns and cities situated above. In the 
lakes it is usually the sewage of the city itself that is likely 
to pollute its own water supply. Under the present condi¬ 
tions it seems that it is easier to purify the water supply 
than to purify the sewage or provide some other method for 
its disposal. 

Naturally the water of rivers is purest near the source. 
The reason for this is that the rivers form a natural drainage 
for the land through which they flow. The waste products 
from every process carried on in that territory find their way 
into the streams as a natural result of the law of gravity. 
The water will be found to contain large amounts of mineral 
and organic matter after passing through populated and cul¬ 
tivated areas. Purification of rivers is considered under Water 
Purification. 

Ground or Subsoil Water 

In the consideration of' the three sources of water supply 
it is difficult to draw definite lines of demarcation since the 
rain and snow water soon becomes surface water and the sur¬ 
face water may percolate through the ground and become sub¬ 
soil water. 

Well water and spring water are classed as ground or sub¬ 
soil water. From a hygienic standpoint water obtained from 
wells or springs forms a very reliable and satisfactory source 
of supply. 

Especially is well or spring water desirable for private 
domestic use, since it is usually in a reasonable degree of 
purity and does not, therefore, require any artificial process 
for purification. The sources of water supply used for public 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


119 


purposes, made necessary because of the volume of water 
required, are not so satisfactory for a private or domestic 
supply because its purification would entail too great an ex¬ 
pense to warrant the practicability on such a small scale. 
Therefore, the most desirable source when only a limited 
amount of water is required is the wells. 

Wells may be used for public water supply and are in some 
of the smaller towns, but they are not so practicable as their 
supply is likely to be inconstant. In other words, there is 
danger of the wells going dry, and since they are put down 
at a great expense, this would be too great a risk to take even 
though the water thus obtained is satisfactory from a hygienic 
standpoint. 



The above illustration shows the fluctuation of ground water. When the 
ground water is at the low mark the shallow well becomes dry; as the 
water rises it flows into the well. When the water has reached the high 
mark the intermittent spring becomes a flowing spring. The pressure of 
the ground water is great enough to produce flowing wells down on the level. 

Not all wells, by any means, will furnish a pure water 
supply. There are many factors to consider from the view¬ 
point of the pollution of well water and these will be con¬ 
sidered in due time. When water reaches an impervious strata 
it remains at that level and moves in a horizontal plane. 
Water may form in beds or be found in underground streams. 
It is only in the limestone regions that water forms in streams 
under the ground. 


















120 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 



constructed u/ell f polluted by seepage thru limestone. 














































CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


121 


The depth at which water is found beneath the surface 
varies. The water directly beneath the surface, or that which 
is derived from surface drainage and the rainfall, is, by some, 
styled the ground water. This is the shallow water. That 
which is found at a lower level is called the lower subsoil 
water or underground water. 

The ground water does not provide a very desirable source 
of well water because there is danger of pollution from the 
surface. The degree of this impurity will depend largely upon 
the character of the soil. If it is sandy and thus provides a 
good filter medium there is little danger from pollution; but 
if the soil is of a limestone formation it makes a very poor 
filter and the shallow water is likely to be polluted from the 
surface drainage. 

The subsoil water moves in the direction of the nearest 
body of water. That is, if it is near a river or lake its 
movement will be in the direction of this river or lake. 
For this reason a well near the seashore will contain fresh 
water. 

In wells less than fifty feet deep the temperature of the 
water will be influenced by that of the atmosphere. It will 
be warmer in summer and cooler in winter. Some authors 
put this depth at much less than fifty feet, maintaining that 
the atmospheric temperature will have no influence whatsoever 
at such a depth. It is true, however, and the fact is undis¬ 
puted, that in wells 50 feet deep or more the water is cool 
and the temperature remains constant. It is not influenced 
by the change in atmospheric temperature. 

Sand and gravel deposits form the best source through 
which to obtain subsoil water. To supply any very great 
amount there must be a number of wells and these must be 
far enough apart so as not to draw from the same territory. 
Seventy-eight million gallons of subsoil water per day is pro¬ 
vided at Brooklyn from twenty-four separate pumping stations. 
Memphis, Tennessee, is the largest city in the United States 


122 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 























CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


123 


which gets its entire water supply from sand and gravel 
deposits. 

Sandstone rock furnishes an excellent source for subsoil 
water since it makes an excellent filter. Because of the limited 
amount of water obtained in a sandstone formation this source 
is practicable only for a very limited supply. 

Limestone formation is the most undesirable source of 
subsoil water supply from a hygienic standpoint. Limestone 
is not porous and therefore has no filtering qualities. If water 
does pass through this sort of a formation it must travel 
through its crevices and fissures. 

It is very difficult to know where the pollution of water 
passing through limestone originates. As these fissures are 
usually very long, and as the water is in no way filtered as 
it passes through them, the contamination might enter the 
water at a point far distant from where the well is sunk. The 
water supply from limestone is likely to be inconstant because 
the water is not contained in the limestone, but flows through 
the cracks and crevices. In this way it may soon flow away 
unless the source is replenished by rain or snow. 

Water from the subsoil is obtained, as has been stated, 
from wells. Wells are classified as shallow and deep. By a 
shallow well is commonly meant one that is dug and not 
more than thirty feet deep. This type is usually walled up 
with brick or stone and is from five to six feet in diameter. 
Shallow wells may also be driven. That is, a gaspipe with a 
sand point is driven into the ground until the water-table is 
reached, the water being pumped out with an ordinary suction 
pump. 

Shallow wells must never be considered a satisfactory 
source of water supply where there are conditions existing 
which would result in such pollution of the ground that the 
water percolating through can not be more or less filtered. 
Sewage polluted soil never is satisfactory for shallow wells. 

Deep wells are drilled and are from six to eight inches in 


124 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 
































































CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


125 


diameter. The water from deep wells may be free from con¬ 
tamination but may contain a great deal of mineral in solu¬ 
tion and different salts which render it permanently or 
temporarily hard. This decreases its value from a sanitary 
viewpoint and more particularly from an economic standpoint. 

Special attention should be given the construction of the 
well. The casing or walls should be as tight as possible. 
Special care should be exercised against the possibility of 
surface water percolating through the casing as this drainage 
will bring impurities. 

The casing should project far enough above the surface 
of the ground to insure against water running from the sur¬ 
face. It should extend at least eighteen inches above the 
ground. The well should have a tight covering. 

The ground possesses great filtering qualities and there¬ 
fore great quantities of impurities will be taken from the 
water as it filters through. The danger is when the ground 
becomes so filled with impurities that its filtering qualities 
have been destroyed or when there is not sufficient distance 
between the source of pollution and the water level; also 
when the soil is of a limestone formation and the water, instead 
of percolating through it, passes through cracks and crevices, 
in which event it will in no sense be filtered. 

It was at one time considered that wells should be ven¬ 
tilated and a great deal of stress was laid upon it. When it is 
taken into consideration that the water under ground is in no 
way ventilated except through the natural means, it will 
readily be understood that it is not necessary to provide ven¬ 
tilation merely because the water has been tapped by a well. 

If the origin of pollution, such as cesspools, is too near 
the well or the well is too shallow, not allowing enough dis¬ 
tance for purification, there will be great danger from such 
sources. The greatest danger is in the shallow wells. How¬ 
ever, these are entirely satisfactory as a source of domestic 
supply, providing the soil is of a sandy or gravel formation 


126 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


and there are no barnyard or cesspools, for example, too near 
the wells. A shallow well in a limestone region is not satis¬ 
factory and should be discarded when at all possible. If it 
is necessary to use such, every precaution possible should be 
taken to eliminate the possibility of contamination. 

METHODS OF PURIFICATION 

Natural Methods of Water Purification 

In considering the subject of water purification it is not 
our thought to go into detail and explain the processes that 
are necessary to accomplish a pure water supply, but to deal 
with the subject in a general way that we may appreciate 
what is necessary in this line. 

We will first take note of the methods used by Nature in 
purifying water. Nature’s method of obtaining chemically 
pure water is by evaporation and condensation. The result 
of this method is the snow and rain water. About three- 
fourths of the earth’s surface is covered with water. The 
sun acts as a great furnace and the atmosphere as a vast 
still. In this way we see that a great quantity of water is 
distilled and returned to the earth in a state of purity. It is 
estimated by Summerville that “186,240 cubic miles of water 
are annually raised from the surface of the globe in the form 
of vapor chiefly in the intertropical seas.” 

It is entirely erroneous to assume that the impurities in 
water are eliminated by freezing. Ice may contain great 
quantities of impurities, even so-called pathogenic germs. It 
has been shown that many germs are not destroyed by freez¬ 
ing. It is true, however, that ice will be purer than the water 
from which it is taken. 

There are certain processes which result in a purifying in¬ 
fluence as water is crystallized. As ice forms it excludes sus¬ 
pended matter and even under certain conditions will exclude 
dissolved substances. It will thus be seen that even though 


CHIROPRACTIC hygiene 


12? 


ice may not be pure, the danger from its use is greatly re¬ 
duced. It is not advisable to use water from melted ice for 
drinking purposes. 

Manufactured ice is supposed to be free from impurities, 
but this is not necessarily true. If ice is produced artificially 
from distilled or properly filtered water it will naturally be 
pure, provided it does not become polluted in the process of 
manufacture. 

At one time it was believed that river water would become 
pure in a flow of seven miles. This, however, could not be 
true since the distance of the flow is of less importance than 
the time required for the flow. 

The greatest aid in this method of water purification comes 
from the impurities mixing with the volume of water as it 
flows. The impurities become diluted and if sufficient time 
elapses the bacteria and microorganisms will die a natural 
death. 

The principal process involved in self-purification of water 
is the oxidation of nitrogenous organic matter which is a 
chemical process. In the course of time the microorganisms 
die as a result of the biological action. Then there is the 
effect of dilution, sedimentation, especially in lakes and still 
water, and the effect of sunlight. 

Food for the bacteria is lessened as a result of the destruc¬ 
tion of the organic matter through oxidation. The minute 
infusoria, amoebae and water worms feed upon organic matter 
and bacteria and thus aid in the process of purification. The 
plants known as algae play a very important part also in 
water purification. They take up the organic substances and 
perform other functions similar to the vegetation on the land. 
The purifying effects of water vegetation is very important. 

One of the chief sanitary safeguards in Nature is dilution. 
A small amount of pollution may be quickly diluted by a 
volume of water until it is practically harmless. In its con¬ 
centrated state, however, there might be enough poison, the 


128 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


strength of which would be greater than the internal resistance 
of the individual. This would produce toxic conditions, or 
it might even be great enough to produce subluxations. 

Sedimentation is another of Nature’s methods that is of 
great value. This process has been aped by man in the coagu¬ 
lation produced by the use of chemicals. This action is largely 
mechanical. During the process of sedimentation it is only 
the suspended matter that settles; but it is maintained that 
the bacteria and microorganisms become entangled and are 
carried to the bottom and in this way the water is freed from 
more than simply the mechanical impurities. If allowed to re¬ 
main in storage a sufficient time, the harmful bacteria will 
die a natural death. There are processes, however, that take 
place during the time of storage which are objectionable, but 
these relate more to the taste or smell of the water than to the 
production of harmful ingredients. 

During sedimentation there is a natural settling of the 
suspended particles. Not only is the desired result obtained 
in freezing the water of solids, but as the suspended matter 
sinks to the bottom many of the bacteria will also be carried 
down. Sedimentation, however, is not a method that can be 
used promiscuously. It is usually employed in connection 
with some other method; with a slow sand filter, for example, 
or when mechanical filtration is used. 

Sunlight is Nature’s greatest germicide. Direct sunlight 
destroys germ life and renders much aid in maintaining sani¬ 
tary environmental conditions. It has a purifying effect upon 
water in this way. When the water is in motion or during 
times of turbidity great good is accomplished from a sanitary 
standpoint by the direct rays of the sun. 

Artificial Methods of Water Purification 

The only way to obtain chemically pure water is by dis¬ 
tillation. However, since this method is very slow and ex¬ 
pensive, it is not at all practicable for the purification of even 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


129 


a private water supply, and since a chemically pure water is 
not required for drinking or other domestic purposes it would 
be entirely unnecessary to provide it. Again, distilled water 
is not desirable for drinking purposes since its taste is insipid 
until it is aerated. 

When only a small amount of water is required it may be 
freed of organic poisonous substances by boiling. This will 
not, however, render water that contains lead and other stable 
chemical substances injurious to health safe for domestic use. 



Wafer' 


Sand Filter. 


The dissolved gases are given off by boiling and this leaves 
the water with a flat taste which may be improved by aerating; 
this may be done by stirring or by placing the water in a jar 
and shaking it. 

Filtration is by far the most practicable method of water 
purification. There are many different methods used. The 
two most used are known as the natural and mechanical. 

Under what is known as the natural methods, the sand 
filter seems to have precedent. The efficiency of this filter 
depends upon the material used, the velocity of the water 























130 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


through the filter and the care, such as proper cleaning which 
the filter receives. 

As a matter of information the student should become 
somewhat familiar with the general construction of a sand 
filter. The size of the filter, that is, the area it covers, will 
be governed by the amount of water to be filtered per day, 
which in turn will depend upon the demands. The greatest 
objection to a slow sand filter is that a very large tract of 
land is required to provide sufficient surface for the percola¬ 
tion of the water. 

The bottom and sides of the filter-beds are water-tight 
and are constructed of cement with proper drains to carry 
off the filtered water. A layer of very coarse gravel is placed 
on the bottom of the filter, then on top of this is a layer of 
fine gravel. This is then covered with fine sharp sand about 
three feet deep. Ordinarily the entire filter medium is from 
four to six feet deep. 

On top of this layer of fine sand a thin scum is formed 
which increases the efficiency of the filter, its action being 
biological. As this scum accumulates it becomes necessary 
to remove it. This is done by special devices. It is necessary 
to remove only a small portion of the sand, for it will be. clean 
immediately below the surface. This process is continued 
until the layer of sand has decreased in depth to about twelve 
inches when it is replenished with new, or with polluted sand 
which has been removed and thoroughly washed with filtered 
water. 

The filter is first filled by admitting water from beneath 
for the purpose of forcing the air out. The depth of water is 
kept about three feet above the sand. 

The rate of filtration is controlled and kept at a velocity 
of about two inches per hour. At this rate a filter of one 
acre area will provide about 3,000,000 gallons per day. 

A first class slow sand filter should free the water of 99% 
of the bacteria. Hygienists claim that filtered water should 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


131 


not contain more than 100 bacteria to a cubic centimeter. 
Water from a new filter or one that has just been cleaned 
should be tested before it is used. By this method one can 
determine whether the desired results are being obtained. 

It may be necessary to store the water in reservoirs before 
it is passed through the sand filter for the purpose of sedi¬ 
mentation. This will rid the water of the small particles of 
sediment which is contained in the turbid water. If turbid 
water is passed through a sand filter the smallest particles 
will pass on through with it. This causes a tendency to fill 
the filter with clay and other substances. 

Instead of the water passing slowly through the sand, it 
is forced through in mechanical filtration. The sand is con¬ 
tained in cylinders or tanks and the water is forced through 
either as the result of gravity and weight of the water above 
or by mechanical means. Before it is passed through the sand 
in the mechanical filter, it is treated chemically to coagulate 
and precipitate the suspended impurities. This process is not 
only mechanical in the sense that it is accomplished by means 
of certain machinery, but the action on the water is mechani¬ 
cal. There is no bacteriological action which is so essen¬ 
tial as this mechanical action in the process of water purifi¬ 
cation. 

The mechanical method of water filtration has not been 
found to be as satisfactory as the slow sand filter process, 
although very large amounts of water may be filtered in much 
less time. One great disadvantage of this method is that the 
filters require such frequent cleaning and in this respect are 
very expensive to maintain. 

Chemical purification is not considered by some hygienists 
as a satisfactory method for purifying large water supplies. 
There are many objections to this method. Even though the 
water is freed from the impurities it has received in its natural 
course, it is laden with chemicals that may be as injurious 
to health as the impurities themselves. 


9 


132 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


The chemicals used are: Chlorine, bromine, copper sul¬ 
phate, metallic iron, ozone and sodium bisulphate. 

Swimming Pools 

In connection with the subject of water a word relative to 
the sanitation of swimming pools will not be out of place. 
There are many municipal swimming pools in operation and 
while they are intended to improve the sanitary conditions, 
they may at the same time become a great menace to hygiene 
if they are not properly conducted. 

No individual should be allowed to enter a swimming pool 
without first having taken a shower bath with a liberal use 
of soap. No one should be allowed in the pool who is infected 
with skin dis-eases of any kind, ulcers, running sores, con¬ 
junctivitis, or veneral dis-eases. 

The water should be properly filtered when it enters the 
pool and there should be a constant process of disinfection. 
There should be not only right construction, but also fit main¬ 
tenance of the pool. The swimmer should be properly in¬ 
structed relative to swimming pool sanitation. 

SEWAGE AND REFUSE DISPOSAL 

Methods of Sewage Disposal 

One of the greatest problems the hygienists and sanitary 
engineers have to solve is the disposal of sewage and refuse 
without contaminating the water supply and in other ways 
rendering the environment unhealthful. 

The methods used for the immediate removal of sewage 
may be either the dry method or the water method. By far 
the more common one in towns and cities is the water car¬ 
riage system. In small towns, however, the more prevalent 
way is to provide a house some distance from the dwelling 
which contains a privy vault. 

Where sewage is removed by the water method and carried 
through sewers to the waterways, such as rivers and lakes, 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


133 


the great problem which the sanitary engineers have to solve 
is how to dispose of the sewage and not pollute the water 
supply of the city. 

When there is a sufficient amount of water to insure proper 
dilution sewage may be emptied directly into it without treat¬ 
ment. But where there is a limited amount of water, as in 
a small stream, and a very large amount of sewage to be 
disposed of, the water may become overloaded and thus the 
su Pply °f other towns become polluted. When sewage is dis¬ 
posed of in the ocean, oyster beds may become contaminated 
as well as the bathing beaches. 

Sewage Purification 

It is considered cheaper and at the same time satisfactory 
from a hygienic standpoint to depend more upon proper filtra¬ 
tion than upon any other method of purification. 

There are many different methods used for sewage purifica¬ 
tion. Sewage may be screened. This frees it from the larger 
particles. It is then placed in tanks and by a slow process of 
sedimentation relieved of a large amount of the suspended 
matter that passes through the screens. After these processes 
it may then be carried to fields for subsurface irrigation. It is 
carried through porous tile pipes ten to eighteen inches below 
the surface and two feet to three feet apart. In this way the 
sewage seeps through into a sandy soil. An acre will take 
care of the sewage from 150 to 250 people a day. This method 
can not be used at all in clay soil. 

The crude sewage may be applied to the surface of the 
land and carried by means of ditches, but this is not con¬ 
sidered satisfactory. Sand filters are also used, but they 
require frequent cleaning and renewing. 

According to Price the most desirable method of sewage 
disposal is known as the septic method. In this method the 
sewage is sorted and the action that follows is bacteriological. 
The bacteria present act in the absence of air or oxygen. The 


134 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


sewage thus undergoes a process of decomposition, fermenta¬ 
tion and purification. 

The next step is to pass the sewage that has come from 
the septic tank through open sand filters very slowly. These 
sand filters must be properly cleaned and renewed at regular 
intervals and must at no time be overloaded. This makes the 
effluent from the filter beds entirely free from germs and 
harmful matter. It is not necessary for us to consider the 
construction of these septic tanks. There are any number of 
different types, but the results are supposed to be the same. 
The construction of such tanks is in the province of sanitary 
engineering and not in that of practical hygiene. 

Price states that the water which comes from the filter 
beds after the sewage has first been through the septic tank 
is free from injurious substances, is capable of supporting life 
and that even the drinking of it has been known not to be 
followed by injurious results. 

Refuse Disposal 

Another great problem is the disposal of refuse such as 
ashes, garbage, and in the larger cities, street sweepings. It is 
estimated by Whipple that in the larger cities like New York 
the refuse will be in round numbers a ton per capita per year. 
This is an enormous amount of material and the disposal of it 
becomes a great problem. This is not only of hygienic im¬ 
portance, but also one of economical significance. 

The collection of waste material is objectionable from the 
social viewpoint; also an accumulation of ashes and dust will 
irritate the eyes and respiratory tract, while piles of garbage 
and other filth are conducive to the breeding of flies and mos¬ 
quitoes. Such collections result also in the development of 
ill-smelling odors and unsightly streets and alleys. 

There are different methods used to dispose of this waste 
material. It may be collected and burned. This method is 
called incineration. Or the refuse may be collected separately 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


135 


and disposed of. When it is to be disposed of separately there 
are usually city ordinances which require the householder to 
keep the garbage and ashes separate and they are then col¬ 
lected by the city in separate wagons. In most cities tall 
garbage cans are required and the garbage is drained and 
wrapped in paper, the ashes, are placed in cans or containers. 
They are used for filling in low lands while the garbage is 
taken away and buried or burned. 

For the collection of garbage specially constructed wagons 
or carts are used. The garbage must be collected frequently 
and at regular intervals before it becomes decomposed and 
gives off objectionable odors. The wagons must be properly 
cleaned for the same reason. In the removal of ashes and 
other refuse, care should be taken not to create a dust 
and the wagons should not leak so as to litter the streets 
and alleys. 























































CHAPTER VIII 
SCHOOL HYGIENE 



SCHOOL HYGIENE 

SCHOOL BUILDING 

Site 

Stairways 

Corridors 

Basement 

Schoolroom 

size 

light walls 
FLOORS 

Lighting 

AMPLE WINDOW AREA 
SHADES HUNG FROM BOTTOM 

Ventilation 

PURE AIR INDISPENSABLE 
EFFECTS OF VITIATED AIR 
ARTIFICIAL MEANS NECESSARY 

Heating 

LOCAL HEATING INADEQUATE 
HOT WATER OR STEAM HEAT BEST 

School Desks 

ADJUSTABLE 

PROPER PLACING OF CHAIRS 

Blackboards 

SLATE, BEST MATERIAL 
LOCATION OF 
DUSTLESS CHALK 

Charts 

PRINTED MATTER LARGE 
GLASS SURFACES AVOIDED 

Cloakroom 

ONE FOR EACH CLASS 
PROVISION FOR DRYING WRAPS 

Water Supply 

AMPLE WATER 
FOUNTAINS 

138 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


Toilets 

PROPER VENTILATION 
AUTOMATICALLY FLUSHED 
• MATRON IN CHARGE 

PERSONAL FACTORS 

Functions of School Life 

Age of Beginner 

Play Periods Necessary 

Peculiarities of Child Considered 

Posture 

Recess 

RECREATION NECESSARY 
PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT 

School Dis-eases 
Prophylaxis 


CHAPTER VIII 

SCHOOL HYGIENE 

SCHOOL BUILDING 


Site 

In the consideration of school hygiene we will first briefly 
discuss the school building. Its site should be carefully 
chosen. It should be reasonably high; the soil should be 
porous, if possible, and properly drained to insure dryness. 
The building should not be located near a manufacturing 
plant or other places where there is much noise, smoke, gases 
or fumes. The buildings should be plain but artistic, and 
should by all means be modern, fireproof, substantial and 
sanitary. 

The building should be surrounded by sufficient yard room 
to provide ample playground. There should be plenty of 
shade but not so many trees that there will be an interference 
with the sunlight and ventilation of the grounds. Some atten¬ 
tion should be given the beautifying of the yards, for it must 
be remembered that the entire child goes to school—physical, 
mental and spiritual natures must all be developed. 

The number of stories a modern school building should 
have is somewhat of a mooted question; however, it is quite 
obvious that there are many objections to a building of more 
than two stories. A two-story building certainly is an advan¬ 
tage and especially is this true when the pupils have to change 
for their different classrooms. 

Stairways 

Stairways should be of ample width, allowing pupils to 
pass up and down without danger of crowding. The risers 
should be no more than six inches and the treads not more 

140 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


141 


than twelve inches. Where the pupils are compelled to go 
from one floor to another several times a day it is much better 
to have inclines instead of stairs. 

Corridors 

The corridors should be wide enough so that the children 
in passing and repassing will not have to crowd. They should 
be at least ten feet in width and should be supplied with 
plenty of doors for exits, ventilation and light and also win¬ 
dows for ventilation and light. When practicable the corridors 
should be along the north side. This insures sufficient light¬ 
ing and at the same time does not interfere with the lighting 
and ventilating of the schoolroom. It is more important that 
the direct rays of the sun be admitted to the schoolroom than 
to the corridors. 

Basement 

The basement should be well protected from dampness; 
therefore it should be well ventilated and properly heated, as 
well as arranged so that the direct rays of the sun may reach 
at least a part of it. 

The basement should not be used for classrooms unless it 
is for machine shops, or workrooms. It should not be used 
for playgrounds or gymnasium, but may be used for bath¬ 
rooms and toilets. It should occupy the entire space under 
the building. 

The Schoolroom 

In planning the building it must be remembered that the 
schoolroom is the unit of the building and therefore must 
receive primary consideration. The entire building should 
be a collection of schoolrooms properly arranged. 

The schoolroom should be about twenty-five feet by thirty 
feet with not less than a thirteen foot ceiling; this size room 
will be large enough for thirty pupils and no teacher should 


142 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


be required to take care of more than this number in a class. 
There should be plenty of entrance and exit doors for each 
room. 

The interior of the classroom should be attractive but 
plain, the surfaces smooth, the junctions of ceiling and floor 
with walls should be concave. All mouldings, projections, 
ledges where dust and dirt could lodge should be eliminated. 
The walls should be of such a color as to absorb as little light 
as possible and prove least taxing to the eyes. A light green- 
gray is favored. The walls must be so treated with paint or 
some other method employed so as to be readily washed or 
otherwise cleaned. White ceilings which reflect the light are 
best. Floors are made of hard wood in narrow planks with 
matched joints, or they are dovetailed. This may be laid over 
false floors of boards or reinforced concrete. The walls, floors, 
ceilings and partitions must be proof against sound, damp¬ 
ness, fire, vermin, and dust. 

Lighting 

The lighting of the schoolroom, the amount of glass sur¬ 
face or window area, will be governed by the aspect, the loca¬ 
tion of the building, direction from which the light is admitted, 
shape of the room and the proximity of other buildings or 
objects which might obstruct the light. The window area 
must be ample to insure sufficient light in every part of the 
room even on dark, overcast and cloudy days. The rule is that 
the window area should be at least one-fourth of the floor 
space and it is practically impossible to have an excessive 
window area for the light may be toned down and softened 
by shades and awnings. Prism glass is more practicable be¬ 
cause it refracts the light and gives a more even distribution 
over the entire room. 

Most of the light should be admitted over the left shoulder 
of the pupil so as to eliminate annoying shadows, but it is not 
necessary that all the light come from the left. The windows 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


143 


should reach to the ceiling and the height of the sill from the 
floor should be about four feet. Light should never enter 
from the front and strike the eyes of the pupil. The upper 
fourth of the window furnishes one-third of the light, also 
the best light; therefore it can readily be seen that window 
shades should not be hung from the top but from the bottom, 
and should be rolled upward. In nature the light comes 
from above, hence this being natural it is consequently 
best. 

Ventilation 

Pure air is absolutely indispensable for mental work. Much 
time and energy is wasted by teacher and pupil in trying to 
work in vitiated atmosphere. The educational results obtained 
in the school will be influenced more than has been conceded 
by the character of the air the pupil and teacher are forced 
to breathe. Vitiated air will produce sluggishness, headache, 
listlessness, inattention, lack of energy and a depression of 
mental vigor which will prevent the child from doing his best 
work. The same influence will be felt by the teacher and the 
result will be inefficiency in instruction. 

Natural means of ventilation should not be relied upon 
since it is difficult to get a sufficient amount of fresh air into 
the rooms in winter time without creating objectionable drafts 
which interfere with heating. Regardless of the method em¬ 
ployed in ventilating it is a good plan to open all of the 
doors and windows occasionally during the day and flush 
the rooms with fresh air. At such time the children should 
exercise or employ some means to prevent them from taking 
cold. 

Schoolhouses should be provided with the combined plenum 
and vacuum system and operated in conjunction with the heat¬ 
ing plant in cold weather. In this way the air that is admitted 
can be regulated not only as to quantity, but also the velocity 
can be controlled and likewise the humidity and temperature. 


144 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


Heating 

The relation between ventilating and heating must be kept 
in mind. It is not only a question of providing a proper 
amount of pure air, but also a question of the proper tem¬ 
perature of the air. A poorly ventilated room is always more 
difficult to heat and an improperly heated room is very diffi¬ 
cult to ventilate. Local heating should never be used in a 
schoolroom except when impossible to provide better means. 

The best arrangement for heating school buildings is hot 
water or steam in connection with the ventilating system in 
which the air is passed over hot radiators before being forced 
into the classrooms and corridors. This is supplemented by 
heat from the radiators placed in proper locations throughout 
the building. In this way the temperature of the room may 
be kept at the proper degree and at the same time the air 
circulation and the humidity properly regulated. Best work 
is accomplished by the children when the temperature is kept 
at about 68° F. 

School Desks 

The furniture most important to the health of the child 
is the desk and the desk chair. These should be very care¬ 
fully adjusted to the child; if this is not properly done the 
child will have a tendency to assume a faulty posture which 
will favor the development of curvatures of the spine and 
other physical defects. 

The height of the desk should be such that the pupil will 
not find it necessary to raise the shoulder in placing the arm 
on the desk to write, or so low that he will have to bend for¬ 
ward. The top should slope at an angle of about fifteen 
degrees. The best distance from the eyes is from twelve to 
fourteen inches. 

The height of the chair from the floor should be very care¬ 
fully adjusted to the student and it should allow the feet to 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


145 


rest comfortably on the floor; that is, \yhen the student is 
seated the thighs should be level and the leg at right angles 
to the thigh, thus allowing the feet to rest on the floor. If 
the chair is too low there will be too much weight thrown on 
the back of the thighs while a chair that is too high produces 
too much flexion of the lumbar region of the spine. The slope 
of the seat should be slightly backward and downward and 
the depth about two-thirds the length of the thighs. The back 
of the chair should slope slightly backward and should be 
made to fit the curve of the back. 

The chair should be placed far enough from the desk so 
that the abdomen will not touch its edge. When properly 
adjusted in most cases the edge of the chair will project under 
the edge of the desk about one inch. In the lower grades 
it is best to adjust the seats and desks to the child twice a 
year. 

Blackboards 

The best material for blackboards is slate, which furnishes 
a surface that is not shiny and will not reflect the light. They 
can be washed and easily kept clean and thus lessen the 
nuisance of dust. Blackboards should never be placed between 
windows. When possible there should be no windows on the 
same wall because when pupils are looking at the board 
there should be no light shining in their eyes. The black¬ 
boards are best placed opposite the principal light. 

Dustless chalk is best and the use of colored crayons made 
of arsenic or sulphide of mercury should be prohibited, since 
the dust from these crayons is poisonous. 

The blackboards should be plainly visible to all the pupils 
and care should be taken that all writing or other work on 
the board is large enough for the pupils to see without eye 
strain. The distance of each pupil from the board should be 
governed by the strength of vision. 


146 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


Charts 

If charts are used the printed matter should be large 
enough for the pupils to read without undue strain on the eyes. 
Glass surfaces should be avoided to prevent objectionable 
reflections and all figures and illustrations should be plainly 
visible, but objectionable bright colors and clashy combina¬ 
tions should be avoided. 

Cloakrooms 

In school buildings having no lockers the pupils must place 
their wraps in a cloakroom. There should be such a room for 
each classroom. The cloakroom should be well ventilated, 
lighted and heated and should be connected with both the 
hallway and the classroom. 

Special attention should be given the wet clothing and 
provision made for drying the same. This can be nicely 
taken care of during school hours by the janitor. Children 
should never be allowed to sit in damp clothing during 
the school hours. All dressing-rooms, cloakrooms and lockers 
should be kept clean. 

Water Supply 

It is very essential that an ample supply of fresh, pure 
water be provided. The old drinking cup is a thing of the 
past, except possibly in some of the smaller country schools, 
and it is fortunate that a more modern method has taken its 
place. The supply fixtures, such as the drinking fountains, 
should be conveniently located and in a part of the building 
easily accessible to the pupils. A sufficient number of foun¬ 
tains should be provided so there will be no necessity for 
crowding. They should be placed in a well lighted and 
properly heated portion of the building and special care taken 
that the floor does not become damp and unsanitary. The 
fixture which allows a constant bubbling of the water is most 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


147 


satisfactory, since it eliminates the necessity for the child to 
operate and hence lessens the temptation for the child to play 
in the water. 

Toilets 

Ample toilet facilities should be provided and separate 
toilets arranged for the girls and boys. The toilets may be 
placed in the basement of the school building, but special 
attention must be given to their proper ventilation. They 
should be kept so clean that it will not be necessary to use 
deodorizers; they should be constantly and automatically 
flushed. The floors should be of cement to allow thorough 
washing every day and the urinals of slate or some other 
hard, non-absorbent material. In the girl’s toilet the seats 
of the water closets should not be too high. Where practicable 
there should be a separate toilet for the little girls and stools 
provided with U-shaped seats. This will assist very materially 
in maintaining cleanliness. The toilets should be well ven¬ 
tilated and lighted. This is of special importance and should 
receive the most careful attention. A matron should be in 
attendance to help care for the kindergarten children and also 
those of the lower grades. The toilets at all time should be 
under supervision of a competent, dependable person. 

PERSONAL FACTORS 

Function of School Life 

A large part of the child’s life is spent in the schoolroom 
and it must be remembered that it is that part of the child’s 
life when he is most susceptible to environment and is there¬ 
fore most easily influenced mentally, morally and physically. 
The entire child goes to school, therefore the function of the 
school is to develop the physical and moral as well as the 
mental. 

Youth is the time of unrest and intense activity and the 
schoolwork should be so arranged that the energies of child- 


10 


148 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


hood and youth may be directed so as to develop the pupil 
into a symmetrical adult. With such intense activity a great 
amount of energy is used up; thus it is clear that the child 
needs plenty of sleep and the proper amount of good, nourish¬ 
ing food and if he is deprived of these he can not do his best 
work mentally. 

Age of Beginner 

We have not yet fully realized that our present school sys¬ 
tem, well organized as it is, has certain ill effects on the 
health of the children. Many of the reasons are peculiar to 
the circumstance under which the child must attend school 
and can not be relieved, but there are many that can be cor¬ 
rected and in time will be. Children are often sent to school 
at too early an age and as a result the growth is retarded and 
in some cases results in an actual defective physical develop¬ 
ment. The physical development is often retarded by pro¬ 
longed fatigue. This fatigue may be the result of improper 
ventilation, forced attention to subjects that are too difficult, 
strict discipline, lack of sufficient relaxation and many other 
factors connected with the ordinary school. 

One of the greatest mistakes in our modern system of 
education is sending the child to school too young. Six years 
of age is plenty young; seven years old is better. Even at 
this age some are not sufficiently sturdy to endure the mental 
and physical strain of the schoolroom and the application to 
the studies that is usually exacted of them. 

Play Periods Necessary 

The school affords an environment that is entirely different 
from that which the child has been accustomed to; therefore 
the beginner should be allowed much liberty and should not 
be compelled to remain in his seat more than one-third of 
the time. This should be divided into short intervals, alter¬ 
nating work and play. It must be remembered that the small 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


149 


child is active; therefore it is imperative that he be given 
various exercises that will call into play the different muscles 
of his body. This will have a tendency to relieve the fatigue 
from sitting at the desk. When children first start to school 
they usually lose weight and become more or less nervous 
during the first few days or weeks. 

The child should be allowed sufficient free time during each 
day for play and for the development of initiative. The amount 
of home work required should be very carefully considered 
and regulated according to the capacity and ability of the 
child; yet care must be taken or the especially bright child 
will be overworked and will not be given enough time for 
play and the development of a real childhood. 

Peculiarities of Child Considered 

The peculiarities of the child should be considered and the 
curriculum arranged accordingly. The methods of study 
should receive proper consideration as well as the methods 
of teaching. Special classes should be arranged for the back¬ 
ward students. Many cases of backwardness or mental de¬ 
ficiency are due to the child’s inability to see clearly or hear 
distinctly, and when these conditions are corrected the child 
will be normally bright. Many times a child is unjustly dis¬ 
ciplined because of some physical defect or handicap which 
shoqld be corrected. 

Statistics show that tests and examinations have a detri¬ 
mental effect upon the health of the pupils. Experiments have 
shown that children lose weight during such tests and exami¬ 
nations; that they are restless at night and suffer loss of 
appetite. All these have a bearing upon the health of the 
child. 

Posture 

Attention should be given the habits of the children and 
especially the posture of the child as he sits in the seat at his 
desk. A faulty posture may result in an adaptative curvature 


150 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


of the spine which in later years will do much harm. The 
sitting posture is of more importance than the standing pos¬ 
ture since the child sits so much more than he stands. 

The pupil should not be allowed to sit in a stooped position 
over his desk as this cramps the chest and interferes with 
respiration, makes the heart action labored and produces round 
shoulders; it also tends to produce a kyphosis in the dorsal 
region of the spine. If a child persists in sitting in this stooped 
position and finds it difficult to sit in the proper position, atten¬ 
tion should be given the spine, for subluxations will be found 
which are interfering with the transmission of mental im¬ 
pulses to the muscles of the back, thus making it difficult for 
the child to sit in the normal posture. Or it may be defective 
eyes which make it difficult for the child to see his work and 
he therefore stoops that the work may be brought nearer the 
eyes. In this case a cervical subluxation will be found and 
when properly adjusted no more trouble will be experienced. 
It may be this tendency to stoop is the result of fatigue; to 
overcome this he should be given periods of rest and relaxa¬ 
tion from time to time during school hours; or this fatigue 
may be due to poor elimination from the kidney place subluxa¬ 
tions. 

Recess 

During the morning and afternoon sessions the pupils 
should be given a recess for fifteen or twenty minutes, and 
when the weather will permit all the children should be re¬ 
quired to go outdoors and engage in some form of play or 
exercise, properly supervised by a thoroughly competent in¬ 
dividual. This will not only benefit the pupils physically, 
but will also make the mind more active and aid very mate¬ 
rially in their mental development. In addition to this exer¬ 
cise, some time during the day the windows should be opened, 
except possibly in extremely cold weather, and the teacher 
and pupils should engage in some form of calisthenics. This 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


151 


will tend to keep the pupils in a fit physical condition and 
mentally alert for the balance of the day. 

The school grounds should be provided with modern equip¬ 
ment for the proper development of the children physically 
and should be supervised by kind and well trained attendants. 
Every school should have a well equipped and properly super¬ 
vised gymnasium. 

School Dis-eases 

At one time the school was thought to be largely respon¬ 
sible for the spread of dis-eases among children, but this idea 
is changing in later years. In reality there are no specific 
school dis-eases. The dis-eases that have been so referred to 
are merely those abnormal conditions incident to childhood 
and youth. Rosenau gives a very interesting article on this 
subject. He says: “Parents naturally come to regard the 
school as a veritable pesthouse for the spread of communicable 
diseases of childhood—especially measles, whooping cough, 
mumps, diphtheria, scarlet fever, common colds, etc. Many 
of these dis-eases prevail in epidemic form during the summer 
time, when school is closed, and under other circumstances 
which show the epidemics may be independent of school 
attendance. It is difficult to determine just what part is played 
by the commingling of the pupils in school in the spread of 
such dis-eases and what part is due to other factors. Some dis¬ 
eases take a sudden jump in the autumn with the opening of 
school. Further, these dis-eases are not contracted by the 
school children alone, but are carried home to the other mem¬ 
bers of the household, and thereby create secondary foci. 
This problem of the communicable dis-eases and the school 
is far from solution; the spread of these dis-eases has not been 
conquered by medical inspection, and their relation to school 
attendance is one that needs careful observation and study/’ 

Thus we see that the cause of school dis-eases has not been 
answered, and we find in this article that which strengthens 


152 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


the contention of Chiropractic—that the cause of the dis-ease 
is in the child and not something introduced from the outside. 

The environment of the school creates a necessity for cer¬ 
tain internal adaptative actions, and if this adaptative action 
can not take place the result will be an abnormal condition 
peculiar to the necessity for adaptation. The lack of adapta¬ 
tion may result in incoordinations of the respiratory tract; 
incoordinations of the eyes, involving not only the sight but 
the different tissues and secretions of the eyes; incoordina¬ 
tions involving the heart, throat and mouth and many condi¬ 
tions of eruptions of the skin. Especially do we find deformi¬ 
ties and incoordinations of the spine and spinal column. 

In diagnostic terminology these conditions would be called 
bronchitis, bronchopneumonia, pleurisy, myopia, catarrhal con¬ 
junctivitis, trachoma, cardiac dis-eases, such as endocarditis, 
etc. The mouth, nose and throat dis-eases would be coryza, 
adenoid growths, enlarged tonsils, tonsilitis, nose bleed, etc. 
These conditions could all be prevented or corrected by adjust¬ 
ing the causative subluxations. 

Prophylaxis 

It is not necessary for us to go into an explanation of the 
spinal column and how subluxations are produced. It is suffi¬ 
cient at this time to call the student's attention to the fact 
that subluxations are often produced, and especially is this true 
during childhood. The children are subject to falls during 
their play at school and they are most likely to produce 
subluxations. This being true, the children should be analyzed 
periodically to determine the subluxations and then they should 
be adjusted. When parents realize the good that is to come 
from such procedure they will take their children to the 
chiropractor and have their spine palpated and the subluxa¬ 
tions adjusted. When this becomes a universal practice there 
will be a marked decrease in the so-called school dis-eases or 
children’s dis-eases. 


CHAPTER IX 

INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE 


INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE 

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 

Definitions 

NECESSITY FOR INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE 
PROPER ENVIRONMENT 

Effect of Occupation upon Health 
Personal Factors 

Choice of Occupation 
idiosyncrasies considered 

SEX REGARDED 

Effect of Labor upon Children 

MAY CAUSE CURVATURES 
CHILD LABOR PROHIBITED 

Place of Work 
Effect of Posture 

SEDENTARY OCCUPATIONS 
ACTIVE OCCUPATIONS 

Fatigue 

HOW PRODUCED 
RESULT 

HYGIENE AND SANITATION OF INDUSTRIAL 
ESTABLISHMENTS 

Space Per Individual 
Character of Building 

Lighting, Heating and Ventilating Work Places 
lighting 

TEMPERATURE 
HUMIDITY 
AIR PRESSURE 
LOCATION OF WORK 

Industrial Dusts 

MECHANICAL VENTILATION 
CLASSIFICATION OF DUSTY TRADES 

154 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


155 


INDUSTRIAL POISONS 

Lead Poisoning 

SYMPTOMS 

PREVENTIVE METHODS 

Arsenic Poisoning 

SYMPTOMS 
WHERE USED 

Mercurial Poisoning 

SYMPTOMS 

HOW CONTRACTED 

PREVENTIVE METHODS 

Phosphorus Poisoning 
two varieties 
SYMPTOMS 
WORKERS AFFECTED 

Chromium Poisoning 

how contracted 

PARTS AFFECTED 


CHAPTER IX 


INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE 

GENERAL CONSIDERATION 


Definition 

That branch of hygiene dealing with industries is of very 
great importance. This will be readily recognized when we 
consider that practically the entire population is involved in 
some sort of gainful occupation. 

Industrial hygiene is concerned in creating conditions in 
industry which will prevent accidents, promote public and 
personal health by eliminating adverse influences, and in creat¬ 
ing environmental conditions which will prolong the worker’s 
life by improving the conditions under which he labors. Public 
health, mortality and morbidity are influenced more by the 
environmental conditions in the occupations than by any other 
factor in human life. At least two-thirds of the entire human 
life is spent in some occupation and the danger of life, limb 
and health is well known to all. 

The various industries differ largely in their effects upon 
the workers, the mortality in some being greater than in 
others; accidents are more numerous in some than others, 
some occupations being more hazardous. Some dis-eases 
occur more frequently in certain occupations. The environ¬ 
ment may necessitate a greater adaptation in one part of the 
body than in another; a very dusty work, for example, will 
affect the respiratory tract while another occupation will affect 
a different part of the body. 

Effect of Occupation upon Health 

It is obvious that occupations have a certain effect upon 
the adaptative processes of the body as well as producing 

156 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


157 


traumatic conditions from accidents, which result in total or 
partial disability, sudden death, or acute or chronic conditions 
from poisoning for example. In the industries there may be 
such adverse environments as to draw so heavily upon the 
adaptative forces that the body will be reduced to a greatly 
weakened state. The personal health of the individual enters 
as a conditioning factor, as well as do his peculiarities and 
personal weaknesses. 

Personal Factors 

The individual with low vitality, poor nutrition and poor 
elimination will be affected to a greater extent in some occupa¬ 
tions than in others. The person with a subluxation at lung 
place, lessening the resistance of the tissues in this zone, will 
find that an occupation which necessitates breathing air laden 
with dust will affect the lungs because of their already 
weakened condition. Many accidents which jeopardize the 
health and life of workers result from carelessness or from a 
lack of knowledge about the devices employed. 

Choice of Occupation 

Great care should be exercised in the choice of an occupa¬ 
tion. This should not be left to chance nor to the ignorant 
fancy of the youth. The occupations which will best suit the 
idiosyncrasies of the individual both mentally and physically 
should be selected. Many lives are shortened because of the 
unwise choice of occupation. The individual with defective 
lungs should not select a dusty trade, nor the physically weak 
person a trade which requires an enormous amount of mus¬ 
cular strength. In other words, a trade should be carefully 
selected with a view to the weak and strong points of the 
individual. 

In this question of a choice in employment the sex should 
be taken into consideration. While there are many occupa¬ 
tions in which women are as competent or more competent 


158 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


than men, yet there are several factors to be weighed. Taken 
as a general rule, women are not as strong physically as men. 
There are some occupations which have a very detrimental 
effect upon the reproductive organs. Statistics show that 
women are more easily affected by industrial poisons than 
men. Congestion of the reproductive organs during men¬ 
struation is increased and if women are compelled to work 
at certain occupations during this menstrual period, they will 
certainly find it detrimental to their health. 

It is a recognized fact, according to many authorities on 
the subject, that there is a larger percentage of abortions and 
miscarriages among women in industries than among women 
in domestic life. The infant mortality is also very much 
higher. Many abortions and miscarriages result from the 
effects of industrial poisoning, as well as from heavy and 
continuous work. 

Effect of Labor upon Children 

The most injurious effects from occupation are those upon 
children since they are more susceptible to the ill effects than 
adults. The child should have every advantage for the 
development of all parts of his body that there may be no 
interference with its proper growth. Attention should be 
given to his mental and moral development. These things 
can not receive proper attention if the child is forced to labor 
under adverse conditions just at the time when the body is 
developing. 

Many occupations are such that curvatures of the spine 
are produced and different parts of the body overtaxed. Child 
labor should be prohibited. There is no labor so expensive 
to our country as child labor. If our children are not given 
an opportunity to develop physically, mentally and morally, 
we will suffer in citizenship in the next generation. There is 
bound to be a deterioration from such procedure. 

The organs of the child are peculiarly susceptible to the 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


159 


effects of overwork and fatigue; the entire body is in the 
process of development and its development may be retarded 
and its growth seriously hindered. It is a most excellent 
thing to keep the child employed and active, but there cer¬ 
tainly should be a means of protecting him from the avarice 
and greed of heartless employers. The best way to do this 
is to keep him out of gainful employment until there has been 
sufficient physical development to insure against overtaxing 
the young body. 

Place of Work 

The influence of the occupation upon health will be gov¬ 
erned not only by the character of the work, but also by the 
environment in which the work is performed. Whether it is 
indoor or outdoor work, whether it is an active or sedentary 
occupation, and whether there are extremes in the tempera¬ 
ture, humidity, air pressure or light, or whether the work is 
on the surface or below it as in mines, are all factors. The 
position of the worker, the length of the working hours, the 
physical, mental and nervous strain all have a bearing on 
health. Outdoor work is preferred, especially for those who 
are inclined to pulmonary or respiratory disorders, because of 
the difference in the purity of the air. Outdoor workers suffer 
less from fatigue and their mortality rate is lower. 

Effect of Posture 

Posture of the workman is not without its effect upon 
the health and its bearing upon industrial hygiene is very 
important. There are many conditions that have their begin¬ 
ning in the occupation, such as faulty development of different 
parts of the body, curvatures of the spine, and especially those 
which are adaptative. Many subluxations are produced by 
posture assumed during long hours of work. In analyzing 
such cases chiropractically, the history of the occupation and 
the posture assumed should be carefully considered so that in 


160 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


adjusting the subluxated vertebrae there may be no opposition 
to the adaptative processes of Innate Intelligence in her en¬ 
deavor to compensate for the faulty posture. 

Sedentary occupations such as typing, bookkeeping, shoe¬ 
making, engraving and tailoring result in lack of muscular 
activity and produce characteristic occupational disorders and 
deformities. It is not natural for an individual to remain in 
any one posture for the greater part of the day. Innate needs 
to have the body more or less active so that the proper adapta¬ 
tive processes can be carried on within the body. 

Sitting constantly at a desk will create a tendency to 
stooped shoulders and thus cramp the respiratory organs. 
The result will be a lack of proper oxygenation of the blood 
which will have its effect upon the metabolic processes of 
the body. There will be a sluggishness of the liver and other 
vital organs, and a tendency to anemia, constipation, general 
lack of muscular tone and low vitality. 

Active occupations exercise the natural processes of the 
body and create a necessity for the action of Innate in all 
parts of the body. Activity keeps the muscles in tone and 
makes the processes of elimination more active. Activity is 
one of Nature’s laws and is essential in the vital expressions 
of life in the body. This is shown by the provisions Nature 
has made for such activity. Especially are the active occupa¬ 
tions to be preferred over the sedentary for young people and 
for those up to the age of forty-five or fifty. After this age 
the sedentary occupations are not so detrimental. 

Fatigue 

Fatigue comes as a result of overwork and is a purely per¬ 
sonal factor since the amount of work that may be performed 
before producing fatigue will vary in different individuals. 
Fatigue is produced by an accumulation of toxines and waste 
material in the body when katabolism is greater than anabo¬ 
lism. This may be brought on by overtaxing the body to the 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


161 


point where it is impossible for Innate Intelligence to rebuild 
the tissues as rapidly as they are being torn down. It can 
readily be seen that if there should be an accumulation of 
waste material from faulty metabolism due to interference 
with transmission, fatigue would be produced sooner and 
with less work than in the individual normally excreting the 
poisons. 

If one part of the body or one set of muscles is overworked 
fatigue neurosis will be produced. There may be loss of motor 
function due, not to interference with transmission of motor 
mental impulses, but to the fact that the organ, usually a 
muscle, becomes an unfit medium for the expression of the 
mental impulses. A good illustration of this is writer's cramp, 
and cramps among typesetters and telegraphers. In these 
cases, however, there are usually local subluxations that 
should be adjusted. 

HYGIENE AND SANITATION OF INDUSTRIAL 
ESTABLISHMENTS 

Space Per Individual 

In some states the legislatures have established a minimum 
of 400 cubic feet of space for each individual, but this is not 
sufficient in some occupations and under some conditions. 
The amount of space per workman must of necessity be gov¬ 
erned by several factors: namely, character of the work per¬ 
formed, character of the building, the hygienic conditions of 
same, the type of ventilation used, whether natural or mechan¬ 
ical, and the methods of heating and lighting. In some trades 
and under certain conditions 1000 cubic feet space per work¬ 
man would not be excessive. 

Character of Buildings 

When practicable the building should be constructed espe¬ 
cially for the kind of work to be carried on within. It should 


162 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


be fireproof and of a material that will lend to the hygienic 
demands in industry. 

We do not want to pass over this subject without calling 
the student’s attention to the effect which may be produced 
by the physical, mental and nervous strain under which the 
work is performed. If the worker is under great tension a 
great amount of energy will be used up and fatigue will appear 
early. This will have a marked effect upon the individual and 
tend to lessen his efficiency. If work is performed under great 
physical strain, the muscular activity is greater than the 
muscles are able to express. Then there will be not only 
fatigue but actual injury done the muscles and other struc¬ 
tures. Under such conditions the vital organs'will also be 
overtaxed. This may result in dilatation of the heart, hernia, 
aneurysms, or in a general weakened condition of the body. 
The results of mental strain, responsibility and worry are not 
without their adverse effects. 

Lighting, Heating and Ventilating Work Places 

Industrial hygiene should be concerned about the tempera¬ 
ture, humidity, air pressure, light, ventilation, and heating of 
the work place. The building should be well lighted. If pos¬ 
sible natural light should be provided even though the first 
cost is considerably greater than that of artificial lighting. 
There will not only be a better grade of work done in natural 
light and with less eye strain, but the general health of the 
workmen will be better. If artificial lighting is used it should 
be electric light, since it produces less impurities and provides 
a more even light. The light should be evenly distributed 
and of a proper distance from workmen so that it will not be 
reflected directly into their eyes. If the occupation takes the 
worker out of doors then these features can not be controlled, 
but in this event attention must be given to the clothing of 
the workman. Sudden changes in the temperature should 
be avoided as much as possible. Innate is capable of adapting 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


163 


the body to extremes in temperature, but must be given a 
sufficient amount of time in which to bring about these 
changes. Men may work in the frigid temperature or in the 
torrid temperature and if properly clothed and acclimated will 
suffer no ill effects. 

In many industries the laborers are forced to work in 
artificially high temperatures. Blast-furnace workers, glass 
blowers, miners, bakers, and stokers must remain in extremely 
high temperatures. The body may be adapted to such tem¬ 
perature, but the effect of the continued expenditure of 
energy necessary to bring about this adaptation will show 
adverse effects upon the body. There is a tendency to 
respiratory disorders and a thickening of the blood plasma 
which disrupts the circulatory system. Heat also has a 
detrimental effect upon the eyes and there is a tendency to 
rheumatism. 

Air of a high relative humidity is objectionable from a 
hygienic standpoint because it interferes with perspiration 
and evaporation. Workers constantly exposed to atmosphere 
that is too damp will have a tendency to incoordinations in¬ 
volving the bodily secretions and respiratory disorders. The 
ill effects of such an environment are rather marked and if 
it is necessary to maintain a high relative humidity because 
of the processes carried on there must be special provision 
to guard the health of the workers. This may be accomplished 
by short hours and frequent periods of rest and relief from 
the high humidity. 

Normal air pressure is fifteen pounds to the square inch, 
but there are many industries in which the work must be done 
under a greater or a less pressure. Mountain climbers are sub¬ 
jected to decreased air pressure while caisson workers and 
divers must work under greatly increased air pressure. De¬ 
creased air pressure is especially detrimental to those suffering 
from cardiac disorders, and may in some cases result in death. 
The effects of increased air pressure have been elaborated 


11 


164 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


upon in another chapter and the student is referred to that 
section. 

The location of the work is important. Subsurface work 
is more detrimental to health than surface work unless special 
precautions have been taken to make the place of work con¬ 
ducive to the expression of life. Subsurface workers such as 
miners are subjected to great heat, lack of proper light and 
ventilation, accumulated gases, dampness and poisons. There 
is also greater danger from accidents and explosions. 

Industrial Dusts 

In a trade in which much dust is produced there should 
be proper mechanical ventilation. The vacuum and plenum 
system should be employed. There is no factor in the in¬ 
dustrial life more detrimental to the workman than that forc¬ 
ing him to breathe vitiated air laden with dust and other 
impurities produced by the processes employed in the trades. 

The extremely dusty trades should be separated from the 
less dusty ones and special provision made to carry away the 
dust. It is often possible to substitute machinery for hand¬ 
work in these trades. When the laborers are forced to work 
in very thick dust they may be protected in a measure by 
the use of respirators worn over the mouth and nose. These 
will catch some of the dust and act as filters. 

It is often possible to place hoods directly above the ma¬ 
chines in these trades and by means of a vacuum fan the dust 
is carried out through tubes. 

The effects of dust upon the worker depend upon many 
factors. These might, however, be classified as conditioning 
factors in the individual and the character of the dust inhaled. 

Dust from metals and minerals may produce mechanical 
injury to fhe membrane of the respiratory tract because of 
the sharp edges. Inhalation of dust might also bring about 
catarrhal conditions and coughs. There may be deposits of 
dust in the bronchi and even in the parenchyma of the lungs 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


165 


from long exposure to and inhalation of dust. This may result 
in consolidation and other conditions which may be purely 
adaptative on the part of Innate Intelligence to compensate 
for the presence of the foreign substances. 

In F. Hoffman’s Bulletin of the Bureau of Labor, Vol. 
LXXIX, he gives the following classification of dusty trades 
according to the character of the dust produced: 

“Group I —Exposure to Metallic Dust: Grinders, polish¬ 
ers, tool and instrument makers, jewelers, gold leaf and brass 
workers, printers, engravers and pressmen. 

“Group II —Exposure to Mineral Dust: Stone, marble 
and cement workers, glass blowers, glass cutters, diamond 
cutters, potters, plasterers, paperhangers, moulders, core 
makers and lithographers. 

“Group III —Exposure to Vegetable-fiber Dust: Cotton 
ginning, textile, linen, hemp, cordage and paper manufacturers, 
weavers, spinners, hosiery knitters, lace makers, jute and 
wood workers. 

“Group IV —Exposure to Animal and Mixed Dust: Fur¬ 
riers, taxidermists, hatters, silk, wool, and worsted workers, 
carpet, rug, rag, and shoddy workers, hair mattress workers 
and upholsterers.” 

The mortality rate from pulmonary tuberculosis and other 
respiratory incoordinations is very high in the dusty trades. 

INDUSTRIAL POISONS 

In the case of poisonous gases and fumes the necessity 
becomes even greater for proper prophylactic measures. The 
methods used in dusty trades may be here employed, but with 
greater care. All poisonous materials should be eliminated 
as far as possible and less objectionable material substituted. 
This may be done in a great many instances without decreas- 


166 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


ing the value of the article manufactured. An illustration of 
this is in the substitution of red phosphorus for the use of the 
more poisonous yellow phosphorus in the manufacture of 
matches. This eliminates danger from phosphorus poisoning. 

Price states : “The chief industrial poisons are lead, arsenic 
and mercury, although phosphorus, copper, zinc, brass, and 
chromium poisoning are frequently met with in various in¬ 
dustries.” 

Lead Poisoning 

The symptoms produced by lead poisoning are: lead colic 
in acute cases, loss of appetite, cramps, pain in the joints. 
There will be bluish lines found along the edge of the gums; 
wrist drop and loss of motor function in the hands and feet; 
arteriosclerosis, indigestion, restlessness during sleep, anemia, 
lead palsy, loss of strength and weight and constipation. The 
patient experiences a disagreeable sweetish taste, and there 
will be a grayish pallor and pinched expression of the face. 
In severe cases there may be blindness, great fatigue, apoplexy, 
insanity and death. 

The greatest danger from lead comes in the form of dust 
or fumes and therefore the poison enters the body principally 
through the respiratory tract, but it may enter through the 
digestive tract and through the skin. 

Prophylactic measures include devices to protect the work¬ 
men by means of respirators, but special effort should be made 
to keep the air in the breathing zone free from the dust and 
fumes. Since the poison may be taken in through the skin, 
special provision should be made to protect the hands and 
arms in fingering the materials. The workmen should exer¬ 
cise the greatest cleanliness and precaution to prevent inges¬ 
tion of the lead into the digestive tract. Care should be taken 
that it is not brought into the mouth by the fingers or by 
pipe, for example. There is a high mortality from pulmonary 
tuberculosis among lead workers. 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


167 


Arsenic Poisoning 

The mouth, lungs and skin are the portals of entry for 
arsenic into the body. Arsenic poisoning is characterized by 
catarrhal inflammation of the eyes and respiratory tract, 
anemia, neuritis, gastritis, and degenerative changes in the 
liver and kidneys. Many of the symptoms of arsenic poisoning 
resemble those of lead poisoning such as gastric disturbances, 
anorexia, anemia and loss of strength. There may be progres¬ 
sive muscular atrophy, eczematous eruptions and ulcers of the 
lips, nostrils and in the folds of the skin. 

Arsenic is used in the manufacture of wall paper, artificial 
flowers, textile fabrics; by taxidermists and as a preservative 
for hides; it is also used in different preparations to kill insects 
and parasites. 

Mercurial Poisoning 

Mercury enters the body through the digestive and respira¬ 
tory tracts and through the skin. The symptoms usually mani¬ 
fest in this kind of industrial poisoning are headache, gastric 
disturbances, stomatitis, metallic taste in the mouth and fetid 
breath; there is swelling and ulceration of the gums that cause 
the teeth to become loose, and there may be an excessive flow 
of saliva with a swelling of the submaxillary glands. In severe 
cases there may be tremors, paralysis, melancholy and loss of 
memory. 

Mercury is used in the manufacture of incandescent lamps 
where they employ mercury pumps, in the manufacture of 
barometers and thermometers, in the felt and fur industries, 
in the manufacture of pharmaceutical preparations and chem¬ 
ical works, and in photography. 

Methods used to prevent mercurial poisoning are almost 
identical with those used in lead poisoning. Special devices 
should be provided to keep the air in the breathing zone free 
from the fumes. This can best be accomplished by providing 


168 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


a proper system of mechanical ventilation. The workmen 
should wear rubber gloves to lessen the possibilities of the 
absorption through the skin. The workmen should also prac¬ 
tice cleanliness and exercise care that mercury is not carried 
into the mouth by the hands which should be thoroughly 
washed before eating. 

Phosphorus Poisoning 

The industrial poison of next importance is phosphorus. 
This poisoning is confined almost entirely to the match in¬ 
dustry. There are two kinds of phosphorus, the yellow or 
white, and the amorphous or red. The yellow is poisonous 
and is used in making the “strike anywhere” matches. This, 
however, is being replaced by the non-poisonous, or more 
harmless red phosphorus. The safety matches contain no 
phosphorus and are harmless. 

Phosphorus poisoning produces gastric disturbances, 
bronchial catarrh and caries of the teeth with necrosis of the 
lower maxillary. Other bones of the body may also be affected 
by necrosis. 

Brass, copper, zinc, and bronze workers are also affected 
by the dust and fumes from these poisons. Brass workers 
suffer with brass founders’ ague in which there are chills, 
vomiting, headache and general depression. 

Chromium Poisoning 

Chromium is also responsible for industrial poisoning. It 
is used in the manufacture of dyes and in the coloring of wall 
paper and fabrics. It affects the mucous membrane lining the 
nose and throat and produces an inflammation of the eyes 
and ulceration of the skin. 


CHAPTER X 

DEFINITIONS 


DEFINITIONS 


Dis-ease 

Classification 

Acute and Chronic 

Stage of Exposure 

Period of Infection 

Stage of Incubation 

Period of Invasion 

Degree of Infection 

Contagious 

Infectious 

Morbific Agents 

Pathogenic Germs 

Non-pathogenic Germs 

Com municability 

Host 

Parasites 

Commensal 

Antibiosis 

Symbiosis 

Antibodies 

Antigens 

Saprophytes 

Obligate Saprophytes 

Septicemia 

Toxemia 

Sapremia 

Epidemic 

Endemic 

Sporadic 

Pandemic 

Fomites 


170 


CHAPTER X 


DEFINITIONS 

Dis-ease 

Webster defines dis-ease as, “an alteration in the state of 
the body or of some of its organs, interrupting or disturbing 
the performance of the vital functions, or a particular instance 
or cause of this; any departure from the state of health 
presenting marked symptoms.” In using this word chiro- 
practically it is always hyphenated to indicate that it is a 
condition wherein there is a lack of ease. Incoordination is 
the term used in Chiropractic, meaning a lack of coordinate 
action in the body which is caused by interference with trans¬ 
mission of mental impulses. 

Classification 

Dis-eases are usually classified as constitutional and en¬ 
vironmental. A constitutional dis-ease is one that is due to 
defects in the structures of the body such as dis-ease of diges¬ 
tion, while enviromental dis-eases are attributed to extrinsic 
environmental conditions. The infectious dis-eases are given 
in this class. Chiropractically all dis-eases are brought on 
by interference with transmission of mental impulses caused 
by defective mechanism of the spinal column. The so-called 
environmental dis-eases are chiropractically the result of the 
lack of adaptation to enviromental conditions. 

Acute and Chronic 

Dis-eases are also considered to be acute or chronic. 
A dis-ease is in the acute stage when there is a “hot box” 
found at the causative subluxation. When adaptation has 
taken place and the “hot box” has disappeared, the condition 
is in the stage of chronicity. Taut fibers will then be present 

171 


172 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


and by their presence the palpation and location of the major 
subluxation may be verified. 

It is well for the student to understand what is meant by 
such expressions as the stage of exposure, the period of infec¬ 
tion, the stage of incubation, the period of invasion, the degree 
of infection, even though we have no particular reason to use 
such terms in our chiropractic explanations of dis-ease. 

Stage of Exposure 

The time during which the person is exposed to the morbific 
agents is known as the stage of exposure. 

Period of Infection 

The period of infection is the time during which the patho¬ 
genic germs actually enter the body. 

Stage of Incubation 

The stage of incubation is the time during which the 
morbific agents develop within the body and for the time 
being have overcome the natural resistance. The incubation 
period varies greatly in different so-called contagious dis-eases, 
it being governed largely by the character of the invading 
germs and the general health of the patient. 

Period of Invasion 

The time during which the germs remain in the body is 
called the period of invasion. 

Degree of Infection 

The vital resistance of the body, the portal of entry and 
the character of the invading germs determines the degree 
of infection. 

We wish again to call the student's attention to the fact that 
these expressions are not used chiropractically to explain the 
cause of dis-ease nor the different stages through which dis¬ 
ease passes. 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


173 


Contagious 

A contagious dis-ease is one that is thought to be trans¬ 
ferred from one individual to another by personal contact. 
From the etymology of the term (contingere, to touch) we 
would conclude that only such dis-eases as syphilis would 
come under this category. But as the term is generally under¬ 
stood it includes such dis-eases as smallpox, measles and 
chickenpox. 

Infectious 

An infectious dis-ease is one that is supposed to be con¬ 
veyed from one individual to another indirectly through some 
medium. Typhoid fever has been given as an infectious 
dis-ease. 

Today it is generally considered that the terms, contagious 
and infectious, do not have a precise meaning which will 
scientifically differentiate them, for most of the so-called com¬ 
municable dis-eases may be conveyed in many different ways. 
The so-called infectious dis-eases may be contagious and the 
so-called contagious dis-eases are infectious; so we see the 
terms lack scientific precision and this has led to confusion 
many times. 

Morbific Agents 

Morbific agents are those agents which are thought capable 
of producing dis-ease when introduced into the body. They 
are of vegetable or animal origin. Those of vegetable origin 
are classed under the general name of bacteria. The most 
important are named according to their form. Those of the 
spherical shape are known as cocci; the elongated, rod-like 
form, as bacilli; and those of spiral form, as spirilli. The 
streptococcus pyogenes, pneumococcus and gonococcus are 
illustrations of the cocci. The most common pathogenic bacilli 
are bacillus anthracis, bacillus tetani, bacillus typhosus, bacil- 


174 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


lus tuberculosis and bacillus influenzae. The most usual spirilla 
are vibrio cholera asiatica, spirillum of relapsing fever and 
spirochaeta pallida. Pathogenic action of germs upon the 
body may be mechanical, biological or chemical. The mechan¬ 
ical action is an interference with the physiological activity 
of the organs, causing stasis and hemorrhage. The biological 
action causes inflammation, infiltration and abscesses in the 
tissues. The chemical action is the result of the toxins formed 
by the action of the germs. This is by far the most important 
action. 

Pathogenic Germs 

Microorganisms are spoken of as being pathogenic and 
non-pathogenic according to the adaptative action produced 
by Innate Intelligence when they are introduced into the body. 
Pathogenic germs are those which will do harm to the host 
when introduced under certain circumstances. It has been 
demonstrated that a germ may be pathogenic to one host and 
non-pathogenic to another. A germ may be pathogenic to 
a host at one time and not at another, showing that immunity 
is not constant in the same individual. The pathogenicity of 
a germ depends upon the host and not upon the germ. 
Chiropractic has proven that germs will not harm the 
body unless there is interference with the transmission of 
mental impulses so that Innate Intelligence can not bring 
about the proper adaptative action to the presence of the 
germs. 

Non-Pathogenic Germs 

When there is complete adaptative action on the part of 
Innate Intelligence and the germs are excreted immediately 
without the production of symptoms or ill effects to the body, 
the germs are said to be non-pathogenic. This is not so much 
because of the character of the germs but because of the 
ability of Innate to excrete them as waste material. 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


175 


Communicability 

This term refers to the ease with which the germs pass 
from one host to another. Chiropractic has proven the fallacy 
of the theory that dis-ease is produced in this way. Patients 
become ill with the so-called communicable dis-eases and are 
not exposed to the germs that are supposed to cause the dis¬ 
ease. 11 is also a proven fact that the so-called germ dis-eases 
develop in many cases in which there are no germs to be 
found in the pathological tissue. 

Host 

The host is an organism which affords lodgment and sus¬ 
tenance to parasite and commensal organisms. The invading 
organisms may be beneficial, they may be harmful or they 
may produce no effect. 

Parasites 

Parasites are those living organisms, either plant or animal, 
which live in, on, or with some other living organism, known 
as the host, from which they obtain their food, shelter and 
other advantages. They are of two classes—ectoparasites and 
endoparasites—and may be either plant or animal organisms. 
An ectoparasite is one that lives upon the outside of another 
living organism known as the host. The endoparasite is one 
that lives within the body of the host. 

Commensal 

A commensal is an organism which lives in or on another 
organism and shares the shelter and partakes of the same 
food as the host, but is not in reality a parasite. It is a close 
association of two organisms for the benefit of one or both. 

Antibiosis 

This is a form of parasitism which is harmful to either host 
or parasite or to both. By this process of antibiosis water 


176 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


may be purified of many of the pathogenic germs. It is also 
maintained that in many instances there is but one major con¬ 
dition in the body at one time as a result of this process. 

Symbiosis 

In this form of parasitism the organisms are dissimilar, 
but neither is harmful to the other while the state is beneficial 
to one or both. Symbiosis will result in one condition becom¬ 
ing conducive to another condition as, for example, presence 
of certain microorganisms favors the development of tetanus. 
Germs are sometimes cultivated in symbiosis with other germs. 
This has been done with the germs that are found in leprosy. 

Antibodies 

Antibodies are bodies as the term would indicate, but refers 
to specific properties of the blood supposed to be produced 
by antigens and thought to accomplish a certain degree of 
immunity. 

Antigens 

Antigens are the substances which produce the antibodies 
in the blood and body fluids. These are merely terms used 
to designate the mechanism of immunity. 

Saprophytes 

Saprophytes are microscopic organisms which feed upon 
dead organic matter. A saprophyte is a vegetable organism. 

Obligate Saprophytes 

Obligate saprophytes are saprophytes which can not be 
made to develop under any circumstances in living tissue, but 
will develop in dead tissue in which they produce toxins. The 
diphtheria and tetanus bacilli develop in a localized area of 
dead tissue and produce the toxins peculiar to this condition. 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


177 


Septicemia 

Septicemia is a condition wherein so-called pathogenic 
bacteria and their accompanying poisons are present in the 
blood. These bacteria may develop within the blood or 
they may be carried into the blood from some local point 
where they are developing due to the condition of the 
tissues as a result of interference with transmission of mental 
impulses. 

Toxemia 

Toxemia is a condition caused by the absorption of toxins 
from the bacterial activity. This is commonly known as blood 
poisoning. 

Sapremia 

Sapremia is a condition wherein the blood contains the 
putrefactive products of saprophytic and non-pathogenic 
bacteria. 

Epidemic 

When a great number of people are affected in a com¬ 
munity by the same dis-ease in a short period of time it is 
said to be an epidemic. An epidemic is said to obtain when 
dis-ease breaks out suddenly and involves a number of persons, 
at one time. There is a wide difference of opinion as to the 
percentage of individuals necessarily involved to constitute 
an epidemic. 

Endemic 

A dis-ease that is limited to a certain class of people or 
peculiar to a certain locality or district is said to be endemic. 
Endemic differs from epidemic in that epidemic refers to a 
dis-ease that is more or less constantly present. 


178 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


Sporadic 

A dis-ease occurring- singly or affecting only a few people 
is said to be sporadic. 

Pandemic 

When an epidemic involves a large number of people in a 
large number of countries, it is known as pandemic. There 
is a question as to whether or not the word can ever be prop¬ 
erly used. It is claimed that the influenza epidemic of 1918-19 
could really be considered pandemic in view of the fact that 
the condition was found in all countries. 

These terms are used very loosely and are applied largely 
to suit the circumstances. A number of cases of a so-called 
contagious dis-ease occurring about the same time in a com¬ 
munity may be considered an epidemic by some. There is no 
established rule designating the percentage of individuals that 
must be affected by the same condition in order that an 
epidemic may be established. An endemic dis-ease may be¬ 
come epidemic at certain times of the year or when a greater 
number of people than usual become affected. A sporadic 
dis-ease may become epidemic when a greater number of 
people become affected. 

Fomites 

Fomites are substances capable of absorbing and retaining 
infectious germs. The term is applied to inanimate objects 
and usually refers to bedding, especially mattresses, clothing 
and more particularly to woolen clothing. Such vectors, how¬ 
ever, are not now receiving as much consideration as they 
did previously. It is no longer thought that such objects as 
books and furniture play any particular part in the spreading 
of so-called infectious dis-ease. 

The foregoing definitions will give the student understand¬ 
ing of the terminology in general use. We will now take up 
a consideration of the study of the subject proper of immunity. 


CHAPTER XI 

IMMUNITY 


IMMUNITY 


Defined 

Natural 

Acquired 

active 

PASSIVE 

Exhaustive Theory of Pasteur 
Retention Theory of Chaveau 
Various Theories 
Adaptability of the Body 

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 
CARRYING CAPACITY OF THE NERVES 
RESERVE ENERGY 
VITAL RESISTANCE 

REDUCED CARRYING CAPACITY OF NERVES 
INTERFERENCE WITH TRANSMISSION 

Dis-ease the Cause of Germs 


180 


CHAPTER XI 

IMMUNITY 


Defined 

Immunity is defined as the ability of Innate Intelligence 
to maintain metabolic equilibrium in the body in the environ¬ 
ments in which man finds himself; or that power of Innate 
Intelligence to rid the living body of poisons and invading 
organisms; or that resistance which is accomplished through 
the expression of mental impulses in the tissue cells whereby 
all invading microorganisms or toxins are expelled from 
the body, thereby enabling the normal expression of life in the 
body. The degree of immunity may be represented by the 
degree of intellectual adaptation possible in the body, and this 
in turn depends upon the freedom in the transmission of 
mental impulses through the spinal nerves. Immunity may 
be considered as the degree of protection which Innate is able 
to give the body and varies from a slight adaptation to the 
utmost adaptation or protection from all invading agencies. 

Immunity is one of the most interesting and yet the most 
illusive and complicated subjects which we will have to con¬ 
sider from the standpoint of chiropractic philosophy, for in 
order to understand immunity we must understand the adapta- 
tive processes carried on within the body. From time im¬ 
memorial man has made an effort to immunize himself from 
the ravages of dis-ease. In former times he tried to accom¬ 
plish this through the use of charms which led to many 
superstitious practices, some remnants of which have survived 
to the present day. In recent years large sums of money have 
been expended in scientific research in an effort to discover 
the secret which would make the human race immune from 
dis-ease, but to no avail. It is a recognized fact that great 

181 


182 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


good has been accomplished in improving conditions and 
creating an environment in which there might be a more per¬ 
fect expression of life with less necessity for an excessive 
expenditure of adaptative energy. But man himself has not 
been made immune by these methods. The procedure has 
been wrong for the cause of dis-ease is not in man's environ¬ 
ment, but within man himself. Chiropractic will accomplish 
the most desired end by restoring to normal the transmission 
of mental impulses to all parts of the body so there may be 
a complete adaptation to all environmental conditions that 
may arise. The body will then be protected from the sup¬ 
posedly deadly microorganisms that are accused of being 
responsible for human ills. 

If the public could read what the hygienists have to say 
on the subject of immunology and could read it in the light 
of chiropractic philosophy they would realize that chiropractic 
adjustments will not only restore health to the sick, but will 
prevent the well from getting sick. 

In order that the student may understand the subject more 
fully we will now consider briefly in a general way some of 
the former theories of immunity and then take up a careful 
study of the chiropractic philosophy of immunity. 

On page 528 of Preventive Medicine and Hygiene, by 
Rosenau, we read: “We are still ignorant of the mechanism 
by which the body protects itself against many diseased 
states." He also gives us the idea that the mechanism of 
immunity varies not only in different infections, but in the 
same infection when under different and varying conditions. 

Natural Immunity 

Immunity is classed as natural, acquired and artificial. 
Natural immunity is that natural resistance of Innate In¬ 
telligence through the activity in the normal body whereby 
all invading organisms and poisons, as well as all the products 
of katabolism are excreted before they have an opportunity 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


183 


to act upon the tissues or otherwise interfere with the vital 
processes in the body. 

Acquired Immunity 

Acquired immunity is the result of the adaptative processes 
of Innate Intelligence during the time the so-called dis-ease is 
active in the body which results in the recovery of the patient. 
To illustrate: During the attack of measles there is an adapta¬ 
tive process carried on which results in the recovery of the 
patient. During the process of this adaptation Innate produces 
changes in the body which makes possible the excretion of 
this kind of poison when introduced into the body in the 
future. It is a recognized fact, however, that having a dis¬ 
ease will not always prevent the recurrence of the dis-ease. 
In other words, to put it in the terminology familiar to all, 
having a dis-ease will not always produce immunity. 

Artificial Immunity 

Artificial immunity is classified as active and passive. 
George M. Price, M.D., in his Hygiene and Public Health , 
says: “Active immunity is produced by the following con¬ 
ditions: (1) Recovery from disease. (2) Inoculation with 
virulent living bacteria. (3) Vaccination with attenuated bac¬ 
teria; (4) with dead bacteria; (5) with bacterial extracts. 
Passive immunity is conferred by antitoxins and serums.” 

The idea here presented is that the immunity is active if 
it is the result of a necessity for internal intellectual adapta¬ 
tion on the part of Innate Intelligence, and when this adapta¬ 
tion takes place there will be immunity from further attacks. 
That the passive immunity is produced by the introduction of 
antitoxins or serums taken from the bodies of animals in whose 
bodies these adaptative processes have taken place. 

There is no possible way of producing immunity except by 
creating a condition in the body which will enable Innate 
Intelligence to transmit the mental impulses to the tissues in 


184 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


such quantity and quality that there may be perfect adaptation 
carried on regardless of the character of the poison or micro¬ 
organism that may be introduced into or manufactured within 
the body. 

Exhaustion Theory 

In 1888 Pasteur advanced the exhaustion theory wherein 
he maintained that the body which had no food for the germ 
to feed upon would be immune; in other words, when the food 
supply was used up the germ could no longer develop and 
grow. An illustration of this is the yeast which will cease 
to grow when the sugar in the culture media is exhausted. 
This theory was rejected but has since been revived and is 
now considered to have some merit. This theory comes very 
flearly agreeing with the chiropractic idea, which will be dis¬ 
cussed later. 

Retention Theory 

Another theory is that of Chaveau, which is known as the 
retention theory. This is just the opposite of the exhaustion 
theory and maintains that the products of metabolism within 
the microorganisms, the excreta of the germs, form a toxin 
or a substance which is retained in the body of the host and 
protects it against the growth and development of the germs, 
in this way producing immunity. 

That which can not be used in the metabolism of an 
organism will naturally be excreted, for if it is allowed to 
remain in the body it will impair the tissues. The excreta of 
the germ then can not be used in its own metabolism and is 
therefore a poison to the germ as well as to the host. This 
waste accumulates until the germ eventually is destroyed by 
the poison of its own excreta. This is given as an explanation 
of self-limited dis-eases. It is further explained by this theory 
that this poisonous excreta of the germ is retained in the secre¬ 
tions of the body of the host and acts as a protection against 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


185 


further invasion, for when other germs of the same character 
enter the body they come in contact with this poison and are 
destroyed. In this way immunity is supposed to be main¬ 
tained. But this is not logical, since the excreta of these germs 
can not be used in the metabolic processes of the human body. 
It is a poison and will be dealt with by Innate as such. Innate 
does one of two things when poison enters the body or when 
it is manufactured within the body. One is to eliminate it 
through the normal channels of excretion; the other is to 
produce an antidote in the form of an internal secretion to 
neutralize the poison. In either event the excreta of the germ 
would lose its potency as a germicide and could therefore have 
nothing to do with the production of immunity. 

Various Theories 

Again, it is claimed that the phagocytes perform a very 
important function in protecting the body against invading 
microorganisms by attacking, destroying and digesting them. 
Another theory is that the antibodies of various kinds play 
an important part in keeping the body free from undesirable 
invaders. It is also asserted that immunity is produced in a 
negative way by the absence of a specific affinity between the 
tissue cells and the toxin. 

Immunity may be the result, according to other theories, 
of a positive factor due to the presence of antibodies which 
neutralize the toxins. In some cases immunity is associated 
directly with cell activity while in others it is resident in the 
blood and fluids of the body. Rosenau further says, “The 
unsatisfactory state of our knowledge in certain fields of 
immunity is well illustrated in the case of anthrax. The 
mechanism of protection is not at all understood in this in¬ 
fection, which was the first and classic illustration of a germ 
disease. The mechanism of immunity in common colds is also 
complex and obscure.” 

Many other authors could be quoted to show that the real 


186 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


philosophy of immunity is not understood nor why a germ 
will seem to cause dis-ease in one individual and not in an¬ 
other. But this is sufficient to indicate the unsatisfactory 
results that have been obtained in research work along this 
line. 

Adaptability of the Body 

It is a known fact that there is a wide range of adaptability 
and a vast difference in the vital resistance of different in¬ 
dividuals, and even in the same individual at different times. 
There must be some reason for this difference. 

It is also a known fact that an individual may be apparently 
well one day and sick the next, although there may be no 
change in the subluxations existing in the spine of the in¬ 
dividual. Environmental conditions are constantly arising 
which necessitate adaptative action on the part of Innate Intel¬ 
ligence. This action must be in addition to the normal action 
taking place under the normal and usual environments. In 
order to accomplish this increased functional activity the 
current must be increased to accomplish this, the carrying 
capacity of the nerve must be greater than the current neces¬ 
sary to maintain the ordinary metabolic process in the 
body. 

Under the stress of environmental necessity it is possible 
for Innate Intelligence to increase the functional current of 
mental impulses up to the full carrying capacity of the nerve, 
and to augment the functional activity at the periphery to the 
full capability of the physical structure to express that cur¬ 
rent of mental impulses. Were it not for this possibility of 
increased functional activity there could be no adaptative 
processes in the body. In order that there may be an increase 
in the functional activity there must be an increase in the 
functional current of mental impulses. This necessitates that 
the current transmitted under normal conditions be less than 
the carrying capacity of the nerve. 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


187 


Psychologists tell us there is a certain amount of reserve 
energy stored up in the body. Chiropractic maintains that 
it is not a matter of energy being stored up, but that this 
reserve energy is a question of increasing the functional cur¬ 
rent so as to increase the processs of adaptation in the tissues. 
The degree of adaptation is represented by the difference in 
the current transmitted through a nerve under normal condi¬ 
tions, and that transmitted when the full carrying capacity 
of the nerve is taxed. In other words, the reserve energy 
is the difference between the current that is being transmitted 
and that which it is possible to have transmitted. 

As the adaptative action is increased in response to the 
necessity there will be, in adverse ratio, a decrease in the 
reserve carrying capacity of the nerve. In other words, as 
the current is decreased the reserve carrying capacity of the 
nerve is increased. The degree, therefore, of vital resistance 
is represented by the reserve carrying capacity of the nerve 
and as this is decreased there will be a like decrease in the 
vital resistance of the body. 

Some individuals are immune from certain so-called con¬ 
tagious dis-eases and we are told that this is because the vital 
resistance is greater in them than it is in others. This state¬ 
ment is true, but there should be some reason for this dif¬ 
ference in resistance and Chiropractic gives us that reason. 
The possibility for adaptative action in the body is decreased 
by subluxations in the spine and its degree depends upon the 
combination of subluxations, the functions involved and the 
organs in which the functions are expressed abnormally. 

The question, however, arises that if there are subluxations 
in the spine, why are there no incoordinations but merely 
the possibility of decreased adaptation. To this question 
there is a specific answer. It is contained in the principles 
involved in and underlying the philosophy of Chiropractic, 
therefore it is not possible here to go into details. It can 
be considered from a general viewpoint only. 


188 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


There may be a combination of subluxations existing in 
the spine and yet not enough pressure to prevent Innate 
Intelligence getting a current through great enough to meet 
all the ordinary demands of the average environment. But 
when subluxations do exist and a condition arises necessitating 
increased functional activity, Innate, because of the decreased 
carrying capacity, is unable to increase the current of the 
periphery. Hence adaptation can not take place and there is 
incoordination which would not have obtained if the carrying 
capacity of the nerves had not been decreased by the sub¬ 
luxation. It must be remembered that even in the normal 
condition when there are no subluxations, health is a question 
of intellectual adaptation; that dis-ease is a question of the 
lack of intellectual adaptation. As the possibilities of in¬ 
tellectual adaptation are decreased, the possibilities of in¬ 
coordination are increased. 

An individual will be immune so long as the carrying 
capacity of the nerves remain normal or so long as the carry¬ 
ing capacity is not decreased. Germs ingested or taken into 
the body will be excreted as so much waste material and will 
not be permitted to remain in the body. This is not only true 
of germs and microorganisms, but of all poisons. The carry¬ 
ing capacity of the nerves is limited, but in the normal con¬ 
dition is 100%. If the poison introduced is stronger than 
the internal resistance then the meeting of the two forces will 
produce a concussion, and if this concussion is greater than 
the normal resistance of the spine a subluxation will be pro¬ 
duced. In this way an individual may be immune from one 
poison and not another, or from one particular germ and not 
another, or he may be immune at one time and not at another 
time. For the philosophy of subluxations being produced by 
poison, the student is referred to Chiropractic Library, Vol. V, 
Palmer, under the heading of poisons. 

The particular mechanism of immunity is not so vital so 
long as we understand that it is produced by the operation 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


189 


of Innate Intelligence, and know what is necessary to enable 
Innate to produce this condition. 

Under the exhaustion theory of Pasteur it was maintained 
that when food upon which germs fed was exhausted they 
could no longer develop and the body in which there was no 
food for the germs would be immune from the germ dis-eases. 
Chiropractic maintains that the germ is a scavenger and feeds 
upon dead tissue, never upon live tissue; that there must be 
a proper culture media for the development of the germs and 
this can obtain only in tissue that is below the normal condi¬ 
tion. Therefore, if the tissues are maintained in a state of 
normality by the normal transmission and expression of mental 
impulses, there will be no food for the germs and they will be 
excreted. On the other hand, if the tissues are below normal 
in their resistive powers, due to the interference with the 
transmission of mental impulses, the germs finding food and 
a culture media conducive to their development will remain 
and multiply and their excreta will act as a poison and necessi¬ 
tate a further process of adaptation, the character of the symp¬ 
toms depending entirely upon the character of the poison 
produced. 

It is not necessary to kill the germ that the patient may 
recover. All that is necessary is to adjust the subluxation 
or subluxations that are causing the interference with the 
transmission so the tissues may become normal and the germs 
will starve to death and be excreted as dead material. 

Dis-ease the Cause of Germs 

Dr. Alexander M. Ross, Fellow of the Royal Society of 
England, said in speaking of germs, “They are the result, not 
the cause, of disease. They are scavengers; their legitimate 
work is to clean out the sewers of our bodies. ,, 

John B. Fraser, M.D., C.M., writes, “The reasons for ques¬ 
tioning the germ theory are mainly three, viz: 


190 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


“1st. The divergent views of bacteriologists as to which 
germ caused the disease. 

“2nd. The stronger claim of the bio-chemic theory. 

“3rd. The absence of germs at the onset of disease (as 
the following sample cases show). 

“(a) A man crossing a river broke through the ice, was 
rescued, later became ill, and the doctor, fearing pneumonia, 
tested for pneumo-cocci—there were none present; when the 
pneumonia developed they appeared. 

“(b) After an oyster supper some men had cramps and 
diarrhoea, followed by typhoid fever—no Eberth bacilli were 
present in the first stools, but were present later. 

“(c) Hurrying, a girl arrived at her shop sweating; as 
the shop was cold, she became very chilly; next day com¬ 
plained of a sore throat, but no Klebs-Loffler bacilli were 
found; later, when a diphtheretic patch appeared, the bacilli 
were present. 

“Here in each case the bacilli followed the onset of the 
disease. 

“Believing that the above germs were the result and not 
the cause of the diseases, tests of the germs of diphtheria, 
typhoid and pneumonia were made. 

“The first test was whether the Klebs-Loffler bacilli would 
cause diphtheria, and about 50,000 were swallowed without 
any result. Later 100,000, 500,000 and a million and more 
were swallowed, and in no case did they cause any ill-effect. 

“The series of tests was to decide whether the Eberth 
bacillus would cause typhoid, but each test was negative; 
even when millions were swallowed. The third series of tests 
showed that one could swallow a million (and over) pneumo¬ 
cocci without causing pneumonia, or any disturbance. 

“The investigations covered about two years and forty-five 
(45) different tests were made, giving an average of fifteen 
tests each. I personally tested each germ (culture) before 
allowing the others to do so; and six persons (3 male, 3 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


191 


female) knowingly took part in the tests and in no case did 
any symptoms of the disease follow. 

“The germs were swallowed in each case, and were given 
in milk, water, bread, cheese, meat, head-cheese, fish, and 
apples—also tested on the tongue. 

“Most of the cultures were grown by myself—some from 
stock tubes furnished by Parke, Davis & Co., and one tube 
furnished by the Toronto Board of Health through one of 
their bacteriologists. 

“As the tests were carefully made, they prove that there 
is not the danger from germs that bacteriologists claim; they 
also may stimulate other Canadians to undertake further ex¬ 
perimental work, for the actual test on man decides the truth 
of the theory. ,, 

Germs Do Not Cause Dis-ease 

Germs do not cause dis-ease, but they may be considered 
as any other foreign substance taken into the body, which 
can not be used in its metabolism. Any foreign substance 
which can not be used in the processes of metabolism will 
injure the tissues if allowed to remain in the body. If germs 
are taken into the body and if there are subluxations which 
prevent Innate from producing normal function in excreting 
these germs, and if there is waste material due to impaired 
metabolism, these germs will find a culture medium conducive to 
their development; then in their natural processes of develop¬ 
ment and metabolic processes, secretion and excretion, toxins 
will be formed which will result in certain symptoms from 
such poisons, all due to the fact that there are subluxations 
producing pressure upon nerves interfering with the trans¬ 
mission of mental impulses. 

Immunity, then, is a question of keeping the body in such 
a physical condition that there will be no abnormal tissue 
upon which the germs may feed. But this would imply that 
in order to have dis-ease there must first be abnormal tissue 


192 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


AND the germs. This, however, is not the case for there 
may be dis-ease without the presence of the germ, even in the 
so-called germ dis-eases. Dis-ease is not a question of germs 
being present, but it is the decreased current of mental im¬ 
pulses to the tissue cells. 

The best way to produce immunity is to have the subluxa¬ 
tions adjusted so there may be a normal transmission of im¬ 
pulses to all parts of the body so that intellectual adaptation 
may be at par. Immunity from any and all dis-eases may be 
produced by the restoration of transmission. This does not 
mean that after momentum has been gained dis-ease will be 
at once overcome and the process of restoration will be 
accomplished without a sufficient amount of time to enable 
Innate Intelligence to bring about the necessary processes of 
restoration. But we do mean to say that if all subluxations 
were adjusted the individual would be immune from all inco¬ 
ordinations. Still subluxations could be produced by trauma 
and also by the introduction of poisons into the body. In 
order to maintain constant immunity the individual should 
periodically visit his chiropractor for an analysis. By so 
doing subluxations that have been produced may be detected 
and adjusted. 


CHAPTER XII 

GERMS 


GERMS 

Origin of the Germ Theory as Cause of Dis-ease 
Action of Germs in the Body a Natural Process 
Bacteria 

classification of 

DIPHTHERIC GERMS IN THROAT 
FOUND EVERYWHERE 

Source of Communication 

MAN AND ANIMALS 

media of conveyance 

Mode of Transfer 

DIRECT 

INDIRECT 

INTERMEDIATE HOST 
CARRIERS 

Channels of Entry 

THE RESPIRATORY TRACT 
DIGESTIVE TRACT 
THE SKIN 

THE GENITO-URINARY TRACT 

Terms Infectious and Contagious 


194 


CHAPTER XII 


GERMS 

Origin of Germ Theory 

The average individual, who thinks of the cause of dis-ease 
and then associates germs as that cause, probably does not 
realize that the germ theory of the cause of dis-ease only 
dates back to about 1880. He does not realize that the man 
who decided germs cause dis-ease died in 1895. However, it 
is true that as early as 1675 a Dutch lens-maker published 
the fact that he had manufactured a lens of such high power 
that “animalcules” could be seen in water. He also asserted 
that microorganisms could be found in feces. However, they 
were associated with dis-ease only in a speculative way; even 
Aristotle in the second century speculated on microorganisms 
as the cause of dis-ease, but this was only theory as ‘he could 
not prove it, having no microscopes with which to study the 
germs nor any methods of isolating them. It was not until 
Louis Pasteur began his research work in bacteriology that 
scientists considered there was proof that germs caused dis¬ 
ease, and since that time medical science has gone to the 
extreme along this line. 

The germ theory of dis-ease has gained such favor that 
great amounts of money and the very best talent have been 
lent to the investigations. But as time has gone on and the 
zenith of this doctrine has been reached, we find the theory 
has been questioned until today even those who were pre¬ 
viously advocates of this theory are now doubting or rejecting 
it. Many questions are being raised concerning dis-ease being 
the direct result of the introduction of bacteria and germs into 
the body. It is now maintained by the best authorities, among 

195 


13 


196 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


those who previously asserted that germs were the cause of 
dis-ease, that dis-ease is the cause of the germs. 

Action of Germs a Natural Process 

The action of microorganisms, inside as well as outside the 
body, is a perfectly natural process and one that has been 
provided in Nature as a part of her general plan. It is a 
natural method just the same as her method of purifying 
the air or the self-purification of water or any of her other 
beneficent processes are natural. Milk will not sour without 
bacteria. Putrefaction is the result of the activity of the bac¬ 
teria. Did it ever occur to you that the process of putrefaction 
is one of Nature’s methods for keeping our environment sani¬ 
tary? Even this process is obtained only through bacterial 
action. Bacteria are always present in the intestinal tract and 
aid in intestinal digestion. 

The term is applied to all microscopic organisms, whether 
vegetable or animal. Vegetable microorganisms are known as 
bacteria while animal microorganisms are called protozoa. 

Bacteria 

Bacteria are the simplest form of vegetable life and also 
the smallest. They vary greatly in size and are grouped in 
three classes according to their shape: cocci, which are minute 
spherical cells, bacilli, rod-shaped cells, and spirilla, which have 
a spiral form. 

There are three types of bacteria: the rod or bacillus, the 
sphere or coccus, and the spiral or spirillum, all so named 
because of their shape. They divide by what is known as 
fission, each cell dividing into two and so on. When the 
conditions are favorable this division may take place as often 
as every thirty minutes. 

They may be produced artificially in a proper culture 
medium. It is generally supposed by the layman that the 
bacteria are very hardy little creatures and will develop in the 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


197 


body and cause dis-ease under the least provocation. This, 
however, is quite erroneous for they are very delicate and 
their propagation is difficult. The temperature and moisture 
must be exactly right and they must have just the proper 
kind of food or they will not multiply. They will live in an 
environment, sometimes for a great length of time, that is 
not suitable for propagation. 

Diphtheric germs' are found in the throat of the average 
person. These germs, however, will not multiply nor develop 
until the tissues of the throat are depleted. The tissues then 
become pathological and form food for the bacteria, but even 
then they will hot develop unless the temperature and moisture 
are exactly right. Bacteria multiply very rapidly when there 
is waste material in the tissue of the throat which furnishes 
food and when the environment is conducive to their develop¬ 
ment. The tissues weakened by the decrease in the flow of 
mental impulses are not able to expel the germs and they 
accumulate, not as the cause of dis-ease, but as a result of 
dis-ease. The bacteriologist examines a culture from the 
throat of the patient and because he finds the germs present 
he says the germs cause the dis-ease, since no other cause 
is known; strange to say, however, when the patient is adjusted 
and the tissues become normal it is not necessary to kill the 
germs. They will starve to death and Innate will excrete 
them. 

Bacteria are found everywhere and in almost everything. 
In food, water, on the walls and floors, and in the pores of 
the skin. All life is due to the action of these bacteria. The 
action of the germs soon produce fermentation and putrefaction 
of dead animal tissue and of vegetables, thus reducing them 
into simpler elements which furnish nourishment for plant 
life. The plants furnish food for animals and man, and thus 
we have what is known as the food cycle. So we see that 
vegetation is dependent upon bacterial action for its supply 
of food. If the bacteria were all destroyed there would soon 


198 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


be an end of food and plant life would die because of starva¬ 
tion. If there was no plant life the animal kingdom would 
be robbed of its food supply. Thus we see the important 
function performed by the bacteria. 

The so-called dis-ease germs may be found in the healthy 
body, but that body does not have the dis-ease merely because 
that germ is present. If, however, there is a subluxation which 
interferes with the transmission of mental impulses the tissues 
soon become pathological and proper environment is created 
for the development of the germ. Then this germ propagates 
and soon there is a large number present. These germs will, 
however, disappear as soon as the tissues become normal. 
In other words, when the incoordination is restored to coordi¬ 
nation the germs disappear. 

Source of Communication 

There are two recognized principal sources of com¬ 
municable dis-ease common to man, namely, man himself and 
the lower animals. It is interesting to note that most of the 
so-called communicable dis-eases are peculiar to man alone. 
They are not found in the lower animals except as they are 
communicated by man for experimental purposes. It is true 
that domesticated animals are more susceptible to dis-ease 
than wild animals. 

From the standpoint of hygiene there must be a distinc¬ 
tion made between the source of infection and the media of 
conveyance. Man and animals are considered the main sources 
of infection. Environment is regarded a source of infection. 
It is maintained that water, food, air, and soul form a media 
for conveyance, but they are not considered sources of infec¬ 
tion. Rosenau, one of the leading hygienists, states that 
“most of the microorganisms causing the communicable dis¬ 
eases of man are frail and soon die in our environment, as 
in the air, soil or water.” Notwithstanding this fact, some 
still maintain that these frail little germs cause dis-ease. 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


199 


Modes of Transfer 

Hygienists assert that germs are transmitted either by 
direct or indirect means. The vehicles of transmission may 
be man himself, animals, or anything that will carry the germs 
from one person to another. Price says, “The most frequent 
and demonstrated mode of infection is by direct contact of 
dis-ease with the healthy, of the persons surrounding the 
infected one, such as physicians, nurses, etc.” 

We must differentiate between the mode of transmission, 
or, as it is sometimes called, the mode of infection, and the 
channel of infection. The channel of infection is the passage 
through which the germs enter the body. In tuberculosis the 
channel of entrance might be the respiratory tract, through 
the skin, or by means of the digestive tract, while the mode 
of infection or mode of transfer might be by such means as 
milk or sputum. 

There are two principal modes of transference: (a) direct 
or contact infection, (b) indirect infection. Under this second 
heading would be included carriers or intermediate host. 
Direct or contact infection is from person to person and may 
be accomplished through discharges from the nose and mouth 
or other excretions from the body. There are many dis-eases 
supposed to be transferred from person to person by direct 
contact. Such dis-ease as diphtheria, tuberculosis, scarlet 
fever, syphilis, gonorrhea and skin dis-eases belong in this 
class. It is also asserted that these same dis-eases may be 
transmitted from person to person by intermediate agents. 
For example, typhoid germs may be transmitted in fecal mat¬ 
ter into the water supply and ingested into the body. The 
gonococci may be deposited upon fomites, such as bedding, 
and transferred to other individuals. From a chiropractic 
standpoint these incoordinations will be produced only when 
there is interference with transmission of mental impulses, pre¬ 
venting intellectual adaptation taking place in the body. 


200 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


Indirect infection is accomplished from person to person 
through such means as water, food, air and soil. It is claimed 
by medical hygienists that dis-eases may be transferred great 
distances by these vehicles. However, some of the so-called 
pathogenic germs are short lived and will therefore not infect 
after any length of time. 

It is affirmed by some that a person may be a carrier of 
a dis-ease and not himself be suffering from the dis-ease. As, 
for instance, there are cases on record where an individual has 
been a carrier of diphtheria, having the germs in his own throat 
and from his throat the germs have found their way into the 
throats of others. In other words, there were pathogenic 
germs in his body which were doing no harm to him, but when 
they entered, the body of others caused dis-ease. People have 
been found with every imaginable dis-ease germ and yet have 
themselves been perfectly well. Such persons are known as 
“carriers.” From a chiropractic viewpoint this condition is 
very easily explained. In such people the transmission of 
mental impulses is sufficient to permit Innate Intelligence to 
maintain a sufficient degree of adaptation to prevent the 
propagation of the germs, but not sufficient to enable Innate 
to excrete the germs as waste material. 

The course followed in preventive medicine in these cases 
is isolation of the individuals and the strictest sanitation. 
Their occupations are controlled so that they will not handle 
food intended for other people. In these ways danger from 
carriers is lessened. 

Pathogenic bacteria live in the bodies of infected persons, 
in their secretions and excretions, and in the discharges of 
the body, but they are not found free in Nature. The principal 
vehicle of transmission is man himself. He is also the prin¬ 
cipal recipient of infection. Germs may be found in the 
various secretions such as those from the eye, ear, nose, throat, 
from wounds and in the pus from abscesses; they may be 
found also in sputum, urine and in the solid excretions. In 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


201 


these ways they may be transmitted from one individual to 
another. They may also be carried by animals, insects, food, 
milk, water, air or any other mode or vehicle. The most 
common mode of transference, however, is from person to 
person. 

Channels of Entry 

The channels through which germs enter the body are 
grouped as follows: (a) respiratory tract, (b) digestive tract, 
(c) skin, (d) genito-urinary tract. 

Since the air contains many germs at all times, it can 
readily be seen that the respiratory tract forms an excellent 
portal of entry through the mucous membrane of the eyes, 
nose, mouth, throat and lungs. It is asserted by those who 
believe that germs cause dis-ease, that the germs of diphtheria, 
scarlatina, measles and pneumonia enter the body through the 
respiratory tract. It can readily be seen that since the air 
contains bacteria at all times, even of the so-called pathogenic 
type, that they would be taken in with every breath and if 
these germs were the cause of dis-ease every individual would 
have all kinds of dis-ease. It is quite evident that these germs 
do not remain in the body except under the most favorable 
conditions, obtaining only when there is interference with 
transmission which makes the tissues abnormal. 

It is maintained by exponents of the germ theory that the 
greater number of germ dis-eases are caused by the germs 
that enter the body through the mouth into the alimentary 
tract. There are many pathogenic and nonpathogenic germs 
contained in the food that we eat and the water that we drink, 
and yet these germs do not produce dis-ease in every indi¬ 
vidual, yet the exponents of the germ theory hold that typhoid 
fever, cholera, dysentery and many other dis-eases are trans¬ 
mitted to the body through the alimentary canal by means of 
food and water. 

As a portal of entrance for germs into the body, the skin 


202 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


is considered of least importance since the germs will not 
penetrate the normal skin under ordinary circumstances. If 
there is an abrasion or wound infection may be produced by 
the entrance of germs, but this will take place only when 
there is sufficient interference with transmission of mental 
impulses to make it impossible for Innate Intelligence to 
bring about proper reparatory processes. Animal parasites 
may find a portal of entrance through the skin. 

The genito-urinary tract furnishes a portal of entrance 
into the body for such germs as those of gonorrhea, syphilis 
and tuberculosis, either by direct contact or through inter¬ 
mediary agents. Infection of the body is by means of some 
of these entry channels which differ with the different bac¬ 
teria. The bacteria may be entirely innocent when entering 
one part of the body, yet when they enter through some other 
portal they may be considered pathogenic. In other words, 
some germs will thrive in one part of the body but not in some 
other part. 

Terms Infectious and Contagious 

The terms infectious and contagious are not clearly defined 
and have no scientific precision. “A contagious (contigere, 
to touch) disease is one that is readily communicable—in com¬ 
mon parlance, ‘catching.* Formerly a contagious disease was 
considered as one which is caught from another by contact, 
by the breath or by effluvia. A contagious disease implies 
direct or personal contact. If contagious diseases are limited 
to those contracted by direct contact or touch, as the ety¬ 
mology of the word signifies, only syphilis and diseases simi¬ 
larly contracted would be contagious. As a matter of fact, 
smallpox, measles and influenza are types of contagious dis¬ 
eases, and the term is now usually understood.” 

“An infectious (inficere, to put in, dip in, or mix in) dis¬ 
ease is usually considered as one not conveyed directly and 
obviously, as in the case of contagion, but indirectly through 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


203 


some hidden influence or medium. In the days when specific 
febrile diseases were regarded as caused by miasmata and 
noxious effluvia, the term 'infectious’ and 'miasmatic’ dis¬ 
eases were more or less synonymous. Typhoid fever was 
often taken as a type of an infectious disease. Malaria was 
the type of miasmatic disease.” (Rosenau, Preventive Medicine 
and Hygiene.) 

Most authors consider that an infectious dis-ease may be 
contagious and a contagious dis-ease is also infectious. Con¬ 
tagion implies more of a personal contact as a mode of trans¬ 
fer, while infection implies more of an indirect mode. The 
communicable is more specific, but does not refer to any par¬ 
ticular mode of transference. 

There are many so-called communicable dis-eases, yet let 
it ever be remembered that if Innate Intelligence is operating 
at par in the body there will be an immunity from these dis¬ 
eases, although the germs that are supposed to cause them 
will still exist. 



CHAPTER XIII 

DISINFECTION AND FUMIGATION 


DISINFECTION AND FUMIGATION 


DEFINITIONS 

Disinfection 

Sterilization 

Antiseptic 

Insecticide 

Asepsis 

Germicide 

Deodorant 

Fumigation 

FORMALDEHYDE 
SULPHUR DIOXIDE 

MEANS OF DISINFECTION 
Natural Means 
dilution 
desiccation 
sunlight 
time 

antibosis 
Other Agents 
fire 

DRY HEAT 

BOILING 

STEAM 

Other Disinfectants 

CARBOLIC ACID 
CREOLINE 
LYSOL 
SAPROL 

BICHLORIDE OF MERCURY 


206 


CHAPTER XIII 


DISINFECTION AND FUMIGATION 

DEFINITIONS 

Disinfection 

When an object is contaminated with so-called pathogenic 
germs it is said to be infected. To disinfect an object it is 
necessary to destroy the microorganisms. The destruction of 
all so-called pathogenic germs, whether in the substance of 
the object or on its surface, is called disinfection. All lower 
forms of animal and vegetable life are destroyed in steriliza¬ 
tion, while in disinfection only the germs which, from the 
medical standpoint, are the cause of dis-ease, are destroyed. 
The agent used in disinfection is known as a disinfectant or 
germicide. 

Sterilization 

The destruction of all germ life in or on an object is known 
as sterilization. From the standpoint of hygiene sterilization 
is unnecessary except in dis-eases such as anthrax, tetanus, 
and other spore-bearing dis-eases, the spore being highly re¬ 
sistive and not so easily destroyed as the vegetative cells.. 
Sterilization will disinfect but disinfection will not necessarily 
sterilize. Disinfection is thoroughly efficient in almost all 
cases. Sterilization destroys all life. 

Antiseptic (Anti, against, and septos, putrid) 

An antiseptic prevents putrifaction but does not neces¬ 
sarily destroy the microorganisms. A substance may act as 
an antiseptic by delaying or preventing the processes of decay 
and decomposition, but still not be a germicide. In other 
words, anything that will hinder the development of germ life 

207 


208 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


acts as an antiseptic. Thus cold has a preservative action, 
although it will not destroy the microorganisms. A disin¬ 
fectant may be diluted and used as an antiseptic. A 10% solu¬ 
tion of formalin is a good disinfectant and will kill bacteria 
in a relatively short space of time, but formalin in a solution 
of one to fifty thousand will be a very good antiseptic. The 
germination of anthrax spores may be prevented by the use 
of bichloride of mercury in as weak a solution as one to three 
hundred thousand, but it will require a solution of one to one 
thousand to destroy the spores. A disinfectant is also an 
antiseptic but an antiseptic is not a disinfectant. 

Asepsis 

Asepsis is an absence of putrifactive bacteria. This may 
be accomplished without the use of germicidal agents by 
cleanliness which excludes all so-called pathogenic germs. 

Insecticide 

An insecticide is an agent capable of destroying insect 
life. Many of the germicidal agents are also insecticides. 
There is a great difference in the resistance of different in¬ 
sects. Formaldehyde is a good germicide but is not an in¬ 
secticide. There are four ways of using insecticides. In liquid 
form, powder, vapor form and those placed in food to be eaten 
by the insects. 

Germicide 

A germicide and a disinfectant are the same for they both 
destroy germ life. Many germicides are so powerful that they 
completely sterilize or destroy all life. 

Deodorant 

A deodorant is not in any sense a disinfectant and has no 
power to destroy germ life. It is an agent which neutralizes 
unpleasant odors. A disinfectant destroys germs but does 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


209 


not necessarily destroy odors. A deodorant must not be con¬ 
fused with a substance having pungent odor which merely 
substitutes one odor for another. A deodorant destroys the 
unpleasant odor. 

Fumigation 

Fumigation is a means of disinfection by use of fumes or 
gases, and is used generally for the purpose of destroying 
germ life only on the surface of objects. For this reason 
fumigation should not be used as a substitute for disinfection. 
Formaldehyde and sulphur dioxide are used largely for fumi¬ 
gating purposes. 

Of these two gases formaldehyde is the better since it is 
not poisonous, does not injure the surface of objects and will 
not damage the most delicate fabrics nor destroy colors. 
Sulphur dioxide is very destructive and therefore less desirable. 
However, all the gaseous agents lack sufficient penetrative 
power to accomplish more than a surface disinfection. Formal¬ 
dehyde is a good germicide and this adds to its efficiency. 

To obtain the desired results in fumigating there must be 
special attention given the preparation of the rooms or spaces 
to be fumigated. All objects in the room should be so exposed 
that the gas may readily get to all surfaces. All furniture and 
other objects should be moved into the room away from the 
walls and all doors and drawers of bureaus and boxes should 
be opened so the gas may find free access to every nook and 
corner. Much of the gas may escape through cracks and 
crevices, therefore special care must be exercised that these 
openings are all properly closed before the fumigation is 
started. In view of the fact that the gas is non-destruc¬ 
tive there is no harm done even to the most delicate ma¬ 
terials. 

The best results are obtained from the formaldehyde when 
the temperature of the room is 65° F. or over, with a relative 
humidity of at least 60%. While formaldehyde has the power 


210 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


to kill spores it is not considered sufficient to disinfect in such 
dis-eases as anthrax and tetanus. 

Formaldehyde gas kills all forms of microorganisms almost 
instantly but is not particularly destructive to higher form of 
life. It produces a marked irritation in the mucous membrane 
of the respiratory tract which may result in death to animals 
exposed to the gas for any length of time. It is not con¬ 
sidered an insecticide. 

In fumigating a room with formaldehyde great care must 
be exercised that the individual does not remain in the room 
after the gas begins to be liberated. After the process of 
fumigation has been completed the windows and doors should 
all be opened that the gas may escape. It is always best to 
have the doors and windows open from the outside so that it 
will not be necessary for any one to go into the room until 
the gas has blown out. 

AGENTS OF DISINFECTION 
Physical Agents 

The physical agents of disinfection are sunlight, electricity, 
pressure, dry heat, burning, boiling, and steam. 

Chemical Agents 

Chemical agents of disinfection are divided into two divi¬ 
sions—gaseous and liquid disinfectants. The gaseous disin¬ 
fectants are: formaldehyde gas, sulphur dioxide gas, hydro¬ 
cyanic acid gas, chlorin, oxygen, and oxone. 

Some of the most important liquid disinfectants are metallic 
salts, bichloride of mercury, silver and zinc salts, coal-tar 
creosote, carbolic acid, phenol, lysol, creolin and formalin. 

MEANS OF DISINFECTION 
Natural Means 

Nature’s means of disinfecting are by dilution, sunlight, 
desiccation, time and antibiosis. The direct rays of the sun are 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


211 


Nature’s greatest germicide. Few of the microorganisms will 
live in the direct rays, but there are none that will withstand 
them for more than a few hours. Germs can not withstand 
the effect of dryness. Thus we see there is in Nature that 
which works as a most efficient germicide. The combination 
of sunlight and dryness, forms a most desirable means of disin¬ 
fection. When germs become attenuated through the effects 
of these natural processes they do little harm when introduced 
into the body. 

One of the most important adjuncts to the work of dis¬ 
infection is personal cleanliness and sanitation of the environ¬ 
ment. 

Other Agents 

Fire is not a practical disinfectant. It can be used only 
with those articles that are of little or no value since the 
article that is being disinfected is destroyed. The burning of 
all refuse and garbage is by all means the best method. Burn¬ 
ing is the most satisfactory and cheapest method in disin¬ 
fecting sputum and other excreta from the body, and in dis¬ 
posing of articles of little value saturated or contaminated 
with such. 

The dry heat method of disinfecting requires specially built 
apparatus such as dry air sterilizers. This form is not prac¬ 
ticable for use in disinfecting fabrics and other materials that 
are destroyed or injured by extremely high temperature re¬ 
quired to destroy the germ life. Metals are easily injured by 
this method as they are likely to be scorched. All forms of 
life are destroyed in an hour’s time when exposed to a tem¬ 
perature of 150° C. Such articles as glassware will withstand 
this heat or even higher and may be thoroughly sterilized 
in from one to two hours. This insures proper penetration 
and sufficient heat to completely destroy all life. 

Boiling is one of the most satisfactory and easiest methods 
of disinfecting. Continuous boiling for an hour in water at 


14 


212 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


100° C. will result in the destruction of most germs of the 
so-called infectious dis-eases. There are some of the spores, 
such as those of anthrax and tetanus, that will survive the 
most strenuous processes of boiling. However, most of 
the germs will be destroyed before the boiling point is 
reached. 

Boiling is the best method to be used in disinfecting bed¬ 
ding, body linen, towels and other fabrics which will not be 
harmed by this process. There is a great variety of articles 
that may be disinfected in this way, such as utensils and bed 
pans. The surfaces of the floors, walls, beds, and other objects 
may be cleansed with boiling water. In this use it is advisable 
to add some disinfectant to the water. 

Steam is not only a disinfectant but it is also a sterilizing 
agent. All forms of germ life, including spores, are com¬ 
pletely destroyed. It is therefore our best known disinfectant. 
There are many objects that are injured and some ruined by 
steam, such as silk, wool, furs, oilcloth and rubber goods, and 
articles containing varnish or glue. There is danger from 
staining and running of colors. Disinfection may be either 
with streaming steam or with steam under pressure. For the 
use of streaming steam no particular device is necessary. 
Some means of providing the steam and some place to hang 
or place the objects and articles to be disinfected are the two 
essentials for this method. It is not necessary to have an air¬ 
tight place. To use steam under pressure there must be a 
specially constructed apparatus. There are many such devices 
on the market and they are used in institutions where it is 
found necessary to disinfect with steam. 

Sterilization may be accomplished in twenty minutes with 
steam at about one atmosphere of pressure which will give a 
temperature of about 120° C. A temperature of about 125° C. 
is obtained with the pressure at about twenty pounds to the 
square inch. This reduces the time for sterilization to about 
fifteen minutes. 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


213 


Other Disinfectants 

Carbolic acid which is a good antiseptic but a compara¬ 
tively mild germicide is another disinfectant. It has very little 
penetrating power and is of most value in a 3% to 5% solu¬ 
tion for washing floors, walls and woodwork. The cresoles are 
more powerful and effective disinfectant than carbolic acid. 
The most common of this group are: creoline, lysol, and saprol. 
Their use is about the same as that of carbolic acid. Bichloride 
of mercury may be used in a solution of from one to two thou¬ 
sand, to one to five hundred and forms a very good disin¬ 
fectant. It kills germs but corrosive sublimate will kill spore¬ 
bearing bacteria only in a solution of one to five hundred. In 
weaker solutions it forms a very good antiseptic. Lime forms 
a very good disinfectant, especially for excreta, cesspools and 
cellars. 


























> 

































































































. 


























































































































































CHAPTER XIV 

HYGIENE AND SANITATION IN THE 
SICK ROOM 


HYGIENE AND SANITATION IN THE 

SICK ROOM 

Factors in Normal Expression of Life 

UNHINDERED TRANSMISSION 
NORMAL METABOLISM 
PROPER NUTRITION 
PROPER DIGESTION 

Importance of Environment 

INFLUENCE OF CHANGE 
NECESSITY FOR ADAPTATION 

Function of Educated Mind 
Need for Conserving Energy 

TEMPERATURE OF SICK ROOM 

VENTILATION 

LIGHTING 

FURNITURE AND HANGINGS 
BED AND BEDDING 
DISPOSAL OF EXCRETA 

Hygienic Measures in So-called Communicable Diseases 

QUARANTINE 

DISINFECTION OF STOOLS, URINE AND SPUTUM, LINENS 

Chiropractic Cause of So-called Communicable Diseases 

INTERFERENCE WITH TRANSMISSION 
EXPLANATION OF PRESENCE OF GERMS 
NO COMPLICATIONS UNDER ADJUSTMENTS 


216 


CHAPTER XIV 


HYGIENE AND SANITATION IN THE 
SICK ROOM 

Factors in Normal Expression of Life 

In case of incoordination in the body there are always 
existing conditions which require educated adaptation. It is 
the study of these conditions to which the sickroom hygiene 
and sanitation must be directed. 

We will first consider the environment necessary for the 
normal expression of life in the body. Unhindered transmis¬ 
sion of mental impulses alone will not give us the processes 
of metabolism. To have normal metabolism in the body 
oxygen must be carried to the tissue cells and there must be 
an uninterrupted transmission of mental impulses. Nutrition 
is derived from the food taken into the body and oxygen from 
the air is breathed into the lungs. The mental impulses are 
transformed in the brain by Innate Intelligence and trans¬ 
mitted by efferent nerves; hence the necessity for a proper 
amount of food, a sufficient supply of pure air and unhindered 
transmission. But the nutrient elements contained in the food 
are not in a state to be utilized by the tissue cells when taken 
into the body; therefore it is necessary that the food be broken 
up by the process of digestion that it will be rendered usable 
by the tissue cells. 

This process of digestion requires a great expenditure of 
internal energy or, in other words, a functional activity of the 
mental impulses. Thus it is seen that the body as a machine 
must be supplied with the material necessary to keep it in 
repair and running order, and that this material is taken in 
and prepared within the body for bodily use. 

Not only must provision be made for supplying the body 

217 


218 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


with the proper amount of food, but attention must be given 
to a proper supply of oxygen for the lungs. This seems a 
very simple thing to do, and it is simple under natural con¬ 
ditions, but when we consider the unnatural conditions that 
have been created by man and under which the human race 
in civilized countries is living, it becomes a problem that re¬ 
quires great engineering skill. The ventilation of great build¬ 
ings, streets and subways is no small problem and yet if the 
processes of metabolism are to be maintained in the body 
ventilation must be given attention. 

Importance of Environment 

If these internal processes are to be maintained there must 
also be a certain environmental condition which will enable 
Innate Intelligence to bring them about. The temperature, 
humidity, and atmospheric pressure are all important in their 
proper relationship. Innate Intelligence is capable of adapt¬ 
ing the body to extremes in these different environmental con¬ 
ditions, but the transition from one degree to another, such as 
temperature, must take place gradually to allow sufficient time 
for the adaptative changes. 

It will be observed that these changes take place more or 
less gradually in Nature, but man is inclined to pass from one 
extreme into another without thought of time needed for 
adaptation. For example he passes from a highly heated room 
into one with a very low temperature, or comes from com¬ 
pressed air chambers, where the air pressure is greater than 
the normal, into the normal atmospheric pressure without 
sufficient precaution to the sudden change. These sudden 
changes not only draw very heavily upon the adaptative forces 
of the body, but actually interfere with the normal functional 
activity of Innate Intelligence and produce subluxations. The 
more natural the environment, the less energy will be required 
to bring about adaptation and maintain the equilibrium of the 
functions. Even though the environment is perfect, there must 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


219 


be a current of mental impulses sufficient to produce adaptative 
action. When there is an interference with the transmission 
of mental impulses to such an extent that this adaptation can 
not take place there will be lack of function. 

An environmental condition that will require as little 
adaptative energy as possible should be maintained. There 
should, therefore, be some attention given to the sick room, 
not that the hygienic and sanitary measures will in any sense 
cure the dis-ease, but that the forces in the body may not be 
used up and dissipated because of an environment that re¬ 
quires an abundance of force for adaptation. 

The patient’s weakness in many incoordinations is purely 
adaptative on the part of Innate Intelligence to prevent the 
patient from continuing at work or doing other things that 
would require an expenditure of the adaptative energies of 
the body. In other words, it is for the purpose of con¬ 
serving the energies that are needed in the reparatory and 
restorative processes necessary to bring about coordination. 

For the above reason it is necessary to give attention to 
the sick room in maintaining a condition to which Innate may 
easily bring about intellectual adaptation and not draw upon 
the reserve carrying capacity of the nerves. 

Function of the Educated Mind 

The expression of Innate Intelligence through the educated 
brain has functions to perform that are quite as essential and 
important in their way as are the functions produced by the 
expression of Innate Intelligence through the innate brain. 
Here is an illustration of what is meant: Innate Intelligence 
sends mental impulses to the liver and produces bile indepen¬ 
dent of educated brain. But if a man is walking across the 
street and falls to the ground unconscious he will be mutilated 
by traffic unless some one picks him up and protects him. 
Innate is still in the body of the unconscious man, but is not 
being expressed through the educated brain. The Innate is 


220 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


powerless to protect that body from harm—it requires the 
expression of an Innate Intelligence through the educated 
brain of some other person to bring about an adaptation to 
circumstances and protect the unconscious man. In this 
case the educated mind of one individual is substituted for 
that of the other and the desired end is accomplished. This 
educated function could not be expressed in the unconscious 
man because of the inability of Innate Intelligence to be func¬ 
tioning through the educated brain. 

The functions of the educated mind as pertaining to the 
expression of life in the body have to do mostly with the 
environment. It is, therefore, within the scope of Chiropractic 
to study the environmental conditions in order that the best 
interests of Innate Intelligence in the expression of life in the 
body be protected. 

Need for Conserving Energy 

Reference has already been made to the fact that adapta¬ 
tion to environment requires an expenditure of energy in case 
of incoordination. When an individual is sick there is need 
for conservation of energy to the fullest degree. At this time 
there must be no unnecessary drain upon the body in order 
that all forces may be centered upon the one thing-—restora¬ 
tion. This leads us to a consideration of removing every 
unnecessary demand upon Innate for expenditure of energy 
so that all the forces may be utilized in the process of restora¬ 
tion. 

There are a number of points to be considered in the care 
of the sick room where the patient is confined to his bed. 
There should be an even temperature maintained at all times 
and great care taken that the room is never overheated. The 
degrees at which temperature is to be maintained will be 
governed somewhat by the character of the incoordination. In 
conditions involving the respiratory tract the room may be 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


221 


kept quite cold. The temperature of the sick room may vary 
from 50° F. to 70° F. according to the incoordination. 

One of the most important features in the sick room is 
proper ventilation and the elimination of dust and odors. The 
patient at all times should be provided with an abundant 
supply of pure air free from dust and other impurities. The 
room should be so ventilated as to eliminate objectionable 
drafts. This may be accomplished by placing screens in front 
of open windows or stretching a gauze over the opening in 
the window which will admit the air but not rapid enough 
to produce a draft. 



In some cases of incoordinations involving the eyes it is 
advisable to maintain a subdued light in the room. This may 
be obtained during the day by drawing the shade part way 
down and during the night by placing shades over the lamps 
or electric lights. If the eyes are very sensitive to light an 
unnecessary adaptation may thus be avoided, thus enabling 
Innate to use her forces in a more desirable way. 

In severe cases some attention should be given to the fur¬ 
niture and hangings, not so much because of any special 
benefit to the patient, but for the convenience of the attendants 
and to insure a better sanitary condition by eliminating every- 





















222 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


thing that would tend to catch dust and dirt and matter given 
off into the breathing zone. 

The bed and bedding should be kept clean and fresh. The 
patient should be placed between sheets and not between 
blankets even in the winter time. The top cover on the bed 
should be white or of a light color. All soiled linen should 
be removed immediately and the pillows should be kept well 
aired. If the patient is weak, or for other reasons must be 
handled by attendants, a draw sheet will be a great con¬ 
venience ; a sheet may be folded about three times for this 



purpose and placed under the patient’s hips on top of the 
bed sheet. This may be used to turn the patient, move the 
patient from one side of the bed to the other, or it may be 
found of service in placing him on the adjusting bench. This 
draw sheet may be left under the patient without discomfort. 
At all times care should be exercised that the sheet, draw sheet 
and covers are kept free from wrinkles. The bed clothes 
should be changed in such a way as to disturb the patient 
as little as possible. One-half of the bed should be changed 
at a time and the patient moved over on the clean sheet with 
























CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


223 


the aid of the draw sheet. It is not expected that the chiro¬ 
practor will find it necessary to do all these things himself; 
indeed, if the patient is ill enough to require this kind of care 
there should be a* nurse on the case. However, even though 
he is not going to do these things himself, he certainly ought 
to know how they should be done. 

If the patient is forced to use a bed pan, great care should 
be exercised that the bed clothes and clothing of the patient 
are not soiled. If they are they should be immediately changed 



or at least as soon as practicable. The disposal of the excreta 
is of vital importance. It should be removed from the sick 
room immediately. From a hygienic standpoint the fecal 
matter, urine and sputum should be disinfected with a 10% 
solution of formalin and allowed to stand for an hour, or by 
adding bichloride to make a solution of one to one thousand. 
The fecal matter should be placed in a receptacle and enough 
hot water added to cover it, then a cup of unslacked lime added 
and this allowed to stand covered for a couple of hours before 
throwing into the sewer. 

The patient confined to the bed should receive proper care. 






















224 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


His hands and face should be bathed and he should be given 
a sponge bath. This may be done without disturbing the 
patient materially and may add greatly to his comfort. If 
the incoordination is in the fever family there will be no 
danger of the patient taking cold, but if it is not a febrile 
dis-ease, great care must be taken to prevent this complica¬ 
tion. Everything possible should be done to add to the comfort 



of the patient and to create a pleasant and cheerful atmosphere 
about the sick room. 

Hygienic Measures Used in So-called Communicable 
Dis-eases 

In discussing hygienic measures to be used in so-called 
communicable dis-eases, it must be understood that these 
measures are in no sense considered to be curative. If sub¬ 
luxations were adjusted as soon as produced there would be 
no occasion for such considerations, for man would remain 
immune and there would be no communicable dis-eases. Since 




















CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


225 


subluxations are not always adjusted as soon as produced, 
but remain and become chronic and dis-ease is allowed to 
gather great momentum before adjustments are given, it be¬ 
comes necessary to bring about an adaptation educationally 
to the incoordination. During the course of the dis-ease cer¬ 
tain hygienic measures should be used in order to maintain 
a proper environmental condition. 



The so-called communicable dis-eases are quarantinable 
and should be reported to the proper health authorities in 
the states requiring such procedure, in compliance with the 
law. There are certain sanitary and hygienic measures that 
should be used from a standpoint of pure cleanliness and com¬ 
mon decency. The hygienic measures ordinarily recommended 
may be summed up as follows: The stools, urine, sputum and 
other excretions should be- thoroughly disinfected. The urine 
may be disinfected by adding bichloride to make a solution 
of one to one thousand or by adding 10% formalin and allow¬ 
ing the solution to stand for an hour or so. It is more difficult 
to disinfect fecal matter. The masses should be thoroughly 
broken up and disinfected with bleaching powder, 3%. A 5% 























226 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


solution of carbolic acid may be used or formalin 10%. An¬ 
other easy and effective way is to add enough hot water to 
cover the entire stool and then add a cup of unslacked lime 
or about one-fourth as much lime as bulk. The receptacle 
should then be covered and allow to stand for a couple of 
hours. In this way there will be enough heat generated by 
the lime to destroy the microorganisms. The sputum should 
be burned. 

It is recommended that the bed linen, towels and handker¬ 
chiefs used by the patient be disinfected by immersing for at 
least an hour in a solution of bichloride of mercury, one to one 
thousand, a 5% solution of carbolic acid, or 10% solution of 
formalin. 

Chiropractic Cause of So-called Communicable 
Dis-eases 

Chiropractically the cause of the so-called communicable 
dis-eases is interference with the transmission of mental im¬ 
pulses, which results in lack of function. Where there is an 
interference with the functions resulting in abnormal meta¬ 
bolism there is always an accumulation of waste products and 
poisons. The accumulation of the waste products and the 
correspondingly lowered resistance in these structures provide 
a fertile field for the growth and development of the bacteria 
that are found in the particular incoordination. These germs 
are present as scavengers for the sole purpose of consuming 
the waste material and these bacteria will disappear as soon 
as the subluxated vertebrae are adjusted and the tissues become 
normal, for they can not live on normal tissue and will be 
excreted as waste. However, if there are subluxations which 
interfere with the transmission of mental impulses resulting 
in lack of functions in the body and microorganisms are 
allowed to enter the body, the abnormal tissues will furnish 
them with food and a proper culture medium in which to 
develop. From a chiropractic standpoint the best prophylaxis 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


227 


is adjustments to restore transmission to normal and the germs 
will find no food or fertile field in which to develop and will 
be excreted as so much material that can not be used in the 
metabolism of the body. 

Under chiropractic adjustments the incoordination (so- 
called contagious dis-ease) will not run its full course; as a 
matter of fact, the recovery may be so rapid that the patient 
will be sick only a very few days. Under adjustments there 
will be no complications or sequelae and for this reason there 
is not the necessity for hygienic measures to the same extent 
as under ordinary treatment, but during the time the patient 
is sick hygienic measures should be observed. 


15 













' 








































* 





























































- 













































































CHAPTER XV 

FOOD 


FOOD 

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 

Necessity for Food 

DEFINITION OF FOOD 
TRANSFORMATION INTO BODY TISSUE 

Distinction between Appetite and Hunger 

APPETITE DIRECTED BY EDUCATION 
HUNGER DIRECTED BY INNATE 
OVEREATING 

SYMPTOMS OF OVEREATING 

Starvation 

DEFINITION 

SENSATION OF HUNGER 

Inanition 

DEFINITION 

MALNUTRITION 

Balanced Rations 

IMPORTANCE OF 
CONTENTS OF 

CLASSIFICATION OF FOODS 

Sources of Food 

ANIMAL 

PLANT 

MINERAL 

Chemical Composition 

NITROGENOUS 

NON-NITROGENOUS 

Physical Properties 
Function of Foods 
proteins 

CARBOHYDRATES 

FATS 

CONDIMENTS 
INORGANIC SALTS 
VITAMINS 


230 


CHAPTER XV 


FOOD 

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 

Necessity for Food 

Food is defined as nutritive material absorbed or taken 
into the body of an organism for purposes of growth or repair 
and for the maintenance of the vital processes. Food is de¬ 
rived from two sources—the animal kingdom and the vegetable 
kingdom. 

The body is composed of materials which are constantly 
wearing out under the processes carried on in the functioning 
of the body, and this tissue must be replaced with new mate¬ 
rial. This is supplied in the form of food that is taken into 
the system and acted upon by the secretions in such a way 
as to break up and properly combine the chemicals so that 
Innate Intelligence may bring about an assimilation in the 
tissue cells. 

The variety of articles that Innate can use as food in 
the body is varied. It is not necessary to have a perfect 
food or a perfectly rationed diet in order for Innate to main¬ 
tain the anabolism of the body. The ease with which the 
processes of digestion are carried on depends upon the free¬ 
dom with which mental impulses are transmitted to the organs 
of digestion. 

As there is a constant flow of mental impulses through the 
nerves and a constant expression in the tissue cells so there is 
a corresponding change taking place in the tissues of the body. 
To this change there must be a constant adaptation so that 
new tissue will be provided to replace that which is worn out. 
To accomplish this there must be a proper supply of nutrition 
at properly stated intervals. 


231 


232 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


It is not the purpose of chiropractic hygiene to say what 
a person should or should not eat. Innate Intelligence is the 
best judge as to that. Chiropractic philosophy teaches that 
a person may eat anything that does not disagree with him; 
or to put it otherwise, a person should eat what agrees with 
him. It also teaches us that pain and discomfort from eating 
that which does not digest is Innate telling the educated mind 
that this particular article is not being digested and that he 
should not eat it. This lack of digestion is not the fault of 
the food, but is due to an interference with transmission which 
prevents Innate from bringing about an adaptation to this 
food. In other words, the interference with transmission pre¬ 
vents Innate from producing the secretion that is needed in 
the digestion of this particular article or diet. 

Distinction between Appetite and Hunger 

It is quite necessary that we make a distinction between 
appetite and hunger. Hunger is Innate calling for food. It is 
the expression through the educated brain of the vibratory 
interpretations which are received from the tissue cells that 
are in need of nutrition. These vibrations are interpreted by 
Innate Intelligence and Innate becomes aware of the need 
of the tissue cell. Thereupon she expresses this interpreta¬ 
tion through the educated brain and we become aware, educa¬ 
tionally, of this condition which is interpreted as hunger. 

Hunger is an Innate interpretation while appetite is an 
educated interpretation. Hunger is a desire for food while 
appetite is a desire for a certain kind of food. The appetite 
decides what kind of food we will eat to satisfy the hunger. 
Appetite may be perverted. 

When there is a condition which interferes with the process 
of digestion Innate Intelligence takes away the desire for 
food. When this is true there should be no effort on the part 
of the educated man to tempt the appetite. If the appetite 
is tempted in such a case, the food will not be properly 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


233 


digested, or if it is, it will be necessary for Innate to employ 
force that should be used for some other purpose. 

If the processes of digestion are normal the individual may 
eat any article of food and it will be properly digested and he 
will not be conscious of this process. But if the process of 
digestion is abnormal he may not be able to digest even the 
most scientific diet. The severity of the indigestion will de¬ 
pend upon the degree of interference with function. In such 
event appetite is not reliable because it may call for some¬ 
thing that can not be digested. Innate knows nothing of the 
different foods. She calls for nutrition, but the educated mind 
says beefsteak and eggs. Now if we become sick after eating 
beefsteak and eggs this is Innate trying to let us know that 
the food is not being digested and should not be taken into 
the stomach. 

On the other hand we may find that Innate will revolt 
when we try to eat food which can not be digested. Innate 
will cause us to lose our desire to eat such food, the very 
thoughts of it being repulsive. 

Chiropractic philosophy maintains that a patient should 
eat anything that agrees with him and that Innate is the best 
judge. A food is anything that can be used in the metabolism 
of the body. A poison is anything that can not be used in the 
metabolism of the body and if allowed to remain in the body 
will injure the tissues. That which is food for one may there¬ 
fore be poison for another. 

If there was no interference with the transmission pre¬ 
venting the normal expression of Innate Intelligence through 
the educated brain, we would eat only those things which 
could be digested. It might be said that Innate is a great 
dietitian and one that would never make a mistake if there 
could always be a perfect expression. The trouble is that we 
substitute educated for Innate and therefore make mistakes 
and eat those things which can not be digested because of 
interference with transmission of mental impulses. 


234 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


The amount of food and the kind required by man will be 
governed largely by the character of the work he does. The 
state of health, the climate and season, occupation, clothing, 
exercise, body weight, sex and age all have an influence on 
the quantity of food required to maintain bodily health. 

The appetite could be relied upon to determine just the 
quantity and quality of our diet were it not for the fact that, 
in this day of civilization when cooking is a fine art and the 
appetite is so stimulated, we eat beyond the normal re¬ 
quirements of the body. As a result the stomach is over¬ 
loaded with food that is not required for the normal health 
and vigor of the individual. The digestive organs are over¬ 
worked. There is an engorgment of the liver, and degenerative 
changes, such as fatty heart, take place. 

The symptoms of overeating are: headache, feeling of 
lassitude, drowsiness, mental stupor, the liver becomes con¬ 
gested, the intestines are engorged, the secretions of the body 
are altered in their composition, the urine is heavily loaded 
with salts, there is constipation, maybe biliousness, and the 
tongue is heavily coated. There may also be obesity and gout. 

Starvation 

Food must be taken into the body in sufficient quantity 
and quality so that bodily function may be maintained. The 
term starvation is a technical one meaning a lack of sufficient 
food, although it is used loosely to mean a condition resulting 
from lack of assimilation. After the food in the stomach has 
been completely digested and the process of assimilation has 
reached a certain stage, vibrations are carried from the tissue 
cells to the brain. These enable the intelligence to know in 
what stage of assimilation the food is, and these vibrations 
are interpreted as hunger, the sensation being localized in the 
stomach. In the normal individual this sensation will appear 
soon enough to enable the introduction of food into the 
stomach so that its digestion may be completed before any 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


235 


injury from lack of nutrition occurs to the tissues. In other 
words, a provision has been made whereby food will be called 
for in sufficient time to enable Innate Intelligence to prepare 
this food for the tissue cells, so that there will be a new supply 
as soon as the process of assimilation has been completed. 
If food is not taken into the stomach when the sensation of 
hunger is manifested this sensation in the course of time will 
result in extreme bodily weakness and faintness. In certain 
incoordinations sensations may be produced which will be 
interpreted by the educated mind as hunger. Therefore, it is 
necessary to make a distinction between the sensations of 
hunger and the sensations from incoordinations of the stomach. 
In a dyspeptic condition there is an almost constant sensation 
of hunger, and the individual may eat much more food than 
can be digested. Very often, in these cases, the food is taken 
into the stomach so rapidly that there is not sufficient time 
for the gastric secretions to act upon it. In this way much 
more food may be taken into the stomach than is actually 
required by the tissue cells. It is obvious that we must have 
a proper amount of food in balanced rations, and also that 
this food be properly digested in order to be assimilated by 
the tissues. If food is not properly digested it can not be 
assimilated. 

Inanition 

There may be a condition obtained in the body resulting 
from a lack of assimilation of food by the tissues, even though 
there is a sufficient amount of food taken into the body. This 
condition is known technically as inanition. Death will result 
in a short time when food is completely withheld whether the 
condition is that of starvation or inanition. There may be an 
interference with transmission of mental impulses to the diges¬ 
tive organs. This will interfere with digestion, and inanition 
will result because the food which is not properly digested 
can not be assimilated even though the tissue cells are per- 


236 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


fectly normal. Inanition may also result from an interference 
with transmission, which prevents the tissue cells from per¬ 
forming their normal function in the process of assimilation. 
In this way the tissues starve for the want of food, not because 
there is a lack of nutrition in the body, but because the food 
taken into the system has not been properly broken down by 
the digestive secretions, or if it has been properly digested 
it has not been assimilated. It is a recognized fact that a large 
percentage of growing children are underweight. Authors 
differ as to the percentage. It ranges all the way from 15% 
to 60%. This condition is not necessarily caused by an in¬ 
sufficient amount of proper food, for the condition has been 
found more prevalent among the children of the wealthy 
than among those of the poorer classes. This shows that the 
cause for such malnutrition is within the child and not in the 
food that he is eating. In the large majority of cases it is 
either because the food is not being properly digested or is not 
being assimilated after it has been digested. It is quite neces¬ 
sary that there be a properly balanced diet, but even a per¬ 
fectly balanced diet will not guarantee perfect assimilation. 
This can be accomplished only through unhindered transmis¬ 
sion and expression of mental impulses in all parts of the 
body. 

Balanced Rations 

Properly balanced rations will enable Innate Intelligence 
to promote the growth and maintain the processes of the 
body with the greatest ease and the least necessity for the 
adaptative expenditure of internal energy. Much attention 
has been given the science of nutrition. At one time there 
was great importance attached to the chemical composition of 
foods, special attention being given to the proteins, carbo¬ 
hydrates and fats contained in the diet. Later it was thought 
that certain inorganic salts were necessary. Great stress has 
been placed upon the caloric value of food. The latest students 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


237 


in the science of nutrition have emphasized the value of 
vitamins. 

A properly balanced diet should contain sufficient calories 
and inorganic salts, especially iron, phosphorus, calcium and 
iodin. There should be a sufficient variety of foods to pro¬ 
vide the necessary vitamins. It is also thought that a certain 
amount of roughage is necessary. If we expect the best results 
from our digestive tract we should strive to keep the balance 
approximately the same each day. This is not because Innate 
Intelligence is unable to adapt the body to a great variety of 
food, but it is more to prevent a necessity for such extreme 
adaptation. To illustrate: If we constantly introduce too 
much acid into the stomach, it necessitates an adaptative action 
on the part of Innate Intelligence in the production of an 
alkali to neutralize the acid. Since we know so little educa¬ 
tionally about nutrition, it is wise for us to eat as great a 
variety of foods as possible, and especially is this necessary 
in providing a balanced ration for growing children. 

In considering food we must not forget the importance 
of proper digestion and assimilation. In Chiropractic the diet 
is of little importance, providing the functional activities of 
the body are maintained at normality. 

CLASSIFICATION OF FOODS 

Sources of Food 

Foods are classified according to source, chemical composi¬ 
tion, physical properties and function. 

In classifying food as to its source we have three classifica¬ 
tions: animal, plant and mineral. Meat, fowl, fish, shell-fish, 
eggs, milk and its products, animal fat and gelatin help to 
constitute the animal foods. Seeds, roots, leaves, cereals, 
vegetables, fruits, sugar and vegetable oils are plant foods. 
From the mineral there are: iron, potassium, phosphorus, 
iodin, sulphur. These are obtained from the animal and plant 


238 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


foods. Water is not classed as a food, but it enters into the 
diet as a very important constituent. 

Chemical Composition 

From the standpoint of chemical composition foods are 
grouped into two classes, nitrogenous and non-nitrogenous. 
Both the animal and vegetable kingdom contribute foods to 
each of these classes, although the animal substances belong 
more to the nitrogenous, while the vegetable kingdom belongs 
more particularly to the non-nitrogenous foods. The nitro¬ 
genous foods consist chiefly of carbon, oxygen, hydrogen and 
nitrogen and are considered to be essentially tissue builders. 
Hygienists speak of the non-nitrogenous foods as being force 
producers, asserting that these foods supply energy for mus¬ 
cular action. 

Physical Properties 

Under this heading foods are classified as: (a) solids, semi¬ 
solids and liquid foods; (b) fibrous, gelatinous, starchy, olea¬ 
ginous, crystalline and albuminous foods. The indigestible 
residue is called roughage. 

Function 

Foods are classified as: Proteins, carbohydrates, fats, con¬ 
diments, inorganic salts and vitamins. 

Proteins are .the tissue builders of the body. They are 
derived from meat, milk, eggs, peas and beans for example. 
Some foods are much richer in protein than others, and there 
is also a difference in the quality of the protein. Some protein 
is more valuable from the standpoint of food than others. 
Casein is very rich in protein which is of great food value. 
The protein found in meat is also of good quality, but it is 
not as valuable as that found in milk. Such cellular organs as 
the liver and pancreas furnish a good source of protein. There 
is a very small amount of protein of excellent quality found 
in leafy plants. There is a difference of opinion among authors 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


239 


as to the amount of protein needed per day by healthy in¬ 
dividuals. Some advise a very small amount of protein while 
others recommend a diet containing as much as 125 grams, 
approximately four and one-half ounces, per day. 

The carbohydrates furnish the body with the necessary 
material for forming adipose tissue and heat through oxida¬ 
tion. It is very essential that the body be provided with suffi¬ 
cient starches. This is evidenced by the fact that starch 
constituents are so universally found in food from whatever 
source taken. For example, carbohydrates or starchy foods 
are found in cereals, tubers, such as potatoes, and sugars of 
cane, beets and fruits, and glycogen in flesh. 

Fats come from animal and vegetable sources and are rep¬ 
resented by butter, fats of meat, olive oil, cottonseed oil, 
nuts and seeds. Oily substances are found in practically all 
vegetables. A vitamin known as fat soluble A is found 
in certain fats, but not in others. It is found in the fat of 
milk and usually in other fats of animal origin; and also in 
eggs and in leafy plants. Lard and oil of plant origin furnish 
very little of this vitamin. It can readily be seen by this that 
all fats do not have the same food value. 

The condiments are the spices such as pepper, mustard, 
cloves, coffee, tea and alcoholic beverages. 

Inorganic salts are not ordinarily classed as a food. How¬ 
ever, it is essential in the maintaining of life. It performs a 
very important function in the building of bone and assists 
also in digestion and metabolism. The vegetable acids, such 
as tartaric from grapes, lemon and citric, will be found in com¬ 
bination with the bases calcium, sodium and potassium, for 
example, especially when they are taken from fresh vegetables 
and fruits. When absorbed they form carbonates and are 
therefore indispensable in the process of metabolism, since 
they aid in maintaining the alkalinity of the body. If the food 
of the growing infant is deficient in calcium phosphate, or if 
there is an interference with transmission which hinders the 


240 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


activity of calcium phosphate in the body, the bones of the 
child will be poorly developed and will become abnormally 
soft. In this case they yield under the weight of the body 
and become deformed. A good illustration of this is seen in 
rickets. 

Milk forms an excellent source of calcium in large quan¬ 
tities and in a utilizable form. The fact that milk is deficient 
in iron must be taken into consideration when it is used as 
a sole article of diet for growing children. 

Vitamin is the name given to a chemical substance found 
in yeast and in rice polishings. It was so named by Dr. Casi- 
mir Funk, a Russian chemist, in 1913. The chemical nature 
of the vitamin is unknown, but it has been proven that it 
possesses great growth-producing qualities, a small amount 
producing great results. Only three vitamins have been recog¬ 
nized. One is soluble in fat and has been called fat soluble 
A, the other two are soluble in water and are known as water 
soluble B and water soluble C. 

Fat soluble A is found in the leaves of plants, spinach, 
carrots, peas, peanuts, but more abundantly in eggs, butter 
and milk; it is also present in such glandular organs as the 
liver and kidneys. Cod liver oil is found to contain this 
vitamin. It is found to be almost, if not entirely, missing 
from lard and the fats of vegetable origin; sugar from cane, 
milk and beets, bolted flour,'starch and glucose and polished 
rice are entirely devoid of this vitamin, while the rice polish¬ 
ings are exceedingly rich in fat soluble A. 

Experiments have been made upon rats and dogs which 
show that if they are fed upon a diet devoid of this vitamin 
they develop a condition similar to rickets. Their eyes become 
inflamed and dry and eventually blindness results. 

The vitamin known as water soluble B is probably the 
most widely distributed of the vitamins. It is obtained in 
tubers, seeds, leaves of plants and in animals, but not in the 
oils or fats of either vegetable or animal origin. This vitamin 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


241 


promotes growth. The prolonged absence of it induces beri¬ 
beri. Water soluble B is not destroyed by boiling the foods 
in which it is found. This vitamin is found in yeast, navy 
and soy beans, milk, parsnips, potatoes, spinach, whole grain, 
rice, maize, carrots, onions, oats, cauliflower, celery, rutabagas 
and whole wheat bread. This vitamin is present in very small 
quantities in such foods as cabbage, tomatoes, peas, eggs and 
wheat bran. All ordinary foods contain this vitamin. Water 
soluble B is known as the antineurotic vitamin. 

The water soluble C vitamin is known as the antiscorbutic 
vitamin. In experimentations it has been found that animals 
entirely deprived of this vitamin have developed scurvy. The 
condition disappeared when the vitamin was included in the 
diet. 

The experiments by which it has been hoped to associate 
many dis-eases with vitamins have not proven satisfactory, 
and while it is a recognized fact that they play an important 
part in the bodily metabolism yet dis-ease can not be corrected 
by a scientific endeavor to supply the needed vitamins through 
diet. 

Water soluble C is found in such foods as: apples, cab¬ 
bage, tomatoes, spinach, peas, onions, lettuce, oranges, pota¬ 
toes and milk. 


■ 













CHAPTER XVI 
FOOD POISONS 


FOOD POISONS 


Source 

FORMATION PERIOD 
SYMPTOMS 

Food Infection 

INCUBATION PERIOD 
SYMPTOMS 
MORTALITY RATE 

Food Intoxication 

botulism 

SOURCE 

PERIOD OF INCUBATION 
SYMPTOMS 
MORTALITY RATE 

Adulteration of Food 

MEANS OF 

MOST COMMON ADULTERATIONS 


244 


CHAPTER XVI 

FOOD POISONS 

Sources 

In most instances such poisoning comes from food that is 
preserved in some way. Very seldom do we find this poison¬ 
ing in fresh foods. Such prepared foods as chopped meats, 
sausage, meat pies and salads, for example furnish the best 
sources for this poisoning. The formation period of the poison 
usually covers from eight to twenty-eight hours. There are 
two classes of food poisoning: first, food infection; second, 
food intoxication. Clinically, there is a great difference be¬ 
tween them. Food infection is an acute condition in which 
there is nausea, vomiting, cramps, diarrhoea and fever. Food 
intoxication is a febrile condition characterized by nervous 
symptoms, paralysis and constipation. 

In food infection the mortality is seldom above 1%, while 
in food intoxication it runs from 50% upward. The condition 
resulting from food intoxication is known as botulism. The 
statistics which are available on food poisoning would indicate 
that it is not very prevalent and the number of persons in¬ 
volved in outbreaks is comparatively small. 

Many conditions in which there are gastro-intestinal symp¬ 
toms might be mistaken for food poisoning. Such symptoms 
as nausea, cramps, vomiting or diarrhoea may be due to acute 
gastric indigestion, and may not be in any way associated 
with food poisoning. 

Foods containing such poison should be thoroughly cooked 
so that the heat may penetrate to the very center. A tem¬ 
perature of 70° C. is sufficient to render the food free of 
the poison. 


245 


246 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


Food Infection 

The incubation period of food infection is usually from 
six to twelve hours from the time the food is taken into the 
stomach until the manifestation of symptoms. This period 
may in some cases be reduced to only four hours, while in 
others it may be extended to seventy-two or more hours. This 
class of food poisoning is sometimes called meat poisoning 
from the fact that meat forms its chief vehicle, but milk and 
milk products and even vegetables may contain it. 

The symptoms are characterized by acute gastro-intestinal 
disturbances. The onset is usually sudden. The first to appear 
are severe griping pains in the abdominal region, there may 
be various nervous manifestations, such as drowsiness, mus¬ 
cular twitchings and more or less restlessness. The abdominal 
pains may be accompanied with diarrhoea, nausea and vomit¬ 
ing. There may be chills and headache. As the condition 
progresses the stools become a greenish color and of a very 
watery consistency. There may be chills and headaches, 
marked muscular weakness, faintness and possibly prostration. 
The temperature runs from 102° F. to 103° F. There is exces¬ 
sive thirst, skin eruptions and herpes. There is often oliguria. 
The severity of the symptoms will depend upon the amount 
of poison taken into the system and the freedom of transmis¬ 
sion of mental impulses, which will enable Innate Intelligence 
to bring about her adaptative processes. Usually the attack 
lasts only a few days, although the fulminating cases may 
prove fatal within twenty-four hours. Warm weather seems 
to be conducive to the formation of this poison, since the 
greater number of outbreaks occur in the summer time. 

Food Intoxication 

This form of food poisoning is called botulism. The poison 
which forms is the specific toxin produced by the activity of 
the bacillus botulinus. The botulis itself lives on decayed 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


247 


organic matter, therefore it is of the saprophyte type. This 
poison is found in a great many different foods of both plant 
and animal origin. The intoxication in botulism affects the 
central nervous system. It is a febrile condition and there 
are no gastro-intestinal disturbances. Usually the symptoms 
in botulism will appear from eighteen to thirty-six hours after 
the poison has been taken into the stomach. There are cases 
on record in which the symptoms have appeared within four 
hours. The period of incubation depends upon the amount 
of toxin ingested and the ability of Innate Intelligence to 
adapt the body to the poison. 

The symptoms usually begin with headache and dizziness, 
feeling of fatigue and muscular weakness. One of the early 
symptoms is a disturbance of vision which may progress until 
the patient is blind. Both the extrinsic and intrinsic muscles 
of the eye become involved. There is blepharoptosis and the 
pupils become dilated. There is diplopia and the loss of 
adaptative response of the eye to the light. There is soon 
complete loss of accommodation, opthalmoplegia, nystagmus, 
strabismus and in some cases photophobia. 

Concurrent with the beginning of the disturbances of vision 
there is difficulty in swallowing and talking, with a feeling 
of throat contraction. There may be frequent attacks of 
strangling, with extreme dryness of the mouth and throat, 
which result in a cough. Stubborn constipation results from 
lack of peristalsis. Beginning in the intestines and passing 
gradually upward there is progressive, ascending paralysis. 
The lack of proper nervous tone is evidenced by fatigue, 
drowsiness, headache and unsteadiness in walking which may 
result in a steppage gait, there is great muscular weakness 
and incontinence of urine. Other prominent symptoms are an 
insufficient secretion of saliva, sweat and tears and a deficiency 
in the excretion of urine. This results in a typical “dry man” 
condition. Later in the course of the disease the temperature 
is subnormal and the pulse rapid. There may be paralysis of 


248 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


the laryngeal and pharyngeal muscles, which results in an 
inability to swallow. There may be complete aphonia. The 
case is very likely to develop broncho-pneumonia, in which 
event there will be temperature. The facial expression is that 
of great anxiety and utter helplessness. The sensation of 
strangling becomes more frequent and there is a struggle for 
breath, death eventually resulting. The duration of this dis¬ 
ease varies greatly. Death may result in forty-eight hours 
after the poison has been ingested. Seldom will a condition 
run more than eight days. In cases that recover, convalescence 
is very slow. The patient may be many months recovering. 
The prognosis in botulism is considered very unfavorable, the 
mortality being as high as 100% in some outbreaks. The 
lowest mortality, according to statistics, is 37.5%. 

Microscopic examination of the bodies which are the vic¬ 
tims of botulism has revealed a great congestion of the central 
nervous system and also of the abdominal and thoracic viscera. 
Some have shown a great number of hemorrhages at the base 
of the brain and the upper portion of the spinal cord; the 
lungs are also congested. Originally it was supposed that 
food intoxication came only from sausage or other meat, but 
it has later been proven that this poison might develop not 
only in meat but in such food as string beans, cottage cheese, 
corn, asparagus, spinach and ripe olives. It has also been 
found in turkey, chicken and fish. Most cases of botulism 
result from the eating of foods that have received some pre¬ 
servative treatment; seldom will it be caused from the eating 
of fresh foods. Chiropractically this condition is in the poison 
family and would involve S.P. and K.P. as a major. 

Adulteration of Food 

Food adulteration may consist in: 

1— Extraction of nutritive substances. 

2— Addition of substances lowering the quality of the 
food. 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


249 


3— Substituting inferior grades of food. 

4— Fradulent labeling of food. 

5— Changing the appearance of food by coloring or other 
methods which will conceal the inferior quality. 

6— Adding injurious substances for the purpose of pre¬ 
serving the food. 

The Pure Food Act of 1906 makes the following classifica¬ 
tion in a statement of the methods which are considered in 
the adulteration of foods: 

1— “If any substance has been mixed and packed with 

it so as to reduce or lower or injuriously affect its 
quality or strength. 

2— “If any substance has been substituted, wholly or in 

part, for the article. 

3— “If any valuable constituent or article has been, 

wholly or in part, abstracted. 

4— “If it is mixed, colored, powdered, coated or stained 

in any manner whereby damage or inferiority is 
concealed. 

5— “If it contains any poisons or other added deleterious 

ingredient, which may render such articles injurious 
to health. 

6— “If it consists in whole or in part of a filthy, decom¬ 

posed or putrid animal or vegetable substance, or 
any portion of an animal unfit for food, whether 
manufactured or not, or if it is the product of a 
diseased animal or one that has died otherwise than 
by slaughter.” 

Rosenau gives the following as the most common adultera¬ 
tions : 

“Cottonseed oil is sold as olive oil; honey may con¬ 
tain glucose; cocoa and chocolate are frequently mixed 
with both starch and sugar; coffee is extensively adul¬ 
terated with caramel, pea-meal, chickory and saccharose 


250 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


extracts; lard is mixed with cheaper fats or cotton seed 
oil; saccharin is substituted for cane sugar; cereals give 
bulk and weight to sausages; gypsum or bran is added to 
flour; barium sulphate to powdered sugar, flour to tur¬ 
meric or corn-meal to mustard; oleomargarine is sold as 
butter; distilled and colored vinegar is sold as cider 
vinegar; ground spices are adulterated with cocoanut 
shells, rice, flour and ashes; water, sugar and tartaric 
sold as lemonade; wines and liquors are sometimes adul¬ 
terated with alum; baryta, caustic lime, salicylic acid, 
wood alcohol and hematoxylin, terra alba, kaolin, and 
various pigments are sometimes added to candies; gum 
drops are largely made with petroleum paraffin products; 
much of the maple sugar formerly sold was made from 
glucose and coloring matter/’ 

A good illustration of separating the nutritive substances 
is the extraction of cream from milk and certain elements 
from meat. There is really no objection to abstracting nutri¬ 
tive elements from food if afterward that food is properly 
labeled; there is no objection in taking cream out of milk and 
selling the skim milk, providing it is not sold for whole milk. 

An illustration of lowering the quality of the food is the 
addition of water to milk, of bran to flour, of bariumsulphate 
to powdered sugar. 

An illustration of substitution would be to substitute sac¬ 
charine for sugar, oleomargarine for butter, cottonseed oil for 
olive oil. 


CHAPTER XVII 

MILK 


MILK 


COMPOSITION 
Milk as a Food 
Proteins 
casein 

LACTALBUMIN 

LACTOGLOBULIN 

Fat 

CREAM 
SKIM MILK 
BUTTER 

Vitamins 

FAT SOLUBLE A 
WATER SOLUBLE B 
WATER SOLUBLE C 

Lactose or Milk Sugar 

DEFINED 
LACTIC ACID 

SANITARY MEASURES IN PRODUCTION 
Milk, a Germ Medium 
Care in the Milking 
Care of the Cows 
Barns and Barnyards 

FREE FROM MANURE 
GROUND WELL DRAINED 
STABLES PROPERLY VENTILATED 

Bottling 

straining 

IN separate milk house 

Proper Temperature 

NOT ABOVE 50° F. IN transportation 

STERILE MILK 

PREPARATION OF MILK AND MILK PRODUCTS 

Pasteurization of Milk 

DESTROYS SO-CALLED PATHOGENIC GERMS 


252 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


253 


DOES NOT CHANGE DIGESTIBILITY 
FURNISHES PURIFIED MILK 
ARTIFICIAL PRESERVATIVES DANGEROUS 

Condensed Milk 

SOME OF WATER REMOVED 
POOR IN VITAMIN C 

Dry Milk 

IN POWDER FORM 
POOR IN VITAMIN C 
SUBSTITUTED FOR FRESH MILK 

Butter 

CHURNING 

CONSTITUENTS 

OLEOMARGARINE 

Cheese 

process 

NITROGENOUS SUBSTANCES 


V 


CHAPTER XVII 


MILK 

COMPOSITION OF MILK 

Milk as a Food 

Milk contains all the elements necessary in a balanced diet 
for the adult and furnishes an almost perfect food for the 
suckling. Milk is lacking in iron and roughage and is there¬ 
fore not suitable for the sole diet of adults. This is com¬ 
pensated for in the infant by a large amount of iron which is 
contained in the spleen and furnishes this necessary element 
during the suckling period. There is no other single food 
that will so well promote the growth and development in 
young children. Milk is easily digested, is palatable, and 
forms one of our best and most important articles of food. 
It is asserted that the consumption of milk in the United 
States will average about 0.6 of a pint per capita per day. 
In many countries there is practically no milk used. In the 
United States about 16% of the dietary consists of milk and 
its products. 

Milk is an animal secretion produced by the mammary 
gland and is exceedingly complex in its composition. It con¬ 
sists chiefly of water containing various solids in solution. 
Cow’s milk consists of 87% water and 13% solids. The solids 
consist of fats in emulsion, milk sugar, albumin, casein and 
mineral matter. Milk also contains such gases as oxygen, 
nitrogen and carbon dioxide. It contains enzymes, phos- 
phatids and vitamins, also antibodies and other substances. 

Fresh normal milk is an opaque fluid of white or yellowish- 
white color and has a sweetish taste and rather pleasant odor. 
In reaction milk is amphoteric, that is, it is acid to litmus 

254 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


255 


and alkaline to turmeric. The specific gravity of cow’s milk 
is from 1.027 to 1.035. Under the microscope it is found to 
contain fat globules and cells, also bacteria and other objects. 
The oxygen and nitrogen that are found in milk are thought 
to be carried into it mechanically from the air during the 
process of milking. Lecithin, cholestrin, citric acid, lactosin, 
orotic acid and ammonia are found in milk in small quantities. 

Proteins 

Casein, lactalbumin, and lactoglobulin are the three proteins 
found in milk and are usually constant in a given species. 

Casein is found nowhere in nature except in the secretion 
of the mammary glands. It is highly specialized and, as a 
nucleoalbumin, contains a certain amount of phosphorus. 
Lactalbumin is a protein found in quantities varying from 
0.2% to 0.8%. It is similar to the serum albumin in blood 
and coagulates at 70° C. There is a mere trace of lactoglobulin 
in milk. It is insoluble in water. 

Fat 

Milk contains fat in emulsion; that is, the fat is suspended 
in the serum of milk in the form of emulsion. The fat is 
lighter than the milk serum and therefore rises to the top 
in the form of cream, or the fat may be separated from the 
milk by centrifugal force. Cream does not consist in fat 
globules alone but contains the same constituents as the milk, 
only it is very much richer in fat. By agitating the cream, 
as in a churn, or by means of shaking, the fat globules will 
coalesce and form into lumps of butter. It is stated by some 
authors that cream contains a larger number of bacteria than 
skim milk. The fore milk, or that which is first milked from 
the udder, has a small amount of fat; the last that is taken, 
which is known as the strippings, may contain as much as 
9% or 10% of fat. An increase in the temperature of the 
milk will retard the rising of the fat and if the temperature 


256 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


is kept above 65° C. for any length of time, cream will not 
form on top. Therefore, it follows that a moderately low 
temperature will increase the rapidity with which fat rises 
to the top of the milk. 

Parkes says, “Milk should not have less than 12.5% of 
total solids of which 3.5% is fat and 0.7% is salts; .... the 
percentage of cream by volume not less than 10%.” 

Infants placed on a diet of milk that is too rich in fats 
will thrive for a while, but in time will lose weight and 
show other symptoms, indicating the inability of Innate to 
digest the food. The stools become hard and dry, of a pale 
color and composed largely of fat soaps. This shows that 
Innate is unable to furnish sufficient alkaline bases through 
the body to saponify the excessive amount of fat in the intes¬ 
tines. This results in a condition resembling acidosis. 

Vitamins 

Milk is found to contain all three vitamins, A, B, and C, 
known as the fat-soluble A, water-soluble B, and water- 
soluble C. Cream is rich in vitamin A. This vitamin in¬ 
creases growth and promotes nutrition and is therefore valu¬ 
able in the diet of the young. Vitamin A and B are not 
destroyed by heat, unless it be a very great degree for a long 
period of time; they also resist drying and age. For this latter 
reason milk may be used in cooking and still retain the 
virtues of these two vitamins, as well as do evaporated milk 
and dried milk. Vitamin C is impaired and may be completely 
destroyed by high temperature and deteriorates with age and 
with drying. There is no article of food (diet) that is superior 
to milk in dietetic and nutritional value, and especially is this 
true of butter fat. The standard by which milk is tested is 
the amount of butter fat it contains. 

Lactose or Milk Sugar 

Milk contains what is known as milk sugar or lactose. It 
is white crystalline sugar, has a slightly sweet taste and is 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


257 


soluble in water. When acted upon by microorganisms it is 
changed into glucose, and the glucose is then reduced to lactic 
acid, the lactic acid being the cause of the milk souring. Milk 
sugar is found nowhere else in Nature. 

SANITARY MEASURES IN PRODUCTION 

Milk, a Germ Medium 

Milk, because of its characteristic qualities, forms a medium 
in which all kinds of bacteria and germs, or low forms of life, 
thrive. When we consider the processes necessary to obtain 
the milk and deliver it to the consumer, even though the most 
rigid sanitary methods are observed, it can readily be seen that 
milk is exposed to almost all kinds of dirt and to the different 
forms of organisms. 

It is very difficult to obtain milk in a state of purity and 
if germs played as important a part in the production of dis¬ 
ease as is thought by some, one of the most important articles 
of diet would be lost to mankind. Great quantities of these 
germs are ingested into the stomach of individuals who drink 
milk. 

These bacteria are carried into the milk during milking 
and in the handling of the milk and the retainers. Bac¬ 
teriological standards have been established, but vary a little 
with different authors. Usually it is agreed that certified 
milk should not contain more than 10,000 bacteria per 
cubic centimeter. Market milk should not have more than 
1,000,000 bacteria per cubic centimeter in the raw state 
and not more than 50,000 per cubic centimeter after pasteuri¬ 
zation. 

It can be seen by this standard that even the relatively pure 
milk contains great numbers of bacteria and yet these bac¬ 
teria are ingested into the digestive tract and no harm done. 
As a matter of fact, this helps to substantiate the contention 
of Chiropractic that these germs and the different bacteria are 


258 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


essential to life. There is no question, however, that poisons 
may be contained in milk, and when these are taken into the 
stomach Innate may not be able to properly adapt the tissues 
and thus a toxic condition will be produced. 

Because of the characteristic qualities of milk, the strictest 
sanitary measures should be observed in all the processes in¬ 
volved, from the time the milk is taken from the cow until 
it is delivered to the customer. 

Milk undergoes certain physical, chemical and biological 
changes as soon as it is taken from the cow: the cream rises 
and thus it is separated from the milk; there is also a separa¬ 
tion of the solids from the fluids. 

Care in the Milking 

A sanitary environment should be provided for the 
cows and special care should be taken in the process of 
milking to prevent the milk from becoming contaminated 
with dirt and filth. Those who handle this milk should 
take proper precautions to prevent dirt from getting into it. 
All utensils should be kept clean, sweet and free from sour 
milk. 

Sanitary measures should include: Proper care and feed¬ 
ing, or the health of the milch cows; (2) proper regulation 
of the bottling and transportation of the milk. The cows 
should by all means be healthy, inasmuch as milk is an animal 
secretion. It is certain that if the animal is suffering from 
dis-ease, this secretion will not be normal. Over-exertion and 
fright will also affect the milk. Care must be exercised to 
detect dis-ease and such dis-eased animals should be separated 
from the herd and their milk not used. 

Care of the Cows 

The cows should have plenty of exercise, but care should 
be taken that they are not frightened or over-exerted. They 
should be provided with proper protection from the weather 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


259 


and should have plenty of fresh hay, ground whole grain, and, 
when possible, be allowed to graze. Spoiled vegetables or 
fruits, foul or fermented foods are detrimental to dairy cows. 
A proper supply of salt is necessary and plenty of pure, fresh 
water is absolutely essential for the health of cows. 

Barns and Barnyards 

The barns and barnyards where milch cows are kept should 
be free from manure, pools of stagnant water, dirt and refuse. 
The ground should be well drained so that it will not become 
water-logged. Such ground should be located on elevations 
to assure proper drainage. The habit of allowing the refuse 
to accumulate in large quantities before hauling it away is not 



only repulsive but very unsanitary and may become a source 
of pollution of the milk supply. 

Stable should be constructed to assure proper ventilation 
and to provide proper shelter for the animals. The floors 
should be of material that is non-absorbent, well drained, and 
easily cleaned. Concrete is best. Each cow should have a 
separate stall furnished with a stanchion. The walls should 

ir 




























260 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


be of material that can be cleaned. There should be 600 cubic 
feet space for each cow in the barn. 

Bottling 

Milk should be strained through gauze placed over the 
wire strainer. All the utensils should be thoroughly cleaned 
after each milking and, if possible, sterilized in a steam 
sterilizer. The straining should not be done in the barns 
where the cows are, but in special separate milk houses. The 
bottling should be done only in establishments specially fitted 
for such purpose. 

Proper Temperature 

Milk should be kept at a temperature not above 50° F. 
during transportation. The cans or bottles should be properly 
covered, sealed, and the milk protected from too much agita¬ 
tion. 

Because milk undergoes a very rapid change, beginning 
almost as soon as it is drawn from the cow, it is necessary 
to either consume it in a short time or provide some means 
of preserving it. Milk soon deteriorates, becomes sour and 
unfit for use as food. 

The best means of preserving milk is to keep it at a low 
temperature. Bacteria are not destroyed in low temperature, 
but the activity is inhibited and their development retarded. 
In this way milk is kept from souring and from undergoing 
fermentative changes. The digestibility and character of milk 
are not changed by cold, and it will be sweet for a day or 
even longer if kept at a temperature under 50° F. 

An entirely sterile milk may be furnished only by raising 
the temperature to 248° F. for at least two hours, but this 
destroys the milk ferments. There are certain changes pro¬ 
duced by boiling milk which renders it less desirable for food, 
making it less digestible. It is, therefore, especially undesir¬ 
able for infants. 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


261 


PREPARATION OF MILK AND MILK PRODUCTS 

Pasteurization of Milk 

In pasteurizing milk it is heated to a temperature of 60° C. 
(140° F.) for a period of twenty minutes. This destroys the 
so-called pathogenic germs, yet does not destroy the ordinary 
milk ferments. It does not change its digestibility nor alter 
the taste or appearance. 

All of the so-called pathogenic germs, such as tuberculosis, 
typhoid, dysentery and diphtheria, for example, are completely 
destroyed by pasteurization, but the ferments are not destroyed 
and the milk is in no way altered. This process may be accom¬ 
plished on a large scale and thus furnish as safe milk for 
commercial consumption. Pasteurized milk should be rapidly 
cooled after heating, and if kept cool furnishes a clean, healthy 
milk entirely safe and satisfactory for infant food as well as 
for adults. 

Pasteurization furnishes a purified milk but not a pure 
milk. It is undoubtedly the best means of preservation 
and may be considered as bearing the same relation to 
purification of milk as filtration bears to purification of 
water. 

The use of formaldehyde, borax and boracic acid is as 
objectionable in artificial preservation of milk as in the 
preservation of meat and other foods and should not be 
tolerated. 

Condensed Milk 

Milk is condensed by removing some of the water. It 
is made either from skim or whole milk. It may be un¬ 
sweetened or sweetened with cane sugar. Condensed and 
evaporated milk should contain a label stating the grade 
of milk used. Condensed and evaporated milk are poor in 
vitamin C. 


262 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


Dry Milk 

It has been found that by certain processes it is possible 
to dry milk, taking all the wnter out and leaving a powder. 
This may be accomplished and still retain most of the nutri¬ 
tive value of the milk. Vitamin fat soluble A and water 
soluble B remain practically the same, but water soluble C 
vitamin is diminished. Babies fed on dried milk will thrive, 
but orange juice or some other food containing antiscorbutic 
properties must be given to compensate for the loss of vita¬ 
min C. Dried milk provides an adequate supply to many 
parts of the country and to the cities, where it is difficult 
to obtain fresh milk. 

Butter 

Butter is produced by placing cream in a proper apparatus 
and agitating or churning it until the fat globules coalesce 
into lumps. These lumps are then taken out of the serum 
known as the buttermilk and the water and milk worked out 
until it becomes more or less solid. When butter has had the 
milk and water worked out of it the constituents should be 
in about the following proportions: Fat, 83.5%; curd, 1.0%; 
ash, 1.5% ; milk sugar, 1.0% ; water, 13.0%. By weight butter 
should never contain more than 16% of water and should 
contain at least 80% of fat. 

Owing to the conversion of the fat into fatty acids butter 
will, in the course of time, become acid, rancid and unfit for 
table use. 

Oleomargarine is a product resembling butter. It is manu¬ 
factured from animal fats and vegetable oils. It is not as 
desirable an article of diet as butter. It contains margarine 
fat and only .5% of the volatile fats, while butter fat con¬ 
tains about 8%. 

Oleomargarine may be distinguished from butter by boil¬ 
ing. Butter boils more quietly and a foam is formed on top, 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


263 


while oleomargarine sputters much like oil mixed with water 
and there is little or no foam produced. 

Cheese 

Cheese is manufactured from skim milk, whole milk, or 
milk to which cream has been added. The more cream the 
richer is the product. Coagulation of the milk is accomplished 
by adding rennet; the curd is then pressed to expel the whey; 
next it is placed in molds and kept in a cool place to ripen. 
After cheese has been properly ripened it makes an excellent 
article of diet. It contains a large proportion of nitrogenous 
substances. There are many grades of cheese, the quality 
depending not only upon the process involved in the manu¬ 
facturing, but also upon the richness of the milk from which 
it is made. 

































































































- 

















































































MEAT 

Meat, an Article of Diet 

Composition of Meat 

tough meat 

TENDER MEAT 

CHANGES AFTER SLAUGHTER 
REFRIGERATION 

Food Value of Meat 

BEEF EXTRACTS 
BEEF JUICE 

Sources of Meat 

Care of Food Animals 

food 

water 

SHELTER 

Meat Unfit for Food 

adulterated 

SPOILED MEAT 

Danger from Spoiled Meat 

DIFFERENT INFECTIONS 
TAPEWORM 
PARASITE 
ECHINOCOCCUS 


266 


CHAPTER XVIII 

MEAT 

Meat, an Article of Diet 

Meat is used as an article of food by most of the civilized 
races. It, however, as a universal diet, is of quite recent 
origin. Since the modern, efficient refrigerating processes, 
canning, and improved facilities of transportation, the use of 
meat as an article of diet has become very popular and 
economic. 

Composition of Meat 

Meat is composed of muscle tissue and the associated struc¬ 
tures, such as connective tissue, adipose tissue, blood vessels, 
nerves and lymphatic vessels. Chiefly, meat is found to be 
composed of proteins, fats, ash carbohydrates and water—the 
percentage of water varying from 10% to 78%, depending 
upon the cut. Whether the meat is tough or tender depends 
upon the thickness of the walls of the muscle tubes and the 
presence of connective tissue, which binds the muscles to¬ 
gether. Flesh of young domesticated animals is more tender 
than flesh of old animals or of wild animals. Flavor of the 
meat is also affected by the animal’s age. Muscle tissue in 
its inorganic content resembles the seed more than the leaf 
elements of diet, both in amount and in its relative propor¬ 
tions. Albuminoids and gelatinoids are also contained in 
meat to quite a degree. 

Immediately after slaughter, meat has an alkaline reaction 
and is found to be tough and of a sweetish taste and of a 
somewhat unpleasant flavor. Sarcolactic soon develops, giv¬ 
ing an acid reaction to the meat. Autolytic enzymes soon 
form and this action, together with the bacterial action, softens 
the connective tissue and fibers. This results in the meat 

267 


268 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


becoming more tender and also of a more desirable flavor. 
For these reasons meat should be allowed to remain under 
proper refrigeration for a sufficient length of time so that 
this action can take place. It is obvious, therefore, that meat 
is not so desirable for food immediately upon slaughter. Great 
care must be taken during the period of refrigeration that it 
does not become contaminated. 

Food Value of Meat 

The presence of proteins and fats in meat determines its 
nutrient value. Nitrogenous extracts, also known as meat 
bases, have but little value as foods. As already stated, meat 
compares more favorably with seeds that are used for diet 
rather than the leaves of plants. As a matter of fact, this 
food, more particularly muscle tissue, differs from seeds only 
in one respect. This is in the quality of proteins. In meat 
the proteins are complete while those of seeds are incomplete. 
Meat is relatively poor in the vitamin, fat soluble A. There 
are many articles of diet which have a much higher nutritive 
value than meat. 

There is prepared from beef a soup stock which is known 
as beef extract. Manufacturers of this soup stock assert that 
one pound of beef extract contains the nutrient properties of 
many pounds of meat. Doctor Wiley, however, says that this 
assertion is erroneous. These extracts are of value since 
from them there may be obtained a more speedy, soluble 
nutrient which may be desirable for patients in a weakened 
condition. There should be a distinction, however, made be¬ 
tween beef extract and beef juice. Beef juice is obtained by 
putting the meat under pressure and forcing the juices out. 
Thus, this juice contains a larger percentage of albuminous 
nutrient material than does beef extract. 

Sources of Meat 

Cattle, sheep and swine form the principal source of meat, 
although horse flesh and even the flesh of dogs is used in some 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


269 


countries. From a hygienic or sanitary standpoint there are 
no particular objections to the use of horse or dog meat for 
food. Horse meat is very much coarser than either beef or 
pork; it does not have the same marble appearance and has a 
sickening odor. When properly prepared it is difficult to dis¬ 
tinguish it from beef. 

From a hygienic standpoint there are certain conditions 
which render the meat of animals unfit for food. They are: 
First, the death of animals from old age, dis-ease or acci¬ 
dent; second, animals dying from injury, drugs, overwork or 
fright; third, animals that are too young. 

Care of Food Animals 

Proper care of the animal bears a close relationship to its 
health and consequently to the health of the people who feed 
upon its flesh. 

The domestic animals should be properly housed and pro¬ 
tected from the weather, should have plenty of pure water 
and should be provided with wholesome food. They should 
be properly inspected before they are slaughtered and aftei 
the animals are slaughtered and prepared for market the meat 
should be thoroughly inspected. 

Meat Unfit for Food 

Meat is often rendered dangerous to health by the adul¬ 
terating processes through which it is put. There are many 
ways in which meat may be adulterated. (See table under 
Food Adulteration.) 

Slightly spoiled meat is a great source of danger. It is 
very difficult to recognize spoiled meat, even though the 
deteriorating processes which have taken place are great 
enough to injure the health of those who eat it. We are not 
referring to decomposed meat, for it is a very easy matter to 
recognize this by its offensive odor. The appearance may not 
thoroughly be affected by even the most serious infection of 


270 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


the deadly poisons. However, inspectors are supposed to 
reject meat that does not possess the raw, fresh appearance, 
or meat from which any amount of fluid of an abnormal color 
exudes upon pressure. 

Danger to Health 

From a hygienic standpoint the danger to health from 
meat may be classed as: (a) infection from entozoa; (b) in¬ 
fection by bacteria; (c) toxins and ptomaines. These condi¬ 
tions may result from: (a) dis-eases of the food animals; 

(b) postmortem changes that may take place in the meat; 

(c) infection of the meat; (d) adulteration; (e) the use of 
preservatives. Such parasites as tapeworm, trichina and 
echinococci may result from spoiled meat. 

Tapeworm 

Meat infection may result in two species of tapeworm, 
the taenia saginata and the taenia solium. The taenia saginata 
is due to infection from beef, which is known in lay terms as 
measly beef. The taenia solium is due to infection from pork, 
which is known in lay terminology as measly pork. The 
larva of the taenia solium appears in hogs and is known 
as bladder worms, from the fact that it is found incased in 
small cysts in the intestines, the muscle fibers, brain and other 
parts. The larva of the taenia saginata is found in the muscular 
fibers and connective tissue of cattle and when ingested in man 
develops into the taenia saginata. 

Trichinosis 

There is a parasite known as trichina spiralis which is 
found as a minute spiral worm in the muscular fibers of pork. 
It is visible to the naked eye as white specks. The ingestion of 
this parasite into a person with subluxations, causing inter¬ 
ference with transmission of mental impulses, produces a con¬ 
dition which is called trichinosis. It is an acute condition and 
the symptoms resemble typhoid fever. It often results fatally. 


CHIROPRACTIC HYGIENE 


271 


Echinococcus 

The echinococcus is sometimes found in the meat of hogs, 
sheep and cattle. When the eggs are ingested in man they 
hatch and the embryo pierces the mucosa and lodges in the 
tissues, forming a hydatid or cyst. These cysts develop and 
increase in size as the larvae multiply. 

As the eggs are ingested into the digestive tract of man 
there is created a necessity for adaptative action on the part 
of Innate Intelligence for the purpose of expelling them. This 
action will be sufficient to result in the expulsion of the larvae 
if there is no interference with the transmission of mental im¬ 
pulses to the tissue cells. When this action takes place there 
will be no injury done, but if the action does not take place 
the eggs remain in the body and hatch, producing what is 
known as a hydatid dis-ease. 












































































* 























































































SECTION II 

CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 



































































* 


























































































. 




































































































. 

































































































CHAPTER I 

THE BABY 


18 
























































' 
































































































.. 










































































































































CHAPTER I 


THE BABY 

Chiropractic has nothing to do with obstetrics, but the 
chiropractor should be informed on the subject of child 
hygiene. It must be remembered that our idea is not to sub¬ 
stitute here for the services of the obstetrician, a food diet for 
the infant when the mother is unable to nurse her child. The 
proper application of Chiropractic will eventually enable the 
mother, who might otherwise be unable to do so, to nurse 
her baby. 

The child is the most helpless of the animal kingdom and 
requires special attention. This must come through the 
observation of Nature’s laws and an educated adaptation by 
means of substituting the educated mind of the adult for that 
of the infant. 

Feeding 

The child that is normal will give little trouble since 
Nature has made provision for all processes necessary to 
maintain the normal functions of the body. In order that 
these processes be maintained it is necessary to have food, 
proper environment, and sufficient exercise. When the mother 
is able to nurse the babe the problem of nourishment is solved. 
If the mother is unable to nurse the child and if the condition 
which makes this impossible is of such long standing that 
adjustments will not get results on the mother within the 
nursing period of her child, then the question of baby food 
should be left to the obstetrician who can prescribe the proper 
diet. 

If the child has difficulty in digesting the food, adjust¬ 
ments should be given to enable Innate to bring about the 

277 


278 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


proper adaptation. The bottle fed baby will require more 

• care than the breast fed baby. Special care must be exercised 
to keep the bottles and other receptacles in a proper sanitary 
condition. This can be done by boiling them. Great care 
must be taken that the nipples used on the bottle are not 
allowed to become sour and otherwise unhygienic. 

Cows’ milk may be used for bottle fed babies, but the 
most rigid sanitary measures should be used in producing and 
delivering the milk. There are many baby foods on the 
market, but the prescribing of food for the bottle-fed baby 
does not come within the scope of the chiropractor. This 
should be left to the obstetrician who has specialized in this 
work. It is not within the scope of Chiropractic to prescribe 

* the kind of food that a bottle-fed baby needs, but the chiro¬ 
practor must realize the importance of the right kind of food 
and the necessity for a proper innate adaptation to the kind 
of food given. Proper feeding is necessary for normal develop¬ 
ment, although it alone will not insure proper growth and 
development. The digestive organs must work normally and 
there must be proper coordinate action between the glands of 
the body. For this proper balance to be maintained there 
must be a normal transmission of mental impulses to all parts 
of the body. 

The child that is getting a properly balanced ration and 
still is not developing normally should receive immediate atten¬ 
tion at the hands of a competent chiropractor. No phase of 
the chiropractor’s work brings such gratifying results as the 
care of infants and babies, yet in no other phase will he find 
so much to baffle him. If the child is unable to digest the 
food then adjustments should be given. 

Sleep 

The infant requires much sleep and for the first two or 
three days this sleep will be very deep. The ordeal of labor 
is very trying on the infant and in cases involving great 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


279 


labor difficulty the first sleep of the infant may be so pro¬ 
found that it may appear to be coma. This may last for 
several hours, but if there are no convulsions or contractures 
there is no occasion for alarm; otherwise, this might indicate 
an incoordination in the brain. 

After this first deep sleep, and especially after the first 
month, the infant will not sleep so soundly, although the sleep 
will be quiet. The deep, heavy sleep of childhood will be 
observed after the second or third year. The healthy infant 
sleeps almost all the time during the first few weeks, usually 
from twenty to twenty-two hours out of twenty-four. After 
that and for the first six or eight months, he sleeps from 
sixteen to eighteen hours out of the twenty-four. The healthy 
infant a few weeks old will awaken only when disturbed or 
when hungry. A child one year of age should have at least 
fourteen hours of sleep and more would not be excessive. 
This sleep should be taken about twelve hours at night and 
the balance during the day. A child two years of age requires 
about the same amount. At four years, eleven to twelve hours 
may be sufficient. Up to six years of age the child should 
take a daily nap. Ten to eleven hours' sleep is considered 
sufficient from the age of six to ten years. The youth up to 
sixteen or seventeen years of age should have not less than 
nine hours of sleep and even more will not be excessive. 

The nervous mechanism of the infant is a very delicate 
organization and often the fond parents do the child an in¬ 
justice by not giving due consideration to the environment 
surrounding him the first year of life. The greatest develop¬ 
ment of the brain takes place during the first two years. To 
have the proper development of the nervous system there must 
be a quiet environment and the elimination of anything that 
will excite the child or tend to create nervousness. If the 
child is unduly susceptible to noise and is irritable and nervous, 
cries out or is too easily startled, there is a cause for this 
and a very careful analysis should be given and the causative 


280 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


subluxations found and adjusted immediately. The nervous¬ 
ness may be due to some disorder such as gastric, intestinal 
indigestion, poor elimination or directly to a cervical subluxa¬ 
tion. 

Playing violently with the young child should not be in¬ 
dulged in. It is a common failing of parents to want the 
baby to make a good appearance and therefore he is often 
stimulated to laughter by means that are detrimental to his 
health. This should not be done. 

Exercise 

The need for exercise is quite apparent and this need is 
as great in the infant as in the adult. Proper exercise is im¬ 
portant from the standpoint of hygiene and we will readily 
realize this when we observe the provisions which have been 
made in Nature to take care of this very important process. 
The child gets his exercise from the natural instincts in his 
nature to run and play. His curiosity performs an important 
function in this respect. This keeps him running about to 
investigate the things about him. This takes care of the child 
that is thrown in a natural environment where there is plenty 
of room for him to run and play indoors and out, but it does 
not take care of the infant and the child in the city or apart¬ 
ment who gets the proper amount of exercise only where 
there is special provision made for it. 

The infant gets his exercise by kicking, therefore the cloth¬ 
ing should not be too tight. If it is, it prevents this natural 
exercise which is an adaptation on the part of Innate Intelli¬ 
gence. It is advisable to place the nude baby on his back 
for a few minutes at a time, preferably following the bath. 
In this way he can kick to his heart’s content. Crying is 
another means of exercise open to the child. The lusty cry 
of the infant is an advantage enabling the expansion of the 
lungs and the exercising of the abdominal muscles, the dia¬ 
phragm and other structures that would otherwise get very 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


281 


little exercise. Of course attention must be given the crying 
child to see that there is nothing wrong. The crying may 
be the result of pain or discomfort from the clothing, but it 
does not take a mother or nurse long to recognize the different 
cries. 

The child gets a certain amount of exercise from the 
handling which he receives. A child that is left in the crib 
and does not get the proper handling will be fretful and will 
not do well. Of course the infant must not be handled roughly 
and at no time should he be disturbed from sleep. The child 
who is given opportunity to exert himself and who receives 
the proper exercise through handling will relish his milk, 
digestion will be normal, other things being equal, and in 
every way he will present a more healthful appearance. 

Children old enough to creep will get a sufficient amount 
of exercise in this way. Precautions must be taken, however, 
that the child is not allowed to remain on the floor when there 
are drafts or when the floor is cold as it is likely to be in 
winter in homes that are not provided with furnace heat. 
It must be remembered that the child is very curious and 
is likely to get hurt unless properly protected. He should 
not be restrained in creeping and he should be permitted to 
spend some time romping on the floor each day. Children 
should not be encouraged to stand when too young since the 
weight of the body tends to produce bow-legs. 

Outdoor exercise should be provided for the children at 
an early age. This should include every sort of exercise and 
play. It is an advantage to have systematic games, for this 
not only gives a regular amount of exercise but also has an 
influence on the mind of the child which will aid in forming 
regular and systematic habits of thought and action. In early 
childhood there need be no difference in the exercise of the 
two sexes. It is necessary only to regulate the amount of 
exertion for the more delicate children. In this respect com¬ 
petitive games may tend to stimulate children to play too 


282 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


hard in an effort to win. Especially is the delicate child likely 
to overdo since no child likes for other children to know that 
he is not as physically fit as his playmates. There are no 
objections from a hygienic standpoint, for the exercise to be 
sufficiently strenuous to produce muscular fatigue, but it must 
never be so strenuous or so prolonged as to produce muscular 
exhaustion. The exercise should develop all parts of the 
body. In this way there will be a symmetrical body develop¬ 
ment. 

Playroom 

In stormy weather and in winter time when children can 
not get outdoors they should get exercise indoors. In prac¬ 
tically every home a room could be fitted up as a playroom 
or nursery. It need not be elaborate and could be a bedroom 
used for a playroom during the day. This room should be 
well lighted and not kept too warm. The right temperature 
is about 55° F. Since an abundance of light is necessary the 
room should not be on the north, for the direct rays of the 
sun are to be desired and some provision should be made to 
admit them. All drafts must be avoided, yet a sufficient 
amount of air must be admitted so as to prevent the air 
from becoming vitiated. The best method of accomplishing 
this is by means of ventilators placed in the windows. Occa¬ 
sionally the doors and windows should be opened and the 
room thoroughly aired. This should be done while the chil¬ 
dren are absent from the room. 

The furniture in the playroom should be substantial and 
of such a character that it can easily be cleaned and kept in 
a sanitary condition. 

Sleeping Rooms or Nurseries 

When it is possible in a home a room should be set aside 
for the nursery. This room should be well lighted, properly 
ventilated, and the heat and humidity should be carefully regu- 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


283 


lated. This room is to be the chief home of the infant for 
the first few months. Therefore it should meet the needs of 
the infant. It should receive the direct rays of the sun dur¬ 
ing the day. No processes, such as preparation of food, or 
washing of diapers, for example, should be permitted in this 
room. As far as possible gas plates, heaters, or gas lights 
should be avoided. 

The nursery should not be kept too warm. A temperature 
of 70° F. is proper during the day. During the first few weeks 
it should not be allowed to drop below 65° F. through the 
night. For children over two months of age the temperature 
during the night may go as low as 60° F. but not below 50° F. 

It is more sanitary for the infant to have a separate bed. 
Both mother and babe will rest better and there will not be 
the tendency for the baby to nurse too frequently during the 
night. The infant should be placed in a crib without rockers. 
A basket or bassinet is very convenient and sanitary. The 
sides of the bassinet may be lined and this will prevent drafts 
and assist materially in keeping the baby warm. The pillow 
should be small and soft. It is advisable to change the posi¬ 
tion of the child occasionally while sleeping. It must be re¬ 
membered that the child is unable to turn should he become 
cramped or should he become tired from lying in one posi¬ 
tion. The average mother knows how to take care of her 
child in a general way and nurses have had special training 
in this respect, but these simple necessities should not be 
beneath the notice of the chiropractor. Especially is this of 
importance in determining the cause of irritability in the 
infant. Attention must be given to skin irritation, especially 
resulting from carelessness in the changing of the diaper and 
in keeping the body of the child otherwise clean. It is not, 
however, the intention of the author to present in this text 
complete instruction in the care of infants except from the 
general viewpoint of hygiene. The chiropractor is not to be 
a nurse, but he must know the rules of hygiene since there 


284 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


are many conditions of infancy which result from a violation 
of these rules. 

After the first week or two the infant should be taken out 
of doors if it is in the summer. The open air is healthful 
for the young children and they should be kept outdoors a 
part of each day. The eyes must be protected from the sun 
and the head from the wind. The child, of course, should be 
properly dressed for out of doors. At first the child must 
be kept out only a few minutes, since sufficient time must 
be allowed for adaptation to take place, or in other words, 
for the child to become accustomed to the change. Before 
children are taken out the first time it is well to get them 
accustomed to the change by opening the doors and windows 
of the room that there may be a gradual cooling of the tem¬ 
perature. The child born in the fall or winter must not be 
deprived of fresh air even though the weather will not permit 
the outside airing. The child may be dressed as for an outdoor 
airing, then the doors and windows opened. Great care must 
be exercised or the child will take cold. 

Control of Bowels and Bladder 

While the chiropractor will have little if anything to do 
in advising mothers how to train their children to answer the 
“call of Nature,” yet he should be familiar with methods that 
are suggested for such training and certainly he should recog¬ 
nize the importance from a hygienic standpoint of such regular 
habits. It might be stated here that the normal movement 
of the young infant’s bowels should be at least twice a day. 

At a very early age children learn to evacuate the bowels 
when placed upon a nursery chair. This requires a great deal 
of patience and regularity on the part of the mother or nurse. 
Even at the early age of three months the child may be trained 
to such a degree that the napkin will seldom be soiled from 
the movements of the bowels. This saves an enormous amount 
of work and certainly is more pleasant for the child, and 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


285 


much more sanitary. There is, however, another advantage 
having the young child form this regular habit; it is very 
probable that a habit formed this early will be followed the 
entire life, and thus the tendency for the educated mind to 
neglect this very important innate function will be averted. 
The best time to place the child upon the nursery chair is 
immediately following feeding. 

Training the child to empty the bladder at stated times 
is more difficult, although with patient and intelligent effort 
this may be accomplished. Many children at the age of one 
year are able to indicate when they desire to empty the 
bladder. This adds materially to the comfort of the child 
and certainly makes it very much easier to care for him. 
Some mothers are able to dispense with the diapers during 
the day by the time the child is a year old and some even 
at an earlier age. If there is no special effort put forth to 
train the child in this respect it will be necessary to keep 
him in diapers as late as two and a half years. After this 
age the child should have no difficulty in holding the urine 
during the night. If there is such difficulty adjustments should 
be given to correct the cause for the nocturnal enuresis. 

Growth and Development 

Since growth of the child is the best evidence of health, 
some attention should be given it and should there be any 
arrest in development the cause should be carefully deter¬ 
mined. Arrested progress always indicates that something 
is wrong and therefore adjustments are needed. Although 
normal growth does not prove perfect health by any means, 
yet if the child is not growing and properly developing he is 
not enjoying proper health. 

Weight 

From observation made of a great number of cases by 
authorities the average weight for girls at birth is a little 


286 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


over seven pounds, while that of boys is about seven and a 
half pounds. Some weigh more, some less. There is a loss 
of weight the first three days, this being greatest the first 
day. After the third day the child begins gradually to in¬ 
crease in weight and by the tenth day will have gained all 
that was lost the first three days, reaching the birth-weight 
about the tenth day. The artificially fed babies gain more 
slowly, even though they may be perfectly healthy and vig¬ 
orous. The greatest increase that is made in the weight of 
children the first year is during the first three months. Nor¬ 
mally the average child will gain from five to six ounces each 
week during the first six months, but only about half this 
much the second six months. The data given here must be 
considered only as an average, no standard can be set, but 
the variation must be within certain limits, otherwise it will 
be indicative of abnormality. 

During the first two years the weight of children is con¬ 
sidered with reference to age, but after this it is studied with 
relation to height. This latter method is much more accurate. 
The age, however, must always enter into the consideration, 
for of two children of the same height but of different ages 
the older should be the heavier. There is much less variation 
in weight with reference to height than with reference to age. 
Normal weight differs with different individuals and is gov¬ 
erned by various conditions so that a stated weight can not 
be decided upon as normal in all cases. The degree of devia¬ 
tion from the average weight that one may experience and 
still be within the normal range is a matter of opinion. If 
the weight of the child is more than 10% below the average 
for his height it is a fair indication that there is a lack of 
proper nutrition, either because he does not have proper food 
or because the tissues can not assimilate the nutrition due to 
interference with transmission. In a case of this kind the 
child should be carefully analyzed and adjusted. The dis¬ 
turbance may be in the digestive tract or due to an impair¬ 
ment in the serous circulation. 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


287 


Children twelve years of age and over gain less regularly 
and more spasmodically. For this reason there will be a 
greater degree of variation at this age. The weight may 
fall as much at 12% below the average and still the child 
not be considered underweight, or as much as 20% above the 
average before being considered overweight. If an observa¬ 
tion of the weight is to be of any value it must be made over 
a period of time. The important thing is to observe whether 
or not there has been a gain in weight over that period of 
time. Loss of weight over a period of time indicates that 
Innate is compelled to draw upon the physical in her processes 
and that there is no new material with which to replace the 
old. This is a warning from Innate that should be heeded. 
The following table will give the idea of the average weight 
for the given height of the child. 

This table is based upon a general average taken from 
various authentic sources and is for the purpose of giving the 
chiropractor a general basis upon which to make observations 
in growing children. The average weight is given with rela¬ 
tion to the average height and approximate age from the 
second to the, sixteenth year of life inclusive. 

Separate weights have not been given for boys and girls. 
The average weight of boys is about two pounds heavier than 
that of girls at the same age up to about the thirteenth year. 
From fourteen to sixteen years of age the average weight of 
girls is from three to ten pounds above that of boys. The 
greatest, increase in the weight of girls takes place between 
the thirteenth and fourteenth year, while with boys this 
increase is between the sixteenth and seventeenth year. 


288 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


APPROXIMATE 


AVERAGE 


AVERAGE 

AGE 


HEIGHT 


WEIGHT 

2 

yrs. 

2 

ft. 

9% 

in. 

27.5 lbs 

3 

« 

3 

n 

0 

tt 

32.2 “ 

4 

(< 

3 

n 

4 

tt 

37.3 “ 

5 

t( 

3 

n 

5 

tt 

40.5 “ 

6 

tt 

3 

n 

7 

tt 

44.2 “ 

7 

n 

3 

n 

9 

tt 

48.6 “ 

8 

tt 

3 

ft 

11 

n 

54.0 “ 

9 

ft 

4 

n 

1 

n 

58.8 “ 

10 

ft 

4 

ft 

3 

n 

64.8 “ 

11 

tt 

4 

tt 

5 

tt 

70.6 “ 

12 

tt 

4 

ft 

7 

tt 

77.2 “ 

13 

ft 

4 

n 

9 

tt 

90.3 “ 

14 

n 

5 

<t 

0 

a 

101.9 “ 

15 

tt 

5 

n 

2 

u 

111.5 “ 

16 

it 

5 

tt 

3 

tt 

118.8 “ 

The 

following 

table 

compiled by A. B. 

Hender, M 


D. C., Ph. C., Dean of the Faculty of The Palmer School of 
Chiropractic, gives the average weight of the child from birth 
to one year of age. Dr. Hender has had years of experience 
as an obstetrician, and is well known to the chiropractic pro¬ 
fession. These statistics are compiled by him from personal 
observation made of over 5,000 children, covering a period of 


over twenty-five years of active practice as an obstetrician. 


AGE 

WEIGHT 

AGE 

WEIGHT 

1st mo. 

7 to 10 lbs. 

7th 

mo. 

14 to 17 lbs. 

2nd " 

8 “ 11 " 

8th 

tt 

15 “ 18 “ 

3rd “ 

10 “ 13 “ 

9th 

tt 

17 “ 19 M 

4th “ 

12 “ 14 “ 

10th 

tt 

18 M 20 “ 

5th “ 

13 “ 15 “ 

11th 

tt 

19 “ 21 M 

6th “ 

13 M 16 M 

12th 

tt 

20 M 24 u 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


289 


Height 

The same thing can be said about height as about weight 
of children. There is no standard, since there are so many 
variations to consider, but there is a general average. The 
average length of the infant at birth is about twenty and one- 
half inches. The average normal growth the first year is 
about nine inches. Growth in height of the child does not 
indicate much in the way of nutrition, since a child may 
grow in height and at the same time lose in weight. The 
greatest growth in height is made at the time of puberty. 
Girls begin this rapid growth about twelve years of age and 
will mature more rapidly than boys, since boys do not begin 
this rapid growth until the thirteenth or fourteenth year; but, 
in the fifteenth year the boys will be taller than the girls. 

Growth in height is not retarded by malnutrition to the 
same degree as is weight. The average growth of the normal 
child during the second year is about four inches; for the 
third year a little less; for the fourth year still a little less, 
about three inches. Bowditch tells us that after the fifth year 
the average growth is about two inches a year up to the time 
of puberty. 


THE SPECIAL SENSES 


Sight 

The eyes of the infant are very sensitive to the light and 
every effort is made by the child to avoid bright light and 
thus protect the eyes from glare; the eyes will innately close 
when a bright light is brought before them. For the protec¬ 
tion of the infant’s eyes the room should be kept darkened 
for the first few weeks. A subdued light will usually attract 
the attention of an infant and as early as the sixth day the 
child may even turn the head in an effort to follow the light 
with the eyes. 


290 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


It is not uncommon for the eyelids to remain partly sep¬ 
arated during sleep and for the movement to be more or less 
irregular during the first few weeks of life. The muscles of 
the eyeballs do not always coordinate in their action. This 
often results in temporary strabismus when the infant is look¬ 
ing intently at an object. Perfect coordinate action is often 
as late as the third or fourth month. 

Hearing 

The hearing of the infant is very acute, although it is 
asserted that the child is unable to hear for the first twenty- 
four hours after birth. This is due to the absence of air 
in the middle ear. During the process of respiration air is 
gradually admitted to the middle ear and hearing becomes 
very acute, so much so that sharp noises will startle the child. 
For this reason the nursery should be so located that it may 
be as free as possible from noise. Noise is trying on the 
nervous system and should be avoided as far as possible. 
As early as two months of age the infant will turn his head 
in the direction of the noise. 

Touch 

Certain portions of the infant’s body are more sensitive 
than others. The tactile sensibility of the lips and tongue 
is highly developed. This facilitates the process of nursing. 
The forehead and external auditory meatus are more sensi¬ 
tive than other parts. This creates a necessity for protection 
of these parts. The child’s head should be covered, but not 
the face, when taken out of doors. Touch is less acute in the 
infant than in the older child. 

The tongue of the young infant is very susceptible to 
temperature. He will show a dislike for the bottle if the milk 
is too hot or ,too cold. 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


291 


Taste 

At one time it was thought that the child at birth had 
no sense of taste, but now it is agreed that even at birth this 
sense is extremely acute. The newly born infant is unable 
to distinguish sweet, sour and bitter. The sucking movement 
is excited by the taste of sweet, some authorities believe. 
With bottle-fed babies a difference in the taste of the food 
will be quickly noticed and it is with difficulty that he can 
be induced to take anything that is distasteful such as sour 
or bitter substances. The child very early will show that he 
enjoys sweets. 

Smell 

The acuteness of this sense is not so easily determined 
in the infant, although there is sufficient evidence to warrant 
the conclusion that sense of smell exists from the beginning; 
however, the ability to detect different odors is not developed 
to any great extent until later in childhood. It is believed 
that the sense of smell plays an important part at the begin¬ 
ning in the child finding the mother’s breast. 

SPEECH 

The age at which the child begins to talk varies with 
individuals and also with circumstances and environment. 
Girls on the average will learn to talk earlier than boys; the 
average is about two months earlier. The average child 
begins to say such words as mamma and papa a little before 
one year of age. Other simple and easy words are learned 
until by the second year he is putting words together. How 
early a child learns to talk depends to a great extent upon 
the amount of time given him by adults in trying to teach 
him. The words that he learns depend largely on what is 
taught at the beginning. The reason for the average child 
learning to say papa first is largely due to the efforts of the 


19 


292 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


mother who induces the child to say this word; then naturally 
an effort is made to get the child to say mamma and from 
this word attention is directed to any pets there may be in 
the family. Then the names of objects are learned. Verbs are 
usually next learned then adverbs and adjectives. Following 
these in order are the conjunctions, prepositions, and articles. 
Personal pronouns are the last to be learned. 

Children who are permitted to associate with other children 
will usually learn to talk earlier than those who are reared 
alone. If the child has not learned to talk at two years of 
age he may be mentally deficient; or failure to talk may be 
the result of being deaf or some other incoordination of the 
vocal apparatus may exist. As soon as a child is discovered 
to be mute he should have immediate chiropractic attention. 
Many such cases are on record which show excellent results 
obtained through adjustments. 

HEAD 

The occipito-frontal measurement of the child at birth is 
from 13.52 inches to 13.90 inches. The most rapid growth 
of the head takes place during the first year. With the aver¬ 
age child this growth is about four inches. For the first few 
months the growth is about half an inch per month. During 
the second year the circumference of the head increases only 
about one inch and for the next three years, about one and 
one-half inches. From this time until puberty, about five 
years, it increases only about half an inch. The head develops 
so rapidly so early in life that it appears to be all out of 
proportion for the body. 

Sutures 

In syphilitic infants or in premature birth, the cranial bones 
may be distinctly separated. This condition does not, how¬ 
ever, necessarily prove that either exists for often subluxa¬ 
tions are produced at the time of birth and these prevent the 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


293 


normal expression of Innate Intelligence in bringing about the 
adaptative processes necessary to close the sutures. This is 
an abnormal condition and should receive careful considera¬ 
tion at the hands of the chiropractor. Normally the main 
sutures ossify at about the end of the sixth month, although 
there may be some mobility at the end of the ninth month. 
If after this the sutures have not entirely ossified the child 
should be carefully examined for subluxations. 

Fontanels 

Under normal conditions the anterior fontanels should be 
completely closed at the age of one and a half years. If at 
the end of two years they have not completely closed it is 
abnormal and indicates cretinism, rickets or hydrocephalus. 
In case of hydrocephalus the sutures will be distinctly sepa¬ 
rated and the head will be enlarged. This condition may 
also obtain in rickets. When the fontanels are slow in closing 
the child should be very carefully analyzed and an effort made 
to find symptoms of other conditions which might be re¬ 
sponsible for this abnormality. Most excellent results have 
been obtained from chiropractic adjustments in these cases. 
It is quite as objectionable for the fontanels to close too soon 
as it is for them to be too slow in closing and it may be much 
more serious. There are many cases on record in which the 
fontanels have been closed when the child was born. A case 
of this kind is ordinarily beyond the reach of Chiropractic. 
The closure of the fontanels during the first few weeks, or 
even at the middle of the first year, indicates microcephalus. 

Normally the anterior fontanels should be completely 
closed about the eighteenth month, although it may be as 
late as the twenty-second month. In rachitic children it may 
be as late as the third year. In cretinism the fontanels may 
become very large and sometimes do not close until the 
eighth year. In hydrocephalus also the fontanels become very 
large, the head develops rapidly to an enormous size and this 


294 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


results in the spreading of the sutures. If these cases receive 
adjustments early enough in life, excellent results are obtained. 

The posterior fontanel is very much smaller than the 
anterior and closes about the second month, normally. 

Shape 

In most cases the head of the infant is more or less com¬ 
pressed during labor. In hard labor it may be so greatly 
compressed that it gives the appearance of being deformed, 
but this apparent deformity soon disappears, usually from 
the third to the fifth week. Healthy children and especially 
good natured ones are sometimes neglected and permitted to 
lie in one position for such a length of time that the head 
becomes misshapen. Usually in such cases the child is placed 
on his back. This results in the flattening of the back of 
the head. This, however, may be easily corrected by chang¬ 
ing the position of the child occasionally. These variations 
should not be mistaken for actual deformities of the head. 

THORAX 

The average chest measurement of the child at birth is 
from thirteen to thirteen and four-tenths inches; thus it is 
seen that at birth the circumference of the chest is about a 
half inch less than that of the head. The circumference of 
the abdomen is about equal to that of the chest. The trans¬ 
verse diameter is practically the same as that of the antero¬ 
posterior, but as time goes on and the child develops, the 
transverse diameter increases more rapidly until about ten 
years of age when the shape of the thorax becomes about 
the same as that of the adult. The diameter of the chest 
increases at the rate of about one inch per year until the 
average of thirty inches is reached at about the age of fifteen. 
During childhood the thorax should be carefully observed for 
deformities. 

Subluxations in the upper dorsal region may result in 
faulty postures, which in turn will result in various deformi- 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


295 


ties of the thorax. If this faulty posture is not corrected 
and the child is permitted to grow into adult life with 
the deformity, it can readily be seen that such deformity will 
become permanent. In such cases the dorsal subluxation 
should be adjusted early in life to overcome the faulty posture. 
Innate will then take care of this temporary deviation from 
the normal shape of the thorax. Deformities of the thorax 
often indicate Pott’s disease, curvatures of the spine, rickets, 
emphysema, empyema and cardiac disturbances. In such cases 
a very careful analysis should be made and the subluxations 
adjusted to remove the cause of the condition to which the 
deformity is adaptative. 

ABDOMEN 

The abdomen of the infant is very large in comparison 
with its proportion in later childhood. Up to about two years 
of age the circumference is the same as that of the chest, 
after which the chest develops more rapidly and the abdomen 
gradually assumes the proportions of the adult. However, 
the abdomen remains proportionately large up to the age of 
puberty. Unless this fact is recognized by the practitioner, 
he may suspect an abnormal enlargement of the abdomen. 
There are conditions in which an enlargement of the abdomen 
is typical, such as in various intestinal disorders and especially 
in rickets. In rickets the abdomen becomes gradually ex¬ 
tended and is known as pot belly, but with this there will 
be other symptoms of the dis-ease. If the abdomen seems 
abnormally large the chiropractor should carefully analyze the 
child to determine whether this is the result of some in¬ 
coordination or whether it is simply an idiosyncrasy of the 
child. 

WALKING 

The age at which children are able to sit alone, stand 
and walk, varies greatly. Some infants walk as early as the 


296 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


tenth month, while others are as late as the eighteenth month. 
The average age at which children are able to walk alone is 
from thirteen to fifteen months. Other things being equal, 
the age at which a child walks has little significance. The 
first voluntarily directed movements of the child occur at 
about four months of age, sometimes a little earlier, when 
the child begins to make an efifort to grasp objects which 
he sees about him. 

At about four or five months of age the average child is 
able to hold the head erect when the body is properly sup¬ 
ported. Between the'Seventh and eighth month the muscles 
have developed sufficiently for the child to sit erect by 
himself for a few minutes at a time. From this on, the 
child develops the sense of equilibrium very rapidly. Not 
later than nine months of age the child will indicate a ten¬ 
dency to stand and to bear the weight upon the feet. He 
may even be able to stand with a little assistance; then, in a 
very short time, if placed upon the floor he will show a ten¬ 
dency to pull himself up by a chair and stand alone. This 
is soon followed by the first steps and by the thirteenth month 
the child is walking alone freely. 

Mechanical devices intended to assist the child in learning 
to walk are of little value and may be an actual detriment. 
If the child is normal, has the proper care and a reasonable 
environment, Nature will put him on his feet at the earliest 
possible moment without injury to the delicate structures of 
the body. If the child is extremely backward in learning to 
walk a careful analysis should be made to determine the rea¬ 
son. Rickets is a very common cause for backwardness in 
children, not only in walking but in other functions as well. 
If a child is backward in learning to walk he should not be 
urged, but the reason for this backwardness should be sought 
out and the cause adjusted. 


CHAPTER II 

DENTITION 











CHAPTER II 


DENTITION 


The age at which the child begins to cut teeth varies 
greatly in the different individuals with no apparent reason. 
There are twenty deciduous or milk teeth and they make 
their appearance in the following order and at an average 
time as shown in the data. From six to eight months of age 
the lower central incisors appear. The four upper incisors 
do not appear until from the seventh to the tenth month; 
then the two lower lateral incisors and four anterior molars 
come through between the tenth and fourteenth month. From 
a year and a half to two years of age the four canines put 
in their appearance, and from two years to two and a half 
the four posterior molars. This completes the set. By the 
time a child is one year of age he should have six teeth; at 
the age of one and a half years, twelve teeth; at two years, 
sixteen teeth; and by the time he is two and a half years of 
age he should have the entire set of twenty. The table below 
gives the order in which the deciduous teeth appear and the 
approximate time when they may be expected. This time 
is subject to great variation. This variation does not neces¬ 
sarily indicate an abnormality. In some children the teeth 
appear much earlier than in others. The appearance of the 
first teeth may be as late as the tenth month in perfectly 
healthy children. However, if the delay is too great attention 
should be given the child. 


6 to 8 months of age 

7 to 10 “ “ “ 

10 to 14 “ “ “ 

16 to 24 “ “ “ 

22 to 30 “ “ “ 


.. the two lower central incisors. 
.. the four upper incisors. 

..two lateral incisors, four an¬ 
terior molars. 

..four canines. 

..the four posterior molars. 

299 







300 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


Normal children cut their teeth without any very severe 
symptoms. If the child is below normal, or if there are meric 
zones in which the structures are not receiving a sufficient 
amount of mental impulses, symptoms will be produced. 

At the time of dentition many incoordinations may appear, 
not because the process of cutting the teeth produces these 
conditions, but because the process requires a great expendi¬ 
ture of internal energy to produce the eruption of the teeth, 
hence at such times the forces of the body are very heavily 
drawn upon. The force that might be used in bringing about 
adaptation to other conditions must be used in this process. 
If the child is normal the growth of the teeth will produce 
no more symptoms than the growth of the nails. During the 
time teeth are coming through the gums there may be in¬ 
creased salivation and drooling and a tendency for the child 
to chew on the fingers. Irritability and restlessness at night 
are very frequent symptoms. It is quite common to have 
gastro-intestinal disturbances and especially diarrhea. 

In delicate and neurotic children all symptoms may be 
greatly exaggerated and may become alarming. There may 
be fever and acute indigestion. Diarrhea may become very 
severe and the child show marked decrease in weight as a 
result. If the child is having difficulty cutting the teeth it 
is evident that Innate Intelligence is unable to get the forces 
to the periphery. In this case the child should have im¬ 
mediate chiropractic attention. It is not uncommon for a 
temperature to run during the time just before the teeth come 
through the gums. In such cases a very careful analysis 
should be made and the child adjusted regularly until the 
symptoms have disappeared. 

In the majority of cases when there is incoordination dur¬ 
ing the process of dentition it will be found upon careful 
analysis that there are conditions responsible for the symptoms 
other than difficult dentition and they are only exaggerated 
by the dentition. 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


301 


After the teeth have made their appearance care should 
be taken that they are kept clean. This may be accomplished 
by washing the teeth and mouth. 

The eruption of the permanent teeth causes no great dis¬ 
turbance and there are usually no symptoms connected with 
their appearance other than a little discomfort locally. The 
appearance of the first permanent teeth do not disturb any 
of the temporary teeth, since they develop just posterior to 
them. These are the six-year-old molars. Following these 
we find the incisors displacing the incisors of the temporary 
teeth. Then comes the bicuspids taking the place of the 
temporary molars. These are followed by the canines which 
displace the canines of the temporary set. The next to appear 
are the second and third molars which occupy a place back 
of the canines where room has been made by the development 
of the jaw. 

The following table is given to enable the student to get at 
a glance an idea of the approximate age that the different 
permanent teeth make their appearance. 

6th year of age.First molars just posterior to the 

temporary molars. 

7th “ “ “ .First incisors displacing the former 

incisors. 

8th “ “ “ .Lateral incisors displacing the first 

lateral incisors. 

9th “ “ “ .Bicuspids displacing the temporary 

molars. 

11th “ “ “ .Canines displacing the canines of 

the temporary set. 

14th “ “ “ .Second molars appearing posterior 

to the first permanent molars. 

18th to 21st year.Third molars or wisdom teeth pos¬ 

terior to second permanent molars. 

Hygiene of the Teeth 

It should be remembered that these are the teeth that must 
serve the child during his entire life and therefore should 









302 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


receive the best of attention. Want of cleanliness is without 
doubt responsible for much of the trouble with the teeth of 
children. This is especially true among the poorer class of 
people and those who do not appreciate the value of proper 
personal hygiene. Even before there are any teeth the infant’s 
mouth should be washed and properly cleansed, and attention 
should be given the teeth as soon as they appear. The child 
should be taught early in life that it is very essential that the 
teeth be washed and cleaned regularly. Before the child is 
old enough to do this the nurse or attendant should do it for 
him. Food permitted to remain between the teeth will soon 
decompose in the temperature of the mouth, therefore care 
should be exercised that all particles of food be removed as 
soon as possible. Decomposing food has a very destructive 
effect upon the teeth and tends to destroy the enamel due 
to the chemical reaction. When there are no subluxations 
Innate will bring about an adaptation as far as possible, but 
it is impossible to change the reaction of a chemical without 
neutralizing it. Undoubtedly Innate does this in many in¬ 
stances, but it should not be necessary for Innate to do this 
extra work when the filth may be removed educationally. 

Lack of cleanliness is entirely too prevalent among some 
classes of people and it will be found that children who have 
not had the proper care of the teeth will suffer more or less 
with dental caries. The common belief that many conditions 
and incoordinations are caused from the teeth has been proven 
erroneous by Chiropractic, but the chiropractor should recog¬ 
nize the necessity for the proper care of the teeth and when 
they are in need of attention the patient should be sent to 
a dentist. Poor teeth interferes with mastication and pre¬ 
vents the food being properly prepared for gastric digestion. 
Severe nervous symptoms may arise from toothache. 

It must be remembered that proper hygienic methods alone 
are not sufficient to preserve the teeth in perfect condition. 
The teeth may be kept strictly clean and yet they decay, as 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


303 


a result of subluxations causing interference with the trans¬ 
mission of mental impulses. If the teeth are decaying the 
child should be given a thorough analysis and the subluxa¬ 
tions should be adjusted. However, the chiropractor does not 
take the place of the dentist. The child should be taken 
periodically to the dentist to have the teeth examined and 
any defects attended to; likewise he should be taken regularly 
to the chiropractor to have his subluxations adjusted. 

Adjustments during Dentition 

Most excellent results may be obtained in difficult dentition 
from chiropractic adjustments. The major for the local con¬ 
dition is M.C.P., but if there are accompanying conditions 
such as diarrhea or indigestion, the combination will include 
the zones that may be involved. If there are gastric symptoms 
then we will include an S.P.; if the intestinal tract is involved 
then it will be necessary to adjust a lumbar. There are some 
cases that require adjustments at K.P. During dentition the 
child should be taken to the chiropractor for an analysis and 
should receive adjustments to keep him in a healthful con¬ 
dition. Certainly it is much better to have the child in per¬ 
fect health during the time the teeth are appearing for under 
the most favorable conditions the cutting of the teeth is very 
trying on the child. The idea that cutting the teeth is re¬ 
sponsible for many abnormal symptoms in children is very 
old, but it is now generally conceded that the eruption of the 
teeth in the healthy child will cause no disturbance in his 
health. 




CHAPTER III 
ANALYZING INFANTS 






















. 



















































■ 














































































































































































































































































































































































* 
















CHAPTER III 

ANALYZING INFANTS 

One of the most baffling situations the chiropractor meets 
is in caring for sick babies. There are several reasons for 
this: The baby can give no assistance in the way of sub¬ 
jective symptoms. It is difficult to nerve trace with any degree 
of satisfaction and assurance of accuracy; it is even very 
difficult to keep the child still for palpation. Therefore, it 
becomes necessary to rely largely upon the objective symptoms 
and the palpation, with what verification may be obtained 
from nerve tracing and the spinograph. However, there is no 
class of patients in which the results are so gratifying as with 
the babies and small children, for they respond to adjustments 
more readily than does the adult. 

There is no time in the practice of the chiropractor when 
he needs to have better self-control than when he is taking 
care of infants. There is great need of every faculty that 
is employed in the analyzing and adjusting, especially if the 
child is seriously ill. Usually the parents are more or less 
excited and worried and are likely to keep urging the chiro¬ 
practor to do something and thus unduly influence him unless 
he is accustomed to such cases. If the child is in pain and 
crying it is likely to get on the nerve of every one present 
and this will tend to make the chiropractor nervous. He must 
be careful that these things do not influence him to act too 
hastily before he has had time to make a careful analysis. 

History of the Case 

Great care must of necessity be exercised in taking the 
analysis of the baby and of the small child. A very careful 
history should be taken. This, of course, must be obtained 
from the parents or nurse. This history should include such 

307 


308 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


points as whether birth was instrumental or natural, whether 
it was premature or full term, whether there were any pecu¬ 
liarities of respiration at birth, whether there have been any 
convulsions and what sickness, if any, the child has suffered 
with. Inquiry should be made relative to the condition of the 
bowels and kidneys, how the child sleeps, and if there is a 
tendency to cry out during sleep. If the child refuses to nurse 
or nurses with difficulty it may indicate an incoordination 
of the mouth or the throat. 

Objective Symptoms 

In view of the fact that the child can give no aid in the 
way of subjective symptoms, it is necessary for the chiro¬ 
practor to make most careful observations and substitute, as 
far as possible, the objective symptoms for the subjective 
ones. About the first thing we see when we begin the analysis 
is the baby’s face. It may reveal valuable information. A 
very careful study should be made of the facial expression 
and the condition of the eyes. In the face we take into con¬ 
sideration the color. We should look for pallor, cyanosis and 
jaundice; we notice whether there is perspiration, whether 
the face is cold and clammy or warm and moist; also we 
observe the expression as to the muscular condition, since 
there may be muscular spasms which will produce grimace. 
This is either the result of pain some place in the body or an 
abnormal action of the facial muscles. There may be a pinched 
expression or a look of fear or anxiety. In some severe cases 
the face will be expressionless, while in others it may be that 
of an adult. 

The condition of the eyes is important. They may have a 
dull expressionless look. The lids may droop and the eyeballs 
be sunken. In cerebral incoordinations there may be stra¬ 
bismus, or the eyeballs may be rolled upward and inward. 
These symptoms are significant and should all be very care- 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


309 


fully noted, for, as has been stated, there will be no chance 
to profit by subjective symptoms. 

After a careful observation of the face and facial expression 
has been made, the child should be undressed and placed in a 
convenient position for further observation. Before the cloth¬ 
ing is removed the room must be heated to a proper tem¬ 
perature so the infant will not take cold or be exposed to an 
atmosphere that will be distressing. A temperature suitable 
for the bath will be satisfactory. The child should be placed 
on his back and every movement of the body observed. Such 
movements as the flexing of the thighs on the abdomen, as 
in abdominal pain, may lead the chiropractor to a conclusion 
on the zone involved. 

The general appearance of the child must be carefully 
considered, whether the child is properly developed and 
whether or not there are any deformities. The chiropractor 
should look for dyspnea and other objective symptoms. A 
very careful inspection should be made of the spine to deter¬ 
mine any malformations or marked curvatures. The char¬ 
acter of the cry is sometimes important, as for instance in 
pneumonia or bronchitis there is a short, catchy cry; the 
cry of laryngitis and croup will be hoarse. In extreme prostra¬ 
tion, as in many cases of malnutrition, the cry will be very 
feeble. 

Respiration 

Since the chiropractor must depend almost entirely upon 
objective symptoms and upon the palpation of the infant in 
determining the character of the incoordination he should be 
thoroughly familiar with the characteristics of the normal 
child. The rate of respiration of the infant, especially during 
sleep, is of some importance. The following table is given 
by Holt and Howland and indicates the normal rate of respira¬ 
tion at different ages: 


310 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


At birth .35 per minute 

At the end of the first year.2 7 “ 

At two years.25 

At six years.22 “ 

At twelve years.20 


Respiration is very much faster than this when the child 
is awake. If the child is at all active it may be twice as fast. 
It is advisable to observe the respiration to determine whether 
it is normal or labored, shallow or deep, regular or irregular. 

Irregularity of respiration in infants is characteristic and 
must not be mistaken for indications of incoordination. The 
least excitement will disturb the rhythm; as a matter of fact, 
the only time there will be perfect rhythm is during sleep. 
In observing infants it will be found that the lungs sometimes 
do not expand equally. This is due to the delicate muscular 
walls of the thorax and does not necessarily indicate incoordi¬ 
nation. It is well to take this into consideration when observ¬ 
ing the infant. This must be very carefully considered when 
incoordinations of the lungs are suspected. Placed in certain 
positions one lung may expand very much more than the 
other in normal respiration; or in some positions, and some¬ 
times for unknown reasons, there may be practically no expan¬ 
sion in one lung for a short time. This peculiarity is due to 
the inability of Innate to maintain adaptation through the 
delicate structures of the thorax to the atmospheric pressure. 
This might be very misleading and result in the conclusion 
that one lung was badly affected when there would be noth¬ 
ing at all wrong. However, if there are symptoms which indi¬ 
cate an incoordination in the lungs there should be a very 
careful palpation made of the upper dorsal region to locate 
the subluxation and the hot box. 

In infants the respiration is altogether diaphragmatic; it 
is irregular at times; it may be superficial for a time and 
then deep. This irregularity continues in the child more or 







CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


311 


less until the seventh year. After this such an irregularity 
indicates some disturbance and should receive consideration. 

The muscular walls of the thorax are very feebly developed 
and are therefore very soft and yielding; a slight obstruction 
in respiration will result in a marked sinking of the thorax 
from the normal atmospheric air pressure. 

Pulse Rate 

It is not necessary to take the pulse of the infant, but 
it might be well to know what the normal pulse rate is at 
different ages. The following table will give the desired 
information: 

At birth the pulse rate is from. .130 to 150 per minute 

One month of age.120 to 130 “ “ 

One year of age.108 to 120 “ “ 

Two years of age. 90 to 108 “ “ 

Three years of age. 80 to 90 “ 

Seven years of age. 72 

Very slight disturbances will often increase the pulse rate 
out of all proportion to the severity of the condition. The 
heart will beat very much faster just from the handling of 
the child in making the analysis, or as a result of any excite¬ 
ment or crying. It may be very difficult to count the pulse 
because of its rapidity. 

Often a very moderate incoordination will result in a 
marked increase in the pulse rate and especially is this true 
in cases in which there is slight fever. 

An increase of the heart action does not, necessarily, mean 
that heart place should be adjusted. This increased action 
may be due to the natural adaptation because of handling or 
to nervousness at the presence of strangers. Especially is this 
likely to be true of the child that is Did enough to notice things. 
It is not uncommon to have the pulse beat increased as much 
as 25 beats per minute in this way. 

During sleep the pulse may be slightly irregular, even when 







312 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


the child is normal. In cerebral disturbances it will be slow 
and irregular. In cerebral tumor it may be as slow as 40 or 
50 beats per minute. In acute incoordinations the pulse rate 
may be very greatly increased. With incoordinations in such 
families as the poison, fever, degeneration, and some incoordi¬ 
nations in the spasms family, the pulse rate may be very high, 
even when the condition is not at all alarming. It is well to 
take this into consideration when observing a case so that 
the chiropractor will not be misled in making the analysis 
and that the objective symptoms may be of greatest value 
to him. 

Zones Involved 

In analyzing an infant it is well to keep in mind the zones 
in which incoordination is most commonly found. In the 
majority of cases these zones will include the gastro-intestinal 
tract, the respiratory tract, the kidney zones and the brain. 
Very frequently there will be incoordinations of the pharynx, 
tonsils and mouth. 

The incoordinations found in the digestive tract will in¬ 
clude all forms of indigestion and dysentery. Such incoordina¬ 
tions as pneumonia and bronchitis will involve the respiratory 
tract. From the kidneys there are the various conditions in¬ 
volving the poison family due to improper elimination. Men¬ 
ingitis and all forms of cerebral incoordinations as well as 
conditions of the eyes and ears are common to infancy and 
childhood. 

It must be remembered that with an infant grave symptoms 
may develop in a very short time, likewise recovery may take 
place very quickly following even the most alarming symp¬ 
toms. However, no chances should be taken for it is not 
uncommon for an infant previously in good health to become 
sick very suddenly and die within a few hours. Therefore, 
in handling children most careful attention should be given 
and conditions should always be regarded more or less serious 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


313 


until developments prove otherwise. The chiropractor must 
realize that his success in handling infants does not depend 
entirely upon his observations of the case, for with every 
patient there must be a thorough and complete analysis of 
the spine. The only value to be received from the observa¬ 
tions is that they may lead him to specific regions of the 
spine. 

The Child’s Cry 

It is not uncommon for an infant to cry with no apparent 
localized cause. This crying may continue for hours with no 
other symptoms. There will be no indication of colic or other 
symptoms to denote the seat of the pain. The crying is con¬ 
stant and, while in some cases may be quite violent, yet there 
are no paroxysmal attacks; this indicates that the pain is con¬ 
stant. It is easily distinguished from a hunger cry in that the 
child usually refuses to nurse. If the crying persists for hours 
there will be more or less exhaustion. Such cases are very 
pitiful and draw heavily upon the sympathies of the chiroprac¬ 
tor as well as upon other attendants. In such cases the first 
thing to do is to strip the infant of all clothing and look for 
open safety pins, rough places in the clothing, such as folds or 
wrinkles; foreign objects, as small buttons, for example. 
Usually, however, this will be done before the chiropractor 
is called. It may be an advantage for the chiropractor to 
observe the infant very carefully for a few minutes after the 
clothing has been removed, in an effort to locate the seat of 
the pain. However, this is not so very important because 
first, in most of these cases it is practically impossible to 
determine the location of pain, and second, because a very 
careful palpation of the child will always reveal the causative 
subluxation. In making the analysis the chiropractor should 
give himself plenty of time to make a thorough palpation. 
He should not be in too great a hurry to adjust the child 
merely because of his anxiety to relieve the crying. He must 


314 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


not allow the incessant crying of the child to work upon his 
nerve and destroy his efficiency in caring for the patient. In 
these cases the subluxation may be located in any part of 
the spine, although it is less often found in the cervical region. 
If there is a subluxation in the cervical region, great enough 
to produce this constant crying, there is very likely to be 
cerebral symptoms. In these cases the subluxations are usually 
quite exaggerated and very often the hot box becomes the 
determining factor. 

In a case recently an infant three weeks old had been 
crying constantly for several hours. The clothing had been 
removed and the child very carefully bathed and powdered; 
then instead of the clothing being replaced the child was 
wrapped in a blanket. Still the crying persisted. A very 
careful observation of the patient gave no information what¬ 
soever as to the possible location of the cause for the crying. 
There was nothing that would quiet the child. He finally 
grew so exhausted that the cry became little more than a 
whimper, beads of perspiration standing out over the entire 
body. There were no signs of colic or tympanites. A careful 
palpation revealed the sixth dorsal very badly subluxated and 
a slight subluxation of the first lumbar. These were adjusted 
and the child stopped crying almost instantly and in less 
than ten minutes was sleeping normally. There was no return 
of the abnormal crying and the child had no further adjust¬ 
ments. 

We have many such cases on record, but the citation of 
this one is sufficient to illustrate the results that are obtained 
in such cases. 

Palpating the Infant 

In palpating an infant the first thing to look for is the hot 
box. It may be possible to locate it very easily and if this 
is so it then becomes necessary only to list the direction 
in which the vertebra is subluxated. In looking for the hot 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


315 


box it is necessary to use care so as not to be misled by the 
difference in the temperature of the back due to some article 
of clothing being in contact with the back and raising the 
temperature in that region. Notice that there has not been 
some woolen garment, such as the band, pressing against the 
spine. To eliminate the possibility of thus being misled the 
entire back should be exposed to the atmosphere a sufficient 
length of time to allow the back to become influenced alike 
to the temperature of the air. The majority of incoordinations 
of infancy are acute, therefore the hot box is present. After 
the hot box is located then a very careful palpation should 
be made to determine the direction in which the vertebra is 
subluxated. It is not sufficient to consider that because the 
patient is an infant all that is necessary is to list the vertebra 
straight posterior and adjust it accordingly. Laterality, 
superiority and inferiority are quite as essential, and the chiro¬ 
practor should not be satisfied until he has convinced himself 
on the question of these directions. If there is no laterality, 
superiority or inferiority then the adjustment should be given 
straight toward the anterior. 

In palpating an infant it is usually best to place the child 
on the knees of an adult in the position for an adjustment. 
The child will be almost constantly on the move. It will 
therefore be necessary for the chiropractor to adapt himself 
to this constant moving. The child should be placed in as 
many different positions as possible to make the palpation. 
He may be held up over the shoulder of the mother or nurse; 
first on one side, then on the other, this giving opportunity 
to palpate with both hands and make comparisons. 

No effort should be made to force the child to be still. It is 
a good policy to hold the palpating fingers on the spine and 
let the child wiggle and squirm all he wants to, moving the 
spine beneath the palpating fingers of the chiropractor. In 
this way a comparison may be made of what is felt under 
the fingers while the child is moving. 


316 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


It is quite difficult to nerve trace an infant in any measure 
of accuracy because the infant can not cooperate to any degree 
of satisfaction. In some, however, nerve tracing may be used 
to a certain extent by producing slight pressure and noticing 
whether or not the child flinches. 

It is very much more difficult to palpate the cervical verte¬ 
brae of an infant than it is those of the dorsal and lumbar 
regions. The same technique and tactics are used, however. 
It is sometimes an advantage to place the child on the mother's 
lap in such a way that the head will be unsupported by the lap. 
One hand should support the child’s forehead, while the other 
hand palpates or it may be necessary to place the infant in 
some other position. The chiropractor should be sufficiently 
resourceful to find a way to get an accurate palpation of the 
cervical region. Here, again, he will meet with the difficulty 
of keeping the child still. This makes it necessary that he be 
very alert and at the instant it is possible to feel the vertebra 
to be ready to make his comparisons quickly and decide the 
direction in which it is subluxated. 

The cervical vertebrae of an infant are very hard to feel, 
but if one of the segments is subluxated sufficiently to cause 
pressure on a nerve that segment will be easier to feel because 
it is out of the median line; especially will it be easier to 
feel if it is subluxated posteriorly. Every possible means 
must be used to make an accurate palpation. If there is a sub¬ 
luxation in the cervical region there will very likely be symp¬ 
toms which will indicate it. Subluxations are not as com¬ 
monly found in the cervical region as in the other regions of 
the spine. 

In making an analysis of the infant the importance of the 
sacrum must not be overlooked. It will be remembered that 
the segments of the child’s sacrum are separated with cartilage 
and are subject to being subluxated. These segments coalesce 
later in adolescence and form the sacrum into one solid bone. 
Therefore it is highly important that the subluxations that 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


317 


may exist between the segments be adjusted before this process 
takes place. 

The tubercular ridge formed by the rudimentary spinous 
process in the median line of the posterior surface of the 
sacrum is of very little value in palpating the segments of 
the sacrum. It is best to palpate the articular crest on each 
side of the tubercular ridge. In this way it is possible to 
determine if one segment is more prominent on one side than 
on the other. This should be done very carefully and if a 
subluxation is found it should be adjusted on the side that 
is most prominent. The contact is on the articular ridge and 
the thumb may be used for nail point the same as in the dorsal 
region; or if the child is large enough nail point one may 
be used. 

Whenever possible a spinograph should be made of the 
child. This may not always be possible with the small child 
and with the very young infant it may be very difficult. In 
many acute incoordinations it is impracticable to try to get 
a spinograph, not because the spinograph would not be of 
value, but because it is difficult to get to the office to take it. 
In the chronic cases a spinograph should by all means be 
taken. Every possible means should be used to verify the 
palpation. 







CHAPTER IV 


ADJUSTING INFANTS 





CHAPTER IV 


ADJUSTING INFANTS 

The recoil is used in adjusting a child the same as in 
adjusting an adult. The young infant can be placed upon the 
knees of the mother or nurse instead of being placed on an 
adjusting table. The ordinary adjusting table will be too 
large for the real small infant. Care must be used that the 
child is placed in the correct position for the adjustment and 
that the neck and head are properly supported. Placing the 
child on a pillow on the lap of an adult is not satisfactory 
because the pillow is too soft and makes it more difficult to 
move the vertebrae. If the child is adjusted on the mother’s 
lap care must be exercised that the mother’s skirt is not 
drawn tightly for it is best to leave the infant’s abdomen 
unsupported or at least not to have too solid a support. 

When the mother holds the babe on her lap there is a 
tendency for her to raise her heel off the floor so as to make 
the knee supporting the child’s head higher than the other. 
When the adjustment is given the knee will not be sufficiently 
solid to support the child and the vertebra will not move. 
For this reason the chiropractor must see that the mother’s 
heels are both placed squarely on the floor. It is a good plan 
after the contact has been taken and the chiropractor is ready 
to give the adjustment to ask if both heels are on the floor. 
Nine times out of ten one heel will be lifted and the toe will 
be supporting the weight of the child. 

In adjusting small infants in the dorsal and lumbar regions 
the side of the thumb may be used for nail point. In getting 
the contact one should palpate in the usual manner, find the 
vertebra that is to be adjusted, remove all fingers except the 
pointer finger, turn the hand so the finger is parallel with 

321 


322 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


the child’s spine, then instead of placing the pisiform bone 
of the nail hand, place the side of the thumb in exactly the 
same manner as if it was nail point one. This being done, 
remove the pointer finger. Then instead of placing the ham¬ 
mer hand on the nail hand as in using the pisiform bone for 
nail point, grasp the thumb that is being used for nail point 
between the thumb and finger of the hammer hand and press 
the tissues tightly to make the side of the nail thumb firm. 
The thrust is given with a recoil just the same as in the usual 
manner. 

It is best not to use too much force until it is determined 
just the amount required to move the vertebra. One will be 
surprised, however, at the amount of force required to move 
the vertebrae of a very small infant. It should be remembered 
that the vertebrae must move if we expect to get results. 
It must also be remembered that the child is small and that 
it is necessary to adapt the amount of force used to the size 
of the patient. It is not possible to injure a child with a 
chiropractic adjustment, but it is possible to apply an awk¬ 
ward force, supposed to be a corrective force, in such a way 
that subluxations may be produced. 

This method will be used only with the smallest infants. 
When the child is a few months old the pisiform bone may 
be used in exactly the same manner as with the adult. The 
only difference is that the amount of force will be suited to 
the size of the patient. In case a straight posterior subluxa¬ 
tion and a double transverse adjustment is given on a single 
vertebra the adjuster may use his two fingers, the first and 
second, to get contact on the transverse processes. The nail 
hand is then placed across the two fingers and the adjust¬ 
ment is given with the recoil. It will require very little force 
to move a vertebra of an infant on the transverse processes. 

Care must be exercised that the neck is properly sup¬ 
ported when an adjustment in the cervical region is given. It 
is best to place the child on an infant’s adjusting table when- 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


323 


ever possible. When this is impracticable the child may be 
placed on the lap of an adult the same as for an adjustment 
in the other regions of the spine. If the head 'is allowed to 
remain unsupported as is so often the case when larger babies 
are adjusted in this manner, there is danger of moving some¬ 
thing that should not be moved when the adjustment is made. 
Therefore that part of the neck directly beneath the vertebra 
to be adjusted must be placed solidly on the mother’s knee. 
The same technique is used with older patients in that the 
face is turned in the direction of the laterality of the subluxa¬ 
tion to be adjusted. 

With the small infant it may be difficult or even impossible 
to get nail point two in position to adjust, especially in the 
middle cervical region. In this event the side of the first 
finger may be used to an advantage. This will be used, how¬ 
ever, only with the smallest infants. In using nail point two 
it will be an advantage to get the contact near the distal end 
of the fifth metacarpal bone instead of at the center as in 
using nail point two on an adult. In adjusting the atlas and 
axis it is very easy to get the contact with nail point two 
in the usual manner. 

The cervical vertebrae of the infant are very small and 
extreme case must be exercised in adjusting. Sufficient force 
must be used to move the vertebra. 

The importance of proper attention to adjusting the seg¬ 
ments of the sacrum of the infant and small child can not be 
overestimated. During childhood the child is subject to many 
falls and jars which are likely to be centered upon the sacrum. 
These segments being separated by cartilage are relatively 
easily subluxated. If they become subluxated in youth inco¬ 
ordinations may develop, which in later life will result in 
various degrees of discomfort or even defects which will 
become permanent and for which nothing can be done. There 
are many conditions in adult life which are without doubt the 
result of pressure upon sacral nerve and this pressure can not 


21 


324 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


be released because of the inability to move the subluxated 
segments after they become coalesced. 

Many deformities and incoordinations in these zones could 
be averted by proper attention to the segments of the sacrum 
during childhood. When parents realize the importance of 
this they will take their children to their chiropractor period¬ 
ically to have the sacrum as well as the rest of the spinal 
column palpated. Then the subluxations that have been pro¬ 
duced will be taken care of before they become chronic and 
more difficult to correct. 

A careful palpation of the segments of the sacrum should 
be made. The most common subluxation is a rotation 
resulting in that segment being more prominent on one side 
than on the other. When a segment is found to be posterior 
on one side the adjustor should stand on the opposite side 
and palpate in the usual manner finding the tubercle of the 
segment subluxated, measuring to a point midway between 
the tubercle and the ilium with the second finger of the 
palpating hand. This finger should then be replaced with the 
second finger of the opposite hand and the pisiform bone of 
the palpating hand should be used for nail point. If the 
patient is a very small infant do not change nail hands but 
use the thumb of the usual nail hand and adjust the same as 
adjusting a dorsal or lumbar vertebra when using the thumb 
for nail point. 


CHAPTER V 


RESPIRATORY SYSTEM 


































































































. 
































CHAPTER V 

RESPIRATORY SYSTEM 

Children and infants are subject to the same general class 
of dis-eases as are adults and there are no dis-eases which 
are particularly peculiar to childhood. The incoordinations 
are not peculiar but rather the children as patients are peculiar. 
The incoordinations of the child’s respiratory system are prac¬ 
tically the same as those affecting the respiratory system of 
the adult but there are certain peculiarities of the patient that 
should be considered. Our work will be principally the con¬ 
sideration of these peculiarities rather than the incoordinations 
themselves. It is not our thought to produce a work on 
symptomatology. 

ACUTE NASAL CATARRH 

This is also called .coryza, cold in the head and acute 
rhinopharyngitis. It is a very common condition in infants 
and small children and one that is readily recognized and 
easily handled chiropractically. It is very essential that we 
be able to distinguish between a simple acute nasal catarrh 
and the coryza which accompanies such conditions as measles, 
influenza, and nasal diphtheria. If in these conditions there 
is profuse discharge tinged with blood for two or three weeks, 
nasal diphtheria should be suspected, even though there are 
no other very serious symptoms. With a very young infant 
a persistent acute nasal catarrh may indicate syphilis. In such 
a case, a careful watch should be kept for more positive 
symptoms. 

Symptoms 

The onset may be more or less sudden with sneezing and 
a slight fever. There is a profuse discharge from the nose 

327 


328 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


in severe cases which at first is seromucous and later becomes 
mucopurulent. The mucous membrane is red and swollen. 
The equation for the mucous membrane is calorific plus and 
N.C.R. for the mucopurulent discharge. In severe cases there 
may be a temperature of 103° F. to 105° F. with marked 
constitutional disturbances. In the mild cases the symptoms 
will be less severe and many times very transient. 

Results are obtained very quickly with acute nasal catarrh 
or coryza and when the adjustment is given at the beginning 
of the symptoms there will be no complications. However, if 
the condition is allowed to run until it has gained momentum, 
longer time will be required for results and there may be dis¬ 
tressing complications. If the condition is not corrected at 
once the throat may become involved and even the bronchi, 
which may develop into broncopneumonia. Retropharyngeal 
abscesses may also develop. Nasal catarrh may continue 
until it becomes chronic. 

Equation 

Primarily the equation in nasal catarrh is M —. In the 
capillaries of the mucous membrane lining the nasal passages 
this results in hyperemia of the blood vessels and exudation. 
This results in C+ in the mucous membrane. The exudation 
which at first is a colorless fluid soon becomes mucopurulent 
from the C-f- so the equation for the exudation becomes N.C.R. 

Family 

The family for the C+ condition in the mucous membrane 
is fever family, while the N.C.R. condition is in the degenera¬ 
tions family. The products of the degeneration may produce 
symptoms in the poison family. 

Adjustment 

The major adjustment for acute nasal catarrh is M.C.P. 
and K.P. 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


329 


Conditions of this kind are sometimes aggravated by the 
care which the child receives at the hands of a careless mother. 
She may keep the child too warm or not warm enough. Often 
a child is dressed so warmly that the least exertion will cause 
profuse perspiration. Then the child '‘takes cold” because of 
the inability of Innate Intelligence to bring about an intel¬ 
lectual adaptation in so short a time. An infant may be and 
should be kept very warm, but as the child grows older he 
should be allowed sufficient freedom, especially in the summer 
time, to permit of exercise and yet not become too warm. 

The hygienic measures to be used, are attention to the 
sleeping rooms, which should be properly ventilated, always 
having plenty of air at night, and the house temperature 
during the day. This should be from 65°F to 68° F. 

FOREIGN BODIES LODGED IN THE NOSE 

Children often in their play will place such foreign bodies 
as peas, beans, buttons, beads and other small objects in their 
noses. These set up a mechanical irritation and produce 
swelling of the mucous membrane and often pain. If the 
object remains for any length of time there is likely to be 
a profuse discharge of a mucopurulent character. If there is 
such a discharge from only one, nostril special attention should 
be given to determine the presence of any foreign body and 
if there be one the child should be taken to a surgeon at once. 
If the discharge continues following the removal it will be 
due to a subluxation at M.C.P., which is interfering with the 
transmission of mental impulses preventing normal adaptation 
and reparation taking place. This should be adjusted. How¬ 
ever, if there are no subluxations the injury which was done 
by the mechanical obstruction will be repaired in a short 
time. 

CHRONIC NASAL CATARRH 

Chronic nasal catarrh, also called chronic rhinitis, is a 
chronic inflammation of the mucous membrane lining the 


330 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


nasal passages and pharynx. There may be structural changes 
take place resulting in injury to the organs of smell, taste, 
hearing, speech and respiration. 

Symptoms 

The mucous membrane becomes congested and swollen. 
There is a constant mucous or mucopurulent discharge from 
the nose. The air passages may be partially or completely 
closed. If the child is old enough the nose may be easily 
freed from this discharge by blowing. If the child is not old 
enough to do this great inconvenience and discomfort will be 
experienced. The upper lip may become irritated, swollen and 
permanently enlarged and prominent from the constant blow¬ 
ing and wiping the nose. The excretion produces a constant 
irritation. There is a marked tendency on the part of the 
child to constantly pick at the nose; this tends to increase 
the irritation both of the nose and the upper lip. Usually 
there are adenoid growths, which will produce mouth breath¬ 
ing and may interfere with the function of hearing. A very 
marked characteristic is the inclination for the child to con¬ 
tinually snuffle. 

If the condition is allowed to remain for a long time with¬ 
out adjustments, ulcerations may occur on the mucous mem¬ 
brane; the discharge from this will be very offensive. In the 
atrophic form ozena is very common. Ozena is a very fetid 
discharge from the nasal cavity associated with ulcerations 
which may involve the bones of the nose. 

Equation 

The equation is the same as the acute form with the excep¬ 
tion that the N.C.R. condition becomes more prominent. 

Family 

Same as the acute form except that the degenerations 
family takes precedence over the other families involved. 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


331 


Major Adjustment 

The adjustment is the acute condition—M.C.P. and K.P. 
A greater length of time will be required, however, than in 
the acute stage, but the prognosis is always good. In caring 
for a child in this condition the parents and attendants should 
exercise care that there is no unnecessary irritation of the 
nose and local parts. The nose should be kept clean and as 
soft a handkerchief as possible used in wiping the nose. Dur¬ 
ing the process of retracing discharge from the nose will pass 
through practically the same stages as during the progress 
from the acute stage. The process is just reversed. The 
scabs that form in the nose now begin to soften and the dis¬ 
charge continues to change until it becomes as it was in the 
beginning of the acute stage in a thin watery discharge. 
Finally the discharge ceases entirely and the child is well. 

EPISTAXIS 

Nose bleed does not often occur in infants but is quite 
common during childhood. It is the result of interference 
with the transmission of motor mental impulses to the mus¬ 
cular walls of the capillaries of the nose. Epistaxis may 
result from a fall or blow on the nose. It occurs as an early. 
symptom of different incoordinations such as typhoid fever 
and measles; as a matter of fact, it occurs in the hemorrhagic 
form of all eruptive fevers, in some cases of diphtheria, and 
in dis-eases of the heart and blood vessels. 

Epistaxis is often considered of little consequence, but it 
may be a very serious condition and even result in death. 
It is especially serious when occurring in infants. 

Equation 

The equation for epistaxis is M. There is a relaxation of 
the muscular walls of the capillaries resulting in the hemor¬ 
rhage. 


332 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


Family 

Epistaxis is in the prolapsis family due to the relaxation 
of the muscular fibers in the walls of the capillaries. 

Adjustment 

The adjustment for epistaxis is M.C.P., and in most cases 
this is fourth cervical. In some cases the results come in¬ 
stantly. The prognosis is always good when the proper 
adjustment is given. 

INCOORDINATIONS OF THE LARYNX 

CROUP 

Croup is an inflammation of the larynx characterized by 
a more or less severe spasm of the laryngeal muscles. This 
spasmodic contraction distinguishes it from similar affections 
in adults. The spasm produced is very often more marked 
and results in more severe symptoms than does the inflamma¬ 
tion. This incoordination is also called spasmodic laryngitis 
and catarrhal croup. 

Symptoms 

In spasmodic laryngitis or croup there is a slight catarrhal 
inflammation of the mucous membrane lining the larynx and 
a marked spasm of the larynx. There may be a slight dis¬ 
charge from the nose and slight hoarseness. The attacks 
usually come on at night with a hollow, metallic cough. About 
this time there is difficult breathing and the cough becomes 
more severe and of a teasing nature, the child making every 
possible effort to keep from coughing. The voice becomes 
husky but is seldom lost. There is rapid pulse and a slight 
temperature seldom over 101° F. The attack lasts three or 
four hours, after which the child will fall asleep. The dyspnea 
is aggravated and the spasm increased by excitement. During 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


333 


the day the child will appear well except for the slight cough 
and hoarseness, but the second night the attack will return 
with about the same degree of severity as that of the -first 
night. Usually the attack may not return the third night or 
if it does it will be less severe. 

Spasmodic laryngitis should not be confused with laryn¬ 
gismus stridulus, membraneous croup or with acute catarrhal 
laryngitis. According to Holt and Howland laryngismus 
stridulus occurs only in infants, and there is not only stridulous 
breathing, but also periods of complete arrest of respiration. 

Major Adjustment 

Lower cervical and S.P. is the combination major to use 
in this incoordination. Under adjustments results are often 
obtained immediately with no recurrence of the attack the 
following night. 

In chronic cases enlarged tonsils and adenoid growths may 
be found. This, however, will not change the adjustment or 
the combination, but will increase the amount of time re¬ 
quired to completely correct the condition so far as the chron- 
icity is concerned. It will not interfere with the relief from 
acute attacks. 

LARYNGISMUS STRIDULUS 

This incoordination, according to Holt and Howland, occurs 
only in infancy. It is characterized by muscular spasms in 
the larynx with marked dyspnea. 

Symptoms 

There may be complete arrest of respiration for short 
periods, during which there will also be a marked lack of 
oxygenation of the blood. There may be recurrence of these 
attacks several times a day, and unless adjustments are given 
may last for weeks. There may be general convulsions and 
carpopedal spasms which are spasmodic contractions of the 


334 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


joints of the hands and feet. During the periods of arrested 
breathing the face becomes cyanosed. This terminates with 
a slight cough or a high-pitched crowing sound produced by 
the sudden inspiration of air. Because of this it is sometimes 
called “child crowing.” It is also known as thymic asthma 
and spasms of the glottis. 

Major Adjustment 

The combination major is lower cervical and stomach place. 
Under adjustments results are obtained in a very short time, 
in many cases almost instantly. 

ACUTE CATARRHAL LARYNGITIS 

This incoordination is found in children from one to five 
years of age. It may be severe and even cause death. It 
may be a secondary condition following measles, scarlet fever, 
influenza and other like incoordinations; however, it may re¬ 
sult directly and not be associated with any other condition. 
It is often aggravated by inhaling steam, gases or irritating 
dusts. 

There is congestion and inflammation of the mucous mem¬ 
brane lining the larynx; there is swelling and dryness of the 
membrane followed by an exudate which may become profuse. 
If the swelling is exaggerated there will be stenosis of the 
larynx. The vocal cords become swollen and produce aphonia. 

Symptoms 

The symptoms are hoarseness, dry metallic cough, which 
may become very severe and teasing. The onset is sudden 
with a marked tendency to cough, especially during the night. 
The voice often is entirely lost and the larynx becomes sore 
and painful. There is dyspnea and the respirations are short 
and shallow. 

In some cases which develop more slowly there will be 
coryza for a day or two preceding the severe attack, or the 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


335 


laryngeal symptoms may precede the acute symptoms. The 
onset, however, may be very rapid and the most severe symp¬ 
toms be present within a very few hours after the manifesta¬ 
tion of the first symptom. In the well developed, case the 
cough is dry, metallic, barking and stridulus. The inspira¬ 
tion is labored. The dyspnea is severe, occurring in paroxysms 
during the night. There is temperature, rapid pulse and in¬ 
creased respiration. If the inflammation extends down into 
the bronchi it will result in bronchopneumonia. Laryngeal 
obstruction may occur often and prove very severe. 

It is sometimes very difficult and in some cases impossible 
to distinguish acute catarrhal laryngitis from membranous 
laryngitis or laryngeal diphtheria. This is not so important 
to the chiropractor, for if adjustments are given soon enough 
results will be obtained before positive diagnostic symptoms 
have time to develop. However, it is well to be thoroughly 
informed on the difference in the symptoms since the chiro¬ 
practor is sometimes not called in until the condition is well 
under way. At the onset the two conditions are very much 
alike, which is very reasonable to the chiropractor, since the 
only difference is in degree of severity, due to a different 
combination, and a difference in degree of the functions in¬ 
volved resulting from the same combination of subluxations. 
In the catarrhal condition the temperature is usually greater 
than in the membranous form. The dyspnea in catarrhal 
laryngitis is usually paroxysmal; it is less exaggerated dur¬ 
ing the day but worse at night, while the membranous 
type is constant and rapidly becomes more exaggerated. The 
dyspnea occurs on both inspiration and expiration, while in 
the catarrhal form it occurs only on inspiration. If the culture 
shows Klebs-Loeffler bacilli it is considered laryngeal diph¬ 
theria. 


336 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


Major Adjustment 

As has been stated, the chiropractor gives the same adjust¬ 
ment whether it is membranous or catarrhal. The major com¬ 
bination is L.C. and S.P. with K.P. Excellent results are 
obtained from adjustments in these cases. When the first 
symptoms are manifest adjustments should be given imme¬ 
diately in order to get the best results. The usual difficulty 
in such cases is that the parents consider the condition only 
a cold and of little importance. Therefore, they neglect taking 
the child to a chiropractor until great momentum has de¬ 
veloped. Such cases necessitate a greater amount of time 
before results are obtained. 

CHRONIC LARYNGITIS 

This form is simply a prolongation of the acute form, but 
may be associated with adenoid growths of the pharynx, with 
tuberculosis of the larynx, with syphilis or with new growths 
in the larynx. 

Symptoms 

The symptoms are similar to those in the acute stage 
except they are not so severe. 

It is not uncommon to find adenoid growths in the pharynx 
of the very young infant. There is a superficial inflammation 
of the mucous membrane producing a local calorific plus. This 
is the result of interference with transmission of mental im¬ 
pulses to these tissues and when this interference is removed 
Innate Intelligence will function normally and the growths 
will disappear. 

Major Adjustment 

The adjustment is the same as in the case of acute laryn¬ 
gitis. The results will be slower in the chronic case than in 
the acute case, but in the course of time the child will be 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


33 7 


entirely relieved of the condition without the aid of surgery. 
If the proper adjustment is given during the acute attack the 
condition will never reach the chronic state. 

A chronic laryngitis is often accompanied by papillomatous 
growths which occur very early in life, in most cases during 
the first year. This condition occurs more often in boys than 
in girls. The size and location of the growths determine the 
severity of the symptoms. There is paroxysmal cough, 
dyspnea, loss of voice, and hoarseness. The symptoms usually 
develop so slowly that they do not attract attention until the 
growth has attained quite a size. Holt states that the prog¬ 
nosis is usually serious from a surgical standpoint because 
there is danger of bronchopneumonia following the operation. 
It is also stated that operations have been largely given up 
because of the tendency of the papilloma to return in increas¬ 
ing numbers. These tumors are the result of the interference 
with transmission of mental impulses to the tissues, preventing 
the normal personification of Innate Intelligence in the pro¬ 
duction of function. Under adjustments which results in the 
restoration of the normal transmission excellent results are 
obtained. In the course of time under adjustments the growths 
will disappear and with them all the symptoms of the chronic 
laryngitis. Adjustments should be given just as soon as the 
growths are suspected and kept up until the symptoms have 
disappeared. 

TUBERCULAR LARYNGITIS 

Tubercular laryngitis is seldom found in infants and is 
rare even in later childhood. Usually pulmonary tuberculosis 
develops later; by some it is considered to be always asso¬ 
ciated with it. There is cough and hoarseness with aphonia, 
expectoration of mucopurulent or in some instances bloody 
character. Microscopic examination of the sputum reveals 
the tubercle bacilli. Results are obtained under adjustments, 
providing a sufficient amount of time is allowed to permit 


338 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


Innate to overcome the momentum and rebuild the struc¬ 
tures that have been destroyed. 

FOREIGN BODIES IN LARYNX AND BRONCHI 

Children are likely to acquire the habit of putting small 
objects, such as buttons, small playthings, and even pins, 
into their mouths. If the child becomes frightened, tries to 
cough, laugh or cry that which is held in the mouth at the time 
is likely to be drawn into the larynx and may lodge there, 
especially if it is sharp or has rough edges. If, however, it 
is a smooth object, such as a button or bean, it is more likely 
to pass into the bronchi, usually the right one. 

When the foreign body enters the larynx there will be 
violent coughing which may result in the expulsion of the 
object. If it is not immediately expelled but becomes im¬ 
pacted in the larynx there will be marked dyspnea and even 
death from suffocation. 

When the foreign body passes the larynx it will lodge, 
usually, in one of the bronchi or at the bifurcation of the 
trachea. If this occurs there will be localized pain over the 
region of the foreign body. There is a cough and may be 
spitting of blood. The irritation will result in a local inflam¬ 
mation; this may result in the formation of an abscess which 
may prove serious. In some cases following such conditions 
there is prolonged illness resembling pulmonary tuberculosis 
during which there may be sufficient relaxation in the muscular 
walls of the bronchi to permit the foreign body being expelled 
during a paroxysm of coughing. This has occurred in many 
cases. Following the expulsion of the foreign body the patient 
recovers very rapidly. In some cases there are repeated 
attacks of pneumonia. The health of the child becomes greatly 
impaired and thus he becomes easily susceptible to the acute 
attacks which may prove too much for the adaptability of 
the body. 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


339 


Symptoms 

The symptoms of a foreign body in the larynx are char¬ 
acteristic and consists in the very sudden appearance of the 
attacks and also in the severity of the symptoms. There will 
be a history of something having been in the child’s mouth, 
or the possibility of the child having placed some object in 
his mouth. A metallic body can always be located by means 
of the X-ray. 

Ordinarily these cases do not come within the scope of 
Chiropractic. There might be a subluxation which would 
prevent adaptation from taking place, and if so, an adjust¬ 
ment might result in a relaxation of the muscles to such an 
extent that the foreign body could be expelled by coughing. 
These cases are traumatic and should be taken to a competent 
surgeon at once. 

EDEMA OF THE GLOTTIS 

This is a dropsical condition of the glottis and is very rare 
in infancy or early childhood. Usually there will be other 
symptoms indicating abnormality of the kidneys. 

Symptoms 

If the edema is great enough there will be attacks of 
suffocation because of the interference with inspiration. There 
is very little if any interference with expiration. There may 
be hoarseness, painful and difficult swallowing and a cough. 
The symptoms may come on suddenly and develop very 
rapidly and soon result fatally. 

Equation and Major Adjustment 

The equation for the local condition is secretion plus (T+). 
If the condition is involved with nephritis the equation for the 
nephritis is calorific plus (C+) in the kidneys with N.C.R. in 
suppurative nephritis, which results in excretion minus (E—). 
The major adjustment is K.P. with S.P. and local L.C. 


22 


340 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


INCOORDINATIONS OF THE LUNGS 

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 

The thorax of the infant is shaped somewhat different from 
that of the adult, being more cylindrical, the antero-posterior 
being nearly the same as the transverse diameter. The trans¬ 
verse diameter begins to increase about the third year and 
this continues until puberty when the typical conical or dome¬ 
shaped thorax is attained. 

In the infant and young child the walls of the thorax are 
exceedingly yielding and elastic. This is because the greater 
portion is made up of cartilaginous tissue before the completed 
ossification of the bony structures has taken place. 

The thoracic muscles are imperfectly developed. This 
makes the thoracic walls very thin. In well nourished infants 
the walls are made thicker by the abundance of fat which is 
found deposited on them. The diaphragm is very high in the 
infant and this greatly decreases the capacity of the thorax 
as well as does the frequent distention of the stomach and 
intestinal tract because of the accumulation of gas. The 
trachea and bronchi of the infant are comparatively larger 
than in the adult, the air cells are much smaller, and for this 
reason a slight acute congestion will interfere almost as much 
with their function as will hepatization. This necessitates im¬ 
mediate action in all conditions which involve the respiratory 
tract, and especially those which affect the lungs or bronchi. 
In all such cases results are obtained very quickly under 
adjustments. In the child there is a greater tendency for the 
inflammation to spread in the lung tissue than in an adult. 

ACUTE CATARRHAL BRONCHITIS 

There is probably no one acute incoordination affecting 
infants and children that is so common as acute catarrhal 
bronchitis, commonly called cold in the chest. During the 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


341 


cold months, and especially in the late winter and early spring, 
there are a great many cases. The chiropractor who is careful 
in handling these incoordinations will find no class of cases 
that will give more satisfactory results. The analyzing must 
be done very carefully and the vertebrae must be moved from 
the very beginning because if results are not obtained quickly 
the inflammation will spread to the air vesicles very rapidly. 
When this occurs there is danger of serious complications. 

Symptoms 

In the more mild form of bronchitis the symptoms develop 
rather gradually and the first noticed may be a coryza or nasal 
catarrh. As the bronchi become involved there will be a slight 
rise in the temperature, noticeably increased respiration, and 
a slight cough. There may be restlessness, anorexia and 
vomiting, usually caused by swallowing the mucous that is 
coughed up. 

Rales are heard over the entire chest. These appear very 
early and may remain for some little time after all other 
symptoms have disappeared. It is very common to hear coarse 
rales with a very slight cold in the young infant. 

If the condition is permitted to go for some little time 
without adjustments the symptoms become more severe. The 
cough becomes more serious, there is dyspnea, increased fever 
and a moderate degree of prostration which increases as time 
goes on. During inspiration the nostrils will be noticeably 
dilated. In most cases there is great difficulty in nursing. In 
the”later stages - there is usually great prostration. The cry 
becomes feeble and the cough weak, there is rapid superficial 
respiration and feeble pulse. The facial expression is dull and 
there may be stupor and apathy. The attacks may come on 
very suddenly and terminate fatally in a very short time. 
Therefore it is necessary for action from the adjustments to 
be obtained as quickly as possible. 



342 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


Equation and Family 

The subluxation at lower cervical or upper dorsal region 
interferes with the transmission of mental impulses to the 
bronchi. The function primarily involved is motor which 
results in a relaxation of the muscular walls of the capillaries. 
This produces hyperemia and congestion from which there is 
an exudate of mucous. At first it is clear, but with normal 
heat applied to this exudate it soon becomes mucopurulent. 
This gives calorific plus, therefore the equation for the mucous 
membrane lining the bronchi is calorific plus (C+) with N.C.R. 
for the mucopurulent discharge. The equation for the general 
fever is C+. The family is fever and degenerations. 

The major adjustment for acute catarrhal bronchitis is L.C. 
or Up.D. with K.P. In some cases C.P. will be included in 
the combination. 


CHRONIC BRONCHITIS 

It can readily be seen that chronic bronchitis would not 
often be found with the very young infant. In early childhood 
it is more often found and frequently follows the acute attack 
or is the sequel of measles, influenza or whooping-cough. Un¬ 
hygienic surroundings may tend to influence and exxagerate 
the condition. 

Symptoms 

There is little or no fever, although the cough is bad; there 
is very little if any dyspnea. The condition becomes worse 
during cold weather, and the patient is usually subject to 
attacks of acute bronchitis. There may be no constitutional 
symptoms and the general health of the patient may not be 
greatly affected. 

If there is a light rise in the bodily temperature regularly 
in the evening, with loss of weight and slight anemia, pul¬ 
monary tuberculosis should be. suspected. 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


343 


Major Adjustment 

The adjustment for chronic bronchitis is the same as that 
for acute bronchitis, Up.D. and K.P. If the child receives 
adjustments during the acute attack the chronic condition will 
not develop. 

A child suffering with chronic bronchitis should be given 
adjustments immediately and the results will be most 
satisfactory, complete recovery resulting in a very short 
time. 


BRONCHIAL CROUP (Fibrinous Bronchitis) 

This incoordination is relatively rare in small children, 
except in diphtheria, when it appears as a contamination into 
the bronchi from the larynx and trachea. It may be acute or 
chronic and affects all ages from infancy to puberty. The 
characteristics are severe dyspnea and the coughing up of 
fibrinous casts from the large bronchi after which there is a 
marked improvement. As the exudate collects again the symp¬ 
toms reappear. In the chronic form there is dyspnea and 
expectoration of fibrinous casts. 

Major Adjustment 

The adjustment for fibrinous bronchitis is the same as that 
for other forms of bronchitis. The prognosis is excellent, pro¬ 
viding adjustments are given in time to enable Innate to over¬ 
come the momentum. Results are obtained in a very short 
time. 

PNEUMONIA 

Aside from digestive disturbances, the most common 
incoordinations affecting infants are those involving the lungs, 
and especially as a sequel following the so-called infectious 
dis-eases. The different types of pneumonia are named accord¬ 
ing to the area of the lungs involved and the nature of the 


344 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


changes affecting them. The two general divisions are 
broncho-pneumonia and lobar pneumonia. These two prin¬ 
cipal groups are divided into several subdivisions according 
to the particular pathology and stage of development. It is 
not of vital importance to the chiropractor to know just what 
part of the lungs or bronchi is involved or the nature of the 
pathology. He must, however, be sufficiently familiar with 
symptoms to correctly determine the zone in which the in¬ 
coordination is located. In bronchopneumonia the entire 
bronchial wall of the small bronchi is affected, while in lobar 
pneumonia the bronchitis is usually very superficial and the 
terminal bronchi and alveoli are filled with a fibrant exudate. 
An entire lobe may be involved or the inflammation may 
involve only part of a lobe. Very often the two varieties, 
bronchopneumonia and lobor pneumonia will be present in 
the same case, one variety affecting one part of the lung, 
while the other variety will affect another part of the lung. 
In children by far the larger percentage of cases of pneumonia 
is of the bronchopneumonia type; however, as has been stated, 
the type of pneumonia is of little importance, but the location 
of the zone or zones is of vital importance. 

Bronchopneumonia occurs most often during the winter 
months, being more prevalent in late winter or early spring. 
One or both lungs may be involved, but the most common 
seat of the inflammation is the lower left lobe, or if in front 
only, the right apex. The local subluxation producing this 
condition will be found to be the second or third dorsal 
vertebra, which is producing the pressure upon the nerves 
and interfering with the transmission of mental impulses. As 
a result there is a relaxation of the muscular fibers of the 
blood vessels which results in a distention of these vessels 
in the affected area. The seat of the catarrhal inflam¬ 
mation is in the mucous membrane of the large and small 
bronchi. 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


345 


Symptoms 

The most frequent type of bronchopneumonia among in¬ 
fants is the acute congestive type. Its duration may be only 
one or two days. The symptoms develop very rapidly and 
produce a great shock to the nervous system because of the 
suddenness and severity of the attack. There is a sudden rise 
of temperature and prostration is very great from the begin¬ 
ning. There is cyanosis and rapid respiration. There may 
be no cough. There may be little or no pain felt in the chest. 
During respiration the expansion of the affected side will be 
less than that of the unaffected side. However, this must not 
be confused with the natural tendency found in extremely 
young infants; when a child is placed in certain positions the 
expansion of one lung will be greater than that of the other. 
In the severe cases there is profound stupor and other cerebral 
symptoms, such as dullness, apathy and there may be con¬ 
vulsions. The progress of the incoordination is very rapid, 
due to the sudden engorgement of the lungs, which in the 
infant produces symptoms almost the same as those of con¬ 
solidation in older children or in adults. This is due to the 
air vesicles being extremely small. These cases should be 
adjusted as soon as there is a manifestation of symptoms, 
otherwise the momentum of the dis-ease may, because of its 
rapid progress, become so great that it will be impossible 
for Innate to overcome. When the medium and small sized 
bronchi only are affected, it is known as capillary bronchitis. 
The symptoms will be very much the same as in the type 
just mentioned, with the exception that in this type there is 
always a more or less severe cough. Prostration is not so 
great and the symptoms do not develop so rapidly. There is 
very rapid respiration with dyspnea and rales over the entire 
chest. There are symptoms which will indicate consolidation. 
While bronchopneumonia may come on very abruptly, yet it 
is not uncommon for the symptoms of bronchitis to merge 


346 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


gradually into those of pneumonia. From a chiropractic stand¬ 
point it would make little difference to the chiropractor 
whether the condition was called bronchitis or bronchopneu¬ 
monia, for if adjustments are given at the beginning results 
will be obtained before a diagnostician would be able to make 
a positive diagnosis. 

Children with pneumonia should not be permitted to lie 
in one position for any length of time. A constant change in 
the position is essential to prevent the accumulation of the 
exudate in a localized area. The child may be more easily 
cared for and made more comfortable by being held in the 
arms of an adult. This will permit frequent changing of the 
child’s position with very little disturbance to the child. In 
all cases of pneumonia plenty of fresh air is essential, but if 
there is any bronchitis, care must be exercised that the air is 
not too cold. In cases involving hepatization there is no 
danger of having the air too cold. 

Symptoms of Lobar Pneumonia 

Lobar pneumonia is not so frequent in infants as is 
bronchopneumonia although it does occur occasionally in early 
infancy. The previous health of the child seems to make little 
difference, since it often occurs in the strong and robust chil¬ 
dren. As a matter of fact, the strong child is more likely to 
contract this form of pneumonia. 

There are three stages in lobar pneumonia. There is: first, 
the congestion; second, the red hepatization, in which the 
lung becomes filled with a fibrant exudate containing red blood 
corpuscles; the third stage, that of gray hepatization, wherein 
the exudate undergoes a decomposition. These stages are of 
little importance to the chiropractor, except to indicate the 
degree of momentum attained by the incoordination. The 
first symptoms usually consist in loss of appetite, general 
weakness and headache. There is restlessness, excessive 
thirst, dry skin and a high temperature. There is rapid pulse 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


347 


and the respirations are from forty to fifty per minute. During 
the night the child is restless and slightly delirious. Occa¬ 
sionally there are convulsions, but this is very rare. 

Equation and Family 

The chiropractor is concerned chiefly in the location of the 
incoordination and the family involved. In order to determine 
the family it is first necessary to know the functions that are 
abnormally involved. From the symptoms given we observe 
readily that all cases of pneumonia, of whatever type, will 
be in the fever family, but it is quite obvious that this is not 
the only family involved. From the symptoms manifest we 
recognize that there is hyperemia and exudate, that this exu¬ 
date undergoes degeneration and thus becomes of a toxic 
nature. The fever, or C+ condition, is exaggerated by the 
presence of this poison being retained in the body. This gives 
us an overlapping of the poison and the fever families. 

Major Adjustment 

The major for the poison family is K.P.; for the fever 
family C.P., the local being Lu.P.; therefore, the combination 
major is lung place, center place, and kidney place. In making 
an analysis of the infant with pneumonia it is of the utmost 
importance to select the specific vertebra in these different 
regions. Although the patient will have quite a temperature, 
in many cases a hot box may be detected in the spine. In 
endeavoring to find a hot box in the spine of an infant the back 
of the patient should be exposed for sufficient length of time 
to eliminate the possibility of the temperature being greater 
at one point than at another because of clothing that may have 
been heavier at one point than at another. 

The vertebra causing the impingement at lung place may 
be either second or third dorsal. This should be determined 
by very careful palpation and by the presence of the hot box. 
We cannot emphasize too greatly the necessity for very care- 


348 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


ful palpation, since in the child nerve tracing can very seldom 
be used. In severe cases it may be necessary to adjust as 
often as once every six hours. With careful conscientious 
work on the part of the chiropractor, there should be very 
little danger in losing a patient, even in the most severe cases, 
and if the adjustments are given in the early stages of the 
dis-ease, the more marked symptoms will not develop, results 
will be shown in a very few hours and the child will recover 
in a short time. 


ASTHMA 

The type of asthma found among adults very seldom affects 
infants. The most common form is associated with mild 
attacks of bronchitis and is of a catarrhal nature. The attacks 
are very likely to accompany or be associated with different 
incoordinations involving the bronchi. In some cases the 
attacks seem to be exaggerated by certain kinds of food which 
the child eats. It is thought by some that attacks are brought 
on by the indigestion of some foreign protein. These proteins 
are very numerous and it is very difficult to determine the 
particular food in which the offending protein is found. In 
some patients an attack of asthma may be brought on by the 
eating of eggs. From a chiropractic standpoint we do not con¬ 
sider that the cause of asthma is in the food which the child 
eats, although there might be an interference with transmis¬ 
sion which would impede the normal processes of digestion, 
this would result in the production of a poison which might 
produce certain symptoms. This, however, does not change 
the fact that when the subluxations are properly adjusted the 
incoordinations will disappear, regardless of the kind of food 
that the patient eats. 

Symptoms 

The acute attack of asthma is accompanied with slight 
fever and acute catarrhal symptoms. Later the typical asth- 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


349 


matic symptoms appear in which there is a constriction of 
the bronchi due to spasms of the unstriped muscular fibers. 
There is hyperemia in the mucous membrane and a slight 
exudate. Usually the tonsils are enlarged and there are 
adenoid growths. There is more or less severe dyspnea, 
moderate cyanosis and, in severe cases, prostration. The 
peculiarity in respiration consists in a short inhalation with 
slow, labored exhalation. Dyspnea may be so severe that 
it is impossible for the child to breathe lying down. There 
is an almost constant dry teasing cough. Many infants suffer¬ 
ing from asthma are inclined to be rachitic. 

Equation 

The functions involved are motor and calorific; C+ for 
the heat in the mucous membrane lining the bronchi and M+ 
for the contraction, muscular contraction in the bronchi, with 
T+ for the accumulation of the mucin. 

Family 

This condition involves two families, the fever and spasms 
family. 

Major Adjustment 

Asthma is caused by a subluxation in the lower cervical 
or the upper dorsal region, producing pressure upon the nerves 
which transmit mental impulses to the pharynx and bronchi, 
interfering primarily with the motor function. The major 
adjustment is lower cervical or upper dorsal in combination 
with kidney place. 


■ 





CHAPTER VI 


DIGESTIVE TRACT 








CHAPTER VI 

DIGESTIVE TRACT 

GASTRITIS 

Incoordinations of the stomach alone are less frequent in 
infancy than are those of the intestines. Usually the stomach 
and intestines are involved at the same time and it becomes 
impossible to differentiate the two. The greater part of 
digestion during infancy takes place in the intestinal tract, 
the stomach acting more as a receptacle for the milk from 
which food passes slowly into the intestinal tract to be prop¬ 
erly digested. In an infant one month old the stomach will 
be empty one and one-half hours after nursing; in bottle-fed 
babies it will take a little longer. From two to eight months 
of age the time is about two hours for breast-fed babies and 
from two and a half to three hours for those taking cow’s 
milk. 

Symptoms 

The symptoms of gastritis come on very suddenly with 
pain and tenderness in the epigastric region, and with a high 
temperature which after the onset decreases. There is thirst, 
loss of appetite, and vomiting. The vomited matter is usually 
sour and may be streaked with blood. If there is an excessive 
amount of blood it indicates ulcers. This is rather unusual, 
however, in small children. Vomiting is excited by anything 
taken into the stomach. The thirst is intense, although the 
water will be vomited as soon as taken. The tongue is heavily 
coated and the breath is foul. If these symptoms continue 
intestinal symptoms will soon develop. 

The different kinds of gastritis are given as: catarrhal, 
ulcerative, membranous and corrosive; but the symptoms are 

353 


354 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


all very much the same and from a chiropractic standpoint a 
knowledge of the particular pathology would be of no value 
as the adjustment would be the same. In these cases the 
difference, or rather specific diagnosis, can not be made, 
medically, until after the autopsy. In the ulcerative type the 
condition is more prolonged and there is a greater tendency 
to hemorrhage which results in a greater amount of blood 
in the material vomited. Corrosive gastritis is the result of 
a corrosive poison being taken into the stomach, such as 
carbolic acid. 

Major Adjustment 

From a chiropractic standpoint it is immaterial what form 
of gastritis the child may be suffering from with the exception 
of the corrosive type which may require the administration of 
an antidote. In this event the condition passes out of the 
realm of Chiropractic the same as any other traumatic condi¬ 
tion. The adjustment in all cases of gastritis the same as 
in any other incoordination of the stomach is S.P. If there 
are symptoms which indicate that the poison family is in¬ 
volved the combination would include K.P. 

If adjustments are given at the onset results will be 
obtained almost instantly. The temperature will soon be 
reduced, the pain will be relieved and in a remarkably short 
time the symptoms will all disappear. 

CHRONIC GASTRITIS 

There are no characteristic peculiarities associated with 
gastritis when it becomes ehronic. There is no advantage in 
differentiating the chronic from the acute. The symptoms are 
somewhat less severe, and run a longer course. There is 
vomiting following meals. Between meals there will be a 
regurgitation of the food. This form of indigestion is not 
common among infants but may be found with older children. 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


355 


The most prominent symptom is that of malnutrition. There 
is restlessness at night, loss of appetite, constant loss of weight 
and anemia. 

Major Adjustment 

The adjustment in the case of chronic gastritis is the same 
as in the acute attacks. Stomach place is the condition of 
the stomach with kidney place for the elimination of the waste 
products which result from the lack of digestion. The kidney 
place adjustment is also to correct any abnormality in the 
serous circulation resulting from faulty digestion. 

STOMATITIS 

Dr. James N. Firth, in his “Chiropractic Symptomatology,” 
states that “There are five forms of stomatitis, viz.: simple, 
ulcerative, follicular, thrush and gangrenous.” It is not our 
thought to cover this subject in detail as he has done, but only 
to point out that which is characteristic of stomatitis in infants 
and small children. In this incoordination the mucous mem¬ 
brane lining the mouth becomes inflamed and swollen. The 
mouth is hot and the lips dry. The child is fretful and even 
though hungry refuses to nurse or will cry while trying to 
nurse. There is quite an increase in the secretion of saliva. 

Stomatitis in infants often accompanies the acute febrile 
dis eases or may appear alone. There will be more or less 
indigestion with possibly some diarrhea. If the condition 
remains for a great length of time the child becomes emaciated 
from the lack of food ingestion. 

It is not necessary for us to take up the different forms 
of stomatitis since the adjustment is the same in all cases. 
Upon the first indication of stomatitis or the slightest symp¬ 
tom of sore mouth, the infant should receive prompt attention. 
Strict hygienic measures should be used, especially if the child 
is being bottle fed. 


23 


356 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


Equation 

In stomatitis the equation is C+ for the simple form; for 
the suppurative form it is N.C.R. 

Family 

Simple stomatitis is classified in the fever family. The 
other forms involve the poison and degeneration families. 

Major Adjustment 

The adjustment for simple stomatitis is S.P. in combina¬ 
tion with M.C.P. If there is any suppuration involving the 
poison and degenerations family the major will include K.P. 

GLOSSITIS 

Glossitis is not very common among infants. It is an 
inflammatory condition of the tongue with hyperemia and 
swelling. There is usually a slight temperature and the swell¬ 
ing may involve the mucous membrane of the mouth. The 
tongue may be so greatly swollen that it becomes very difficult 
for the child to take food. Glossitis is often associated with 
stomatitis or any involvement of the mucous membrane of 
the mouth. 

Equation 

The equation for glossitis is C+ with T+ for the 
hyperemia. If there is suppuration it is N.C.R. 

Family 

This condition is in the fever family overlapping the 
degenerations family in case of suppuration. 

Major Adjustment 

The major adjustment for glossitis is S.P. and in cases 
involving suppuration K.P. 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


357 


STENOSIS OF THE PYLORUS 

There are two types of stenosis of the pylorus in infancy. 
One is a stenosis due to a muscular spasm of the pylorus 
called a pylorospasm. The other is a stenosis due to a hyper¬ 
trophy of the pylorus known as hypertrophic stenosis of the 
pylorus. It is possible for both conditions to be present at 
the same time. The stenosis may be congenital and is usually 
called stenosis of infancy. It is considered a serious condi¬ 
tion and the mortality is very high. 

This incoordination is characterized by constipation, per¬ 
sistent wasting, projectile vomiting, and a marked visible 
tumor. 

Symptoms 

The symptoms begin to appear during the first or second 
week of life. Up to this time the child may have been gaining 
and showing all signs of perfect health. Vomiting is usually 
the first symptom to appear and this may be at irregular times 
but without apparent cause. It soon becomes very forcible 
and later projectile. The symptoms of indigestion are absent; 
there is no eructations of gas; the breath is sweet and the 
appetite is good. There is no evidence of pain and there is 
no fever, yet the child steadily wastes and loses in weight. 

The contests of the stomach are sometimes expelled with 
such force that the food will be thrown a distance of two or 
three feet. The food sometimes comes through the nose. The 
vomiting takes place immediately after feeding and sometimes 
while the child is nursing. The fact that the child will nurse 
after vomiting and sometimes will leave the breast only while 
the food contents of the stomach are being ejected shows that 
the vomiting is not the result of indigestion; the fact that the 
food is all expelled at one time and not regurgitated at in¬ 
tervals is further proof. The food seldom remains in the 
stomach long enough for gastric digestion to take place, there- 


358 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


fore the vomited food is not digested but it is just about in 
the same stage as it was when taken into the stomach. In 
some cases, however, the vomiting may not take place im¬ 
mediately ; in some cases the food may even be retained for 
two or three feedings, although this is unusual. 

The constipation is very obstinate from the fact that the 
food is vomited and does not pass into the intestinal tract. 
In the severe cases the stools resemble meconium. There is 
very little fecal matter in the stool. In the severe cases there 
is persistent loss of weight which may amount to two or three 
ounces per day. The constipation is very marked and the 
urine is scanty. 

In the mild cases the symptoms are all less marked. The 
vomiting may be only occasional, the loss of weight is not so 
great, fecal matter is passed in the stools and there may even 
be a gain in weight at times. 

Due to the character of the vomiting which is projectile 
the symptoms are sometimes mistaken for cerebral symptoms. 
The scanty urine and the vomiting confuse the condition with 
renal disease. It is not difficult to distinguish stenosis of the 
pylorus from gastric indigestion. The latter rarely develops 
suddenly, but is very common in infants. The vomiting 
usually occurs shortly after feeding. 

Equation 

If the condition is the result of Hypertrophy of the pylorus 
the equation is X+. If it is a case of pylorospasm the equation 
would be M+. The equation for the loss of weight and 
wasting is N—. 

Family 

The family of the hypertrophic condition of the pylorus 
would be tumor family while the pylorospasm would come in 
the spasms family. 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


359 


Major Adjustment 

The adjustment for this condition would be stomach place 
in combination with kidney place. The adjustment results 
in a relaxation of the muscular fibers of the pylorus and per¬ 
mits the food to pass from the stomach. In case of hyper¬ 
trophic stenosis of the pylorus there is not only a relaxation 
of the muscular fibers, but Innate Intelligence removes the 
hypertrophy and thus enables the food to pass from the 
stomach. Excellent results are obtained in these cases. Care 
should be exercised in making the analysis and the adjust¬ 
ments should be given as early in the progress of the condition 
as possible. 

ACUTE INTESTINAL INDIGESTION 

This is quite a common incoordination and is very much 
more prevalent in hot weather. It is found often in very 
young infants, but more often in children during their second 
summer. There are many forms and degrees of acute intes¬ 
tinal indigestion among infants and small children. The 
attacks come on usually very abruptly and may be severe 
from the beginning. The most outstanding feature of the 
incoordination is the characteristic diarrhea. In the mild 
form the symptoms develop suddenly with marked gastric 
disturbances. At the beginning there is colicky pain and 
tympanites. There is great restlessness and typical symptoms 
of colic. The diarrhea appears in a very short time. The 
color of the stool is at first yellow, then it becomes a yellowish 
green and finally a grass green. It will usually contain undi¬ 
gested foods. The odor is very foul, grass green, and very 
much thinner than normal. This mild form may develop into 
the more severe type or the more severe form may develop 
suddenly from the very beginning. The temperature rises 
rapidly. The skin is hot and dry. At the beginning the child 
is very restless and cries a great deal, but later he lies in 


24 


360 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


a stupor, the eyes are sunken, pulse is weak and there is all 
the appearance of an attack of serious illness. There may 
be anorexia. There is usually great thirst and nausea and 
vomiting. In a few hours there is marked diarrhea. The 
stools are yellow and of a thin consistency with a very offen¬ 
sive odor. There is usually much gas expelled. There may 
be as many as four or five stools an hour. This incoordination 
is responsible for a great many deaths among children. They 
respond, however, very quickly to chiropractic adjustments. 

Major Adjustment 

The subluxation responsible for intestinal indigestion will 
be found in the lumbar region, usually upper lumbar. It may 
be necessary to include kidney place for the elimination of the 
products of the indigestion. This condition is in the fever 
family overlapping the poison family. 

CHOLERA INFANTUM 

When the severe type of intestinal indigestion is accom¬ 
panied with gastric disturbances and severe vomiting, it is 
known as cholera infantum. In this form the temperature 
rises rapidly and the symptoms develop quickly and become 
very severe in a' remarkably short time. The vomiting is very 
severe and usually appears simultaneously with the diarrhea. 
After the stomach has been emptied of food the vomitus be¬ 
comes serum and mucous. The contents of the small intes¬ 
tines may regurgitate into the stomach and be vomited up. 
Vomiting may be induced by taking water into the stomach. 
The stools are frequent, are of a pale green, yellow or brownish 
color at the beginning, but later become almost entirely serous. 
In the severe cases the bowels may be evacuated every few 
minutes. This type differs from that previously described in 
that the stools are practically odorless. In rare cases, how¬ 
ever, they may be exceedingly offensive. There is probably 
no other incoordination during childhood in which there is 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


361 


such a rapid loss of weight. The picture which the patient 
presents is characteristic. There is great weakness and pros¬ 
tration from the very beginning. The fontanel is depressed 
and in some cases there may even be an overlapping of the 
cranial bones. The features become sharp, the eyes are deeply 
sunken and the angle of the mouth is drawn down. The nose 
is pinched, the skin over the forehead is tense and dry, the 
temples are sunken. There is pallor, stupor, marked relaxa¬ 
tion of the lips and there will be convulsions and collapse. 
Statistics show that under medical treatment fully three- 
fourths of the cases die. 

Major Adjustment 

Most excellent results are obtained in these cases under 
chiropractic adjustments. In the severe attacks it will be 
found necessary to adjust the child as often as once every 
six hours. The subluxations will be found at stomach place 
and kidney place and middle lumbar. Some very severe cases 
have come under our personal observation and in the cases 
that we have handled personally the results have been 100%. 
Such cases must be analyzed very carefully, and must have 
the very best care in every way. 

CHRONIC INTESTINAL INDIGESTION 

Chronic intestinal indigestion is a very common incoordina¬ 
tion affecting children. It is more likely to be found among 
children who are artificially fed. Intestinal indigestion is re¬ 
sponsible for a great variety of symptoms that are sometimes 
considered separate dis-eases. 

Symptoms 

Children suffering with intestinal indigestion usually pre¬ 
sent symptoms of malnutrition. They are anemic, the ex¬ 
tremities being usually very small. The most striking feature 
of such a case will be the extremely large abdomen. The 


362 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


colon is usually dilated as are also the small intestines. There 
is marked tympanites, which usually increases during the day¬ 
time but diminishes during the night. This is one of the prin¬ 
cipal symptoms which differentiate intestinal indigestion from 
tubercular peritonitis. Such children are easily fatigued, have 
a very sallow complexion with dark rings under the eyes. 
They are usually very much below the average weight and are 
very cross and irritable. They do not sleep well, often grind¬ 
ing their teeth and crying out in their sleep. There is usually 
alternating constipation and diarrhea, the odor of the stools 
being very offensive. In extreme cases there may be con¬ 
vulsions and other cerebral symptoms. There is seldom any 
fever. 

Major Adjustment 

The local major subluxation will be found in the lumbar 
region with the combination at kidney place. Kidney place 
is used only when there has been an accumulation of products 
of indigestion which makes it necessary to increase elimina¬ 
tion to take care of these products. In many of these cases 
the liver is involved and therefore will call for liver place in 
combination with kidney place and the local lumbar. These 
cases will respond very readily to chiropractic adjustments. 

COLIC 

Colic is a common incoordination of infancy and is very 
prevalent during the first three months. Colic is a symptom 
rather than a dis-ease and usually indicates intestinal indiges¬ 
tion or some inflammatory condition of the intestines. It is 
characterized by sharp paroxysmal pains in the intestines. 
A child who is subject to colic will usually be suffering also 
from constipation. The crying of a colicky child is charac¬ 
teristic, being very violent and paroxysmal, which presently 
subsides only to be followed with another attack. During 
these spells the lower extremities will be drawn up and the 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


363 


abdomen will be tense from the accumulation of gas. In mild 
cases the child will not cry out but will be fretful. This may 
be wrongly construed to be the result of hunger. When the 
attacks of colic come on the child will show a desire to nurse 
and will take the breast as though very hungry. This may 
be followed by relief from the pain, but this relief is only 
temporary and when the pain returns it is usually more severe. 
There is probably no incoordination of childhood that is quite 
so trying to a chiropractor as an acute attack of colic, due 
to the violent crying of the child and the eager desire on the 
part of the chiropractor and the attendants to relieve the pain. 
It is often quite hard to obtain a correct analysis in such cases 
because of the difficulty experienced in getting the child into 
a proper position for palpation. In making the palpation the 
chiropractor should take plenty of time and should never 
endeavor to force the child to be still, rather he should adapt 
himself to the constant moving about of the infant. 

Major Adjustment 

The major varies somewhat in these cases so far as a 
specific vertebra is concerned, but the local will always be 
found in the lumbar region, usually the first or second lumbar 
vertebra. Kidney place should be used as a combination. 

VOMITING 

During nursing the infant swallows quite a little air and 
not infrequently this is the cause of vomiting immediately 
following feeding. It is not uncommon for an infant to vomit 
without effort after overfilling the stomach. This is a natural 
thing among healthy children and needs no attention from a 
corrective standpoint. In such cases the milk is but little 
changed. 

In gastric indigestion and gastritis vomiting is always 
present, but in these cases it does not take place until some 
time after feeding, perhaps several hours. In gastritis the 


364 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


vomiting is more constant. In the more severe cases there 
will be not only the partially digested food but also bile and 
mucus and sometimes traces of blood. 

Obstructive vomiting is sometimes found among infants 
and may be due to intestinal obstruction or to an obstruction 
of the pyloris. The obstruction may be congenital or it may 
develop after birth. Obstruction of the pyloris may be the 
result of hypertrophic stenosis. In this condition the child 
vomits immediately following feeding and with great force. 
This is thoroughly described in the article on Hypertrophic 
Stenosis of the Pyloris. If the obstruction is in the intestinal 
tract it may be the result of a congenital malformation or due 
to intussusception. The vomiting is forceful and the vomitus 
may contain fecal matter. 

Vomiting is often associated with peritonitis and appen¬ 
dicitis. In these conditions there is distention of the abdomen 
with abdominal pains which may be localized. There may 
also be a slight temperature. Vomiting is purely adaptative 
on the part of Innate Intelligence. The food can not be 
digested and carried through the digestive tract so Innate 
realizes that the best thing to do is to free the body from 
it in the quickest manner. 

Vomiting often precedes such incoordinations as pneu¬ 
monia, scarlet fever and malaria and may precede any of the 
febrile dis-eases. Vomiting may be produced by the accumu¬ 
lation and absorption of toxines in the body. 

Infants suffering with nervous disorders such as acute 
meningitis, tumors of the brain and other central conditions 
will often have cerebral vomiting. In this event the vomiting 
is spontaneous and does not necessarily occur at feeding time. 
Other cerebral symptoms present will aid in determining the 
analysis. 

Vomiting may be produced by the presence of worms that 
come up into the throat from the stomach and intestinal tract. 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


365 


Hunger may occasionally bring on an attack of vomiting. 
This is more common in older children than in infants. 

RECURRENT VOMITING 

This is also known as cyclic vomiting and periodical vomit¬ 
ing. It is characterized by recurrent attacks which may be 
weeks or months apart. They come on without any apparent 
cause and from the descriptions and explanations given in 
medical science very little can be done medically to control 
the vomiting which at the end of two or three days will cease 
spontaneously. The attacks recur at different intervals, usually 
less often, gradually decreasing until they cease altogether 
when the patient is about the age of ten or twelve years. 

Symptoms 

There is loss of appetite and malaise. The pulse becomes 
rapid and in some cases there is slight temperature. There 
is usually headache and excessive thirst. During the attack 
of vomiting there is extreme retching and great distress. The 
symptoms are similar to migrane in adults. This condition 
must be differentiated from tubercular meningitis in which 
there is vomiting without apparent cause. The course of the 
symptoms will soon enable a positive differentiation. In 
acute indigestion there is vomiting, but the history of the 
case reveals the fact that the attack was brought on by 
undigested food. It is very easy to distinguish this type of 
vomiting from that of appendicitis, since in appendicitis there 
is marked tenderness at McBurney’s point, also pain and the 
characteristic rigidity and muscular contraction. In intus¬ 
susception the symptoms are usually more severe and there 
is blood and mucus in the stool. 

Major Adjustment 

Since there seems to be no particular indication of indiges¬ 
tion or impaired functions, and no pathological changes, it is 


366 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


evident that the function involved is that of motor. But re¬ 
gardless of the primary function that is interfered with a 
subluxation will be found at S. P. and in most cases there 
will be a hot box during the acute attack. \ The vertebra 
most commonly subluxated is the sixth dorsal. In most cases 
there is no combination and results will be obtained in a very 
short time by adjusting nothing but the S.P. subluxation. 
In the severe cases it may be necessary to adjust as often as 
once every six hours until the vomiting ceases. Ordinarily 
the vomiting will cease in a short time and in most cases 
marked improvement will be noted after the first adjustment. 

Vomiting occurs in gastric indigestion, intussusception, 
meningitis, peritonitis, pyloric stenosis, uremic poisoning, and 
in many other acute incoordinations. 

CONSTIPATION 

The first bowel movement after birth is known as 
meconium and is a dark brownish-green color, and of a semi¬ 
solid consistency. During the first two or three days the 
bowels move from four to six times daily. On the third day 
the character of the stools begin to change and by the fourth 
day the feces has become normal. 

The normal stool of a normal nursing infant is about the 
color of the yolk of an egg, and may be slightly green. The 
average amount is about two ounces daily. The stools should 
never be watery, but of a butter-like consistency. During the 
first few weeks the infant’s bowels will move on an average 
of four times daily. After about six weeks the average will 
be two a day. The stool changes in character as soon as the 
child is placed upon a mixed diet. It then becomes more like 
that of an adult but remains softer. 

Constipation is one of the most common incoordinations 
of infancy and childhood. There are many factors to be con¬ 
sidered and many things that contribute to the condition. In 
older children habit plays no small part in aggravating con- 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


367 


stipation. For this reason the child should be very carefully 
trained early in life to obey the first call on Nature in this 
respect. 

Normally the infant should have two bowel movements a 
day, although some have more while others may have only one. 
Frequent movements do not, however, mean that the child is 
not constipated or costive. With two or three dry hard stools 
per day the child would be costive. Constipation is the result 
of a lack of motor function in the muscular walls of the in¬ 
testines while costiveness is the result of a lack of secretion 
due to interference with transmission of secretory mental 
impulses. The two conditions are often associated. When 
there is a lack of motor function in the muscular walls the 
fecal matter will not be forced out of the intestinal tract fast 
enough and much of the moisture will be absorbed, thus leav¬ 
ing the fecal matter dry and hard. This is not a true costive¬ 
ness and should not be mistaken for such. 

In costiveness there may be colicky pains which may be 
increased, and may at times be quite severe, when the hard 
dry fecal matter is passed. The general health of the child 
may be seemingly normal. In severe cases hemorrhoids and 
even hernia may be developed from the constant straining. 

Major Adjustment 

These cases are simple and respond readily to chiropractic 
adjustments. The combination varies somewhat in different 
cases. In constipation the major will be a lumbar vertebra. 
In costiveness, where secretions are involved, the combination 
will include a Li.P. and K. P. In some cases excellent results 
are obtained by adjusting ninth dorsal. 

INTUSSUSCEPTION 

Intussusception is a condition wherein there is a telescoping 
of the intestines in which one portion passes into the adjacent 
portion and produces an obstruction. 

This condition occurs most often in early infancy, although 


368 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


not very commonly. The most frequent site is at the ileocecal 
valve. It may, however, occur at any point in the intestinal 
tract. When it occurs in the small intestine it is known as 
enteric intussusception; in the colon as colic; and at the 
ileocecal valve as ilecocecal. 

Intussusception may be chronic or acute. In the chronic 
cases there may be adhesions which will make it very difficult 
for Innate to accomplish a reduction. 

Symptoms 

The onset is usually accompanied with paroxysmals of 
pains and vomiting. The pains may be very severe and the 
vomiting projectile. The pain may be mistaken for that of 
ordinary colic, but it is much more severe and may continue 
through the entire attack. 

The vomiting is persistent, especially at the onset, and 
occurs as soon as food enters the stomach. In older children 
it may be stercoraceous after the third or fourth day. It never 
occurs, however, in infancy. The vomiting is the result of 
the intestinal obstruction and is adaptative on the part of 
Innate Intelligence. It is quite obvious that it is better not 
to have food in the stomach than it is to have it and not be 
able to complete the process of intestinal digestion. 

The character of the stools is of importance. At first the 
bowel movements may be diarrheal and later there will be 
no fecal matter, but the stool will contain nothing but blood 
and mucus. A paroxysm of colicky pain may be followed 
by a mucous and bloody stool several times daily. At the onset 
the abdominal walls are soft and relaxed, or may even be 
retracted. Tympanites may occur about the second or third 
day. 

The symptoms in the acute cases are those of shock. There 
is an extremely anxious look on the face which is pallid, cold 
extremities, subnormal temperature and cold perspiration. 
There is restlessness and in many cases convulsions. Later 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


369 


there will be stupor. A sudden rise in temperature indicates 
a turn for the worse and may mean death in a short time. 
In the chronic cases there is marked inanition which progresses 
very rapidly. 

Major Adjustment 

The subluxation interfering with the transmission of 
mental impulses causing intussusception will be found in the 
lumbar region, the specific vertebra depending upon the loca¬ 
tion of the intussusception, whether in the upper or lower 
intestinal tract. Most excellent results have been obtained in 
these cases, and there should be no hesitancy in adjusting. 
The function involved is motor, which prevents a coordinate 
action of the muscular walls of the intestines. As soon as this 
action becomes normal Innate Intelligence will correct the 
condition and all symptoms will subside. 

ICTERUS 

Icterus is a rather common incoordination of infancy. It 
is characterized by yellowish discoloration of the skin pro¬ 
duced by the accumulation of bile pigment. This is the result 
of an occlusion usually of the common bile duct, which pre¬ 
vents the bile from passing into the duodenum. There are 
two forms: the physiological and the pathological. In the 
physiological there is an inflammation in the mucous mem¬ 
brane lining the common bile duct. This causes a decrease 
in the size of the lumen, which obstructs the flow of bile. 
In the pathological there may be a complete obstruction due 
to malformation or there may be a congenital absence of the 
bile duct. While the common bile duct is the most common 
seat of the pathological type, yet the hepatic and cystic ducts 
may also be involved. 

Symptoms 

The most prominent symptoms is the discoloration of the 
skin. In the severe obstructive jaundice the stools are white, 


370 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


the urine dark brown and bile-stained and the liver and spleen 
often enlarged. There may be severe convulsions. In the 
more common and less exaggerated cases the foregoing symp¬ 
toms are present but in a milder form. There is typical jaun¬ 
diced discoloration which in some cases will appear soon after 
birth. This will continue for a few days and may become 
quite marked. The stools will be colorless, while the urine 
will be highly colored. 

Equation and Family 

The equation is secretion plus (T+) and excretion minus 
(E—) for the accumulation of the bile. The family is the 
poison family. In case of temperature it overlaps the fever 
family. 

Major Adjustment 

The chiropractor must not conclude that the case is one of 
congenital malformation or absence of the bile duct merely 
because of the extreme discoloration of the infant. Cases have 
come under our observation in which the symptoms would 
all indicate that the case was hopeless, but under chiropractic 
adjustments they have recovered. It must be recognized, of 
course, that if there is a congenital absence of the bile duct 
the case is hopeless, but since there is no way of determining 
whether it is a mere obstruction or congenital absence, the 
case should by no means be considered hopeless. Every effort 
should be made to locate and adjust the subluxation. The 
subluxation will be found at liver place which must be adjusted 
in combination with kidney place. Kidney place is required 
for the elimination of the accumulated bile. These cases will 
respond very quickly and satisfactorily under chiropractic 
adjustments. 


CHAPTER VII 


MISCELLANEOUS 
























































































































































CHAPTER VII 


MISCELLANEOUS 

MALNUTRITION 

This condition may result from a lack of the proper amount 
of food and from unhygienic conditions. However, it is often 
found among the children who should be properly nourished, 
who have the very best of care and the most wholesome food. 
There is no definite standard by which to determine a case 
of malnutrition. The extreme cases are obvious, but a child 
may be simply underweight and still not be classed as a case 
of malnutrition. Up to eleven or twelve years of age a child 
is not usually considered properly nourished if he is 10% 
below the normal standard of weight for his age and height. 
If the food supply is insufficient in quantity or quality, if there 
are bad habits of eating, such as bolting the food, insufficient 
mastication, and irregular hours of eating, these should all 
receive proper attention. If, on the other hand, the supply 
of food is sufficient in quantity and quality, if all habits of 
eating are normal and there is malnutrition, it is because the 
food is either not properly digested or not properly assimilated, 
or both, and the child should receive prompt attention at the 
hands of a competent chiropractor. 

Symptoms 

The symptoms of malnutrition are very obvious and need 
no special mention here. Such children are usually irritable 
and fretful. They are of a nervous disposition and very active. 
They are usually very bright mentally and often excel in their 
school work. Children suffering with malnutrition are very 
susceptible to different incoordinations and may be sick a 
great deal. 


373 


374 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


Major Adjustment 

In these cases, if the child is provided with food having 
sufficient nourishment, most excellent results will be obtained 
from chiropractic adjustments. A very careful analysis must 
be made in order to determine all the facts in the case for 
the major differs in different individuals. In some cases the 
major will be C.P. and K.P., in others S.P., K.P. and a lumbar, 
while in some cases Li.P. and Sp.P. may be involved. 

INANITION 

This is the term applied to the condition resulting from 
the lack of food assimilation, It affects principally young 
infants. It is characterized by a persistent loss of weight 
with more or less severe symptoms which may appear rather 
suddenly. 

Symptoms 

The infant’s pulse is weak and rapid and the temperature 
may be high. There is scanty urine, cold extremities and 
great muscular relaxation. The face presents a peculiar bluish 
gray color. There may be cyanosis. There is rapid irregular 
respiration. In the more severe cases there may be stupor, 
while in others the child is very restless and fretful. Pupils 
are contracted and the fontanel is sunken. The progress of 
the incoordination may be rapid and in very young infants 
death may occur quite suddenly. Breast feeding is very essen¬ 
tial in these cases. 

Major Adjustment 

Inanition is really malnutrition in the young infant due 
to a lack of assimilation of nutrition. The major adjustment 
is C.P. or S.P. and K.P. In some cases Li.P. may be involved, 
while in others Spl.P. may enter into the combination. 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


375 


MARASMUS 

This condition is also called infantile atrophy and simple 
wasting. It is not very common and is usually found in in¬ 
stitutions for infants. It affects infants who are unusually 
weak. It is said to result largely from improper food and 
feeding and also it is influenced by the surroundings. In 
these cases the methods of feeding and the character of food 
should be carefully investigated. If these are found satis¬ 
factory it will then be obvious that the food is not being 
properly digested. This calls for a careful analysis and 
adjusting of the child. In these cases the food can not be 
assimilated because it is not properly digested. There is a 
progressive and persistent loss in weight. The body tem¬ 
perature becomes subnormal, the lung expansion imperfect, 
emaciation very marked, the skin deeply wrinkled and the 
face and arms take on a very old appearance. The eyes 
appear very large, the temples and fontanels are sunken, and 
the abdomen becomes very prominent. The child is very 
susceptible to all forms of incoordinations and because of the 
extreme weakness may succumb quickly to any acute dis-ease. 
In some cases after the emaciation has become very marked 
there may be an unusual and sudden gain in weight due to a 
general edema. This condition may increase until all the 
tissues of the body become extremely water-logged. The 
large cavities, however, are very seldom affected. Infants 
under seven or eight months of age are likely to be affected 
by this edema. 

Major Adjustment 

These cases call for a combination major which consists 
of S.P. and K.P. and an Up.L.P. Excellent results will be 
attained in these cases if adjustments are given early enough 
in the stage of the incoordination. The patient is never too 
weak to be adjusted. 


376 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


SCURVY 

Scurvy is a condition resulting from faulty nutrition. It 
is characterized by a swelling of the joints, sometimes pseudo* 
paralysis of the lower extremities and a spongy condition of 
the gums which have a tendency to bleed. There may be 
cachexia and anemia. This condition is supposed to result 
from a continuous diet lacking in the vitamin C. 

Symptoms 

Usually the first symptoms to appear are tenderness of 
the legs. This will be observed from the fact that the child 
cries when his legs are moved. Eventually this tenderness 
localizes about the knees and ankles and it is accompanied 
with swelling of these parts. The gums then become swollen 
and show a marked tendency to bleed. This swelling may 
produce pain sufficient to interfere with the child taking food. 
The child loses weight, becomes very fretful, and has a slight 
fever. There is a characteristic posture in which the hips 
are rotated outward, while there is a semi-flexion of the thighs 
and legs. The child will usually lie very quietly because any 
movement produces pain, especially in the legs. There is 
marked sub-periosteal hemorrhages which may be so great 
that the limbs will become twice their normal size. In severe 
cases epiphyseal separation is not uncommon. Scurvy is very 
often associated with rickets. However, it is affirmed that 
they are two separate conditions and not just different forms 
of the same condition. 

Major Adjustment 

This incoordination requires a combination major which 
will be found at C.P. or S.P. and K.P. 

RICKETS 

Rickets is also called rachitis and known by some as Bar¬ 
low’s dis-ease. It is listed as a dis-ease of nutrition, although 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


377 


the most important anatomical changes which take place are 
those affecting the bones. This dis-ease is found among people 
of all classes. There is no race that is immune, yet some 
nationalities seem to suffer more frequently and severely than 
others. Negroes and Italians seem to be especially susceptible 
when placed in northern climates and congested quarters in 
northern cities. In general practice rickets is considered a 
rather uncommon incoordination, although in congested cities 
it will be found quite prevalent. 

Symptoms 

The first symptoms to appear are nocturnal restlessness 
and profuse sweating about the head during sleep. The rest¬ 
lessness is usually quite marked; the patient rolls and tosses 
a great deal, and almost constantly moves the head back and 
forth on the pillow. Because of the profuse sweating the 
child becomes very susceptible to colds, bronchitis and bron¬ 
chial pneumonia. A case of rickets is rather easily recognized 
by the large head, the pigeon breast, beaded ribs, the de¬ 
formities of the extremities, the swelling of the epiphyses of 
the wrists and ankles, and the prominent abdomen. 

Deformities of the Head 

Deformity of the head appears very early in the dis-ease 
and is due to the thickening of the cranial bones, producing 
the typical square head of rickets. This square head is known 
as caput quadratum. Numerous soft spots are formed in the 
cranial bones which when pressed upon give one the im¬ 
pression that he is feeling parchment. This is known as cranial 
tabies. The fontanels and sutures are very late in closing, 
sometimes as late as the third or fourth year. The large 
rachitic head must not be mistaken for hydrocephalus. 

Deformities of the Thorax 

The chest is deformed in such a way that the transverse 
diameter is decreased and the antero-posterior diameter is in- 


378 CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 

creased. This produces the typical pigeon breast. Such de¬ 
formity is caused from the softening of the thoracic bones. 
Beading of the ribs is characteristic and is known as the 
rachitic rosary. These nodules are formed at the junction 
line of the costal cartilages and the ribs. While these nodules 
are always present, they are not always visible. The rachitic 
gurgle, which is a transverse depression extending from one 
side of the chest to the other and is about two inches broad, 
is also present. 

Deformities of the Spine 

The most characteristic deformity of the spine in rickets 
is a kyphosis usually involving the lower dorsal and the entire 
lumbar region, although lateral curvatures may appear. In a 
well defined case of rickets every bone in the body may be 
abnormally involved. The deformity of the spine results 
from a softening of the bones which give way under the 
weight of the trunk. 

Deformities of the Extremities 

A case of rickets usually presents characteristic curvatures 
of the bones. The long bones are, as a rule, involved sym¬ 
metrically. Green stick fractures very often occur. In prac¬ 
tically all cases of this dis-ease there is an arrested longitudinal 
growth in the bones. Because of this the height will often 
be very much less than that of the normal child. There is 
marked enlargement of the epiphyses at the wrists and ankles. 
The slight curvatures in the bones of the arms will be exag¬ 
gerated when the child begins to creep and the curvatures 
in the legs will be increased when the child begins to stand 
and walk. 

Deformities of the Abdomen 

Due to the general motor minus condition of the abdominal 
muscles there is developed a condition known as pot belly. 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


379 


This enlargement is often exaggerated by intestinal indiges¬ 
tion and constipation. This constipation results from the 
motor minus condition which interferes with the vermicular 
movement of the intestinal tract. 

Equation 

The function that is primarily involved in rickets is nutri¬ 
tion, but this results in other functions being implicated. There 
is expansion minus especially in the development of the osseous 
tissue. The equation is N— with X—. 

Major Adjustment 

Most excellent results are obtained in rickets. It is very 
essential that the adjustments be given at the beginning before 
the deformities become marked. In the more chronic cases 
the incoordination will be checked by the adjustments and the 
patient will recover, # but it will be obvious that the marked 
deformities such as genu varum, genu valgrum, enlargement 
of the wrist and deformities of the head can not be corrected 
in the chronic cases. The adjustment is At. or Ax., S.P. and 
K.P. 


NEUROTIC CHILDREN 

Neurotic symptoms may appear very early in infancy. 
They may be first noticed when the child is startled by sud¬ 
den sounds or unusual sights. Ordinarily the infant, only a 
few weeks of age, will pay little or no attention to its sur¬ 
roundings. The neurotic infant, however, may be startled or 
badly frightened by its environment. Such infants are found 
to apparently fix their attention upon objects as early as the 
third or fourth week. If its attention is thus centered upon 
a person who should make a quick, unexpected move, the 
child often becomes terrified. In other cases the symptoms 
may manifest themselves in a muscular spasm, such as mild 
opisthotonos, and other conditions suggesting cerebral in- 


25 


380 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


coordination. In early infancy vomiting and diarrhea may 
be brought on by excitement. The vomiting takes place with¬ 
out nausea and may be excited either by food or water. This 
must be carefully distinguished from the spitting up of milk 
so characteristic in infancy. This is a perfectly normal process 
and seems to be Innate’s method of adaptation when the child 
has taken too much milk into the stomach. Vomiting in 
neurotic infants may even become so severe that it results 
in a loss of weight. The diarrhea occurs with no more 
apparent cause than the vomiting. If the stools are not too 
frequent the food will be well digested but the diarrhea may 
become so severe that the food passes through the intestinal 
tract undigested. This diarrhea may be very obstinate and 
then it results in serious malnutrition. As the child grows 
older the characteristic symptoms of infancy become less 
marked but the child continues to be extremely nervous, 
irritable and cross. This nervousness may be exaggerated 
by the surroundings. Such children usually have poor appetite 
and sutler from constipation. They are almost always poorly 
nourished and anemic. The pulse is usually more or less 
rapid and is generally affected by excitement. Such children 
are quite restless during sleep. 

Neurotic children are often precocious but lack in con¬ 
centration due to their restlessness. Headache is a very com¬ 
mon symptom. There is a marked tendency toward habit, 
spasm and chorea. 

Family 

These conditions are classified in the spasms family. 

Equation 

The equation is not so well defined since the condition 
of nervousness is adaptative. Therefore the equation for the 
nervousness is I.A. If other symptoms appear the equation 
would depend upon the function involved. 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


381 


Major Adjustment 

It is maintained by most authorities that this nervous¬ 
ness is inherited, but it has been demonstrated clinically by 
Chiropractic that results are readily obtained by chiropractic 
adjustments. It is reasonable to assume that there are environ¬ 
mental conditions which might produce nervousness even in 
the small infant, but it is also recognized that if the child is 
normal he soon becomes accustomed to the peculiarities of 
the environment and pays little or no attention to them. Sub- • 
luxations in the cervical region, usually atlas or axis, are found 
in these children. These subluxations may produce sufficient 
cord pressure to cause such symptoms as usually manifest 
themselves in malnutrition as so-called nervous indigestion 
and other symptoms which would indicate constitutional dis¬ 
orders. A very careful analysis reveals that the nervousness 
in some of these cases is adaptative to some other incoordina¬ 
tion. If the nervousness is direct the major adjustment will 
be Up.C. with a possible combination of C.P. and K.P. If 
the nervousness is adaptative, then a very careful analysis 
must be made to determine the incoordination to which it is 
adaptative. The major then will be determined by the loca¬ 
tion and the family involved. 

CONVULSIONS 

A convulsion is a violent involuntary contraction of muscles 
which ordinarily contract only under direction of the will. 
It may be either clonic or tonic. A clonic convulsion con¬ 
sists of a spasm of the muscles with alternating contractions 
and relaxations while the tonic spasm consists in constant 
rigidity of the muscles involved. The contractions may be 
confined to certain muscles or sets of muscles as, for example, 
the muscles of the face, the trunk or the extremities. In 
some cases the muscles of the entire body are involved. 


382 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


During the first eighteen months of life the child is more 
susceptible to convulsions than at a later age, although the 
condition is rather common during childhood. Convulsions 
accompany many incoordinations and are considered adapta- 
tive to some other condition. Therefore the first thing to 
consider in a case of this kind is the primary condition or the 
incoordination to which the convulsion is adaptative. 

The more common conditions with which convulsions are 
associated are: Incoordinations involving the nervous system, 
such as cerebra-spinal conditions; rachitis; and organic and 
functional disorders. Any condition which produces an irrita¬ 
tion of the nervous system may result in a convulsion of 
more or less violence. For this reason children are often 
subject to convulsions during dentition and disorders resulting 
in slight temperature. Cerebral tumors, abscesses of the brain, 
hydrocephalus and meningitis are examples of cerebral condi¬ 
tions in which convulsions are commonly found. 

Subluxations in the upper cervical region are often pro¬ 
duced at the time of birth which cause cord pressure, making 
the child susceptible to all conditions that would irritate the 
nervous system. 

There may be K.P. subluxations interfering with the 
process of elimination resulting in an accumulation of poison 
within the body, or there may be other subluxations resulting 
in the production of toxines within the body and these will 
produce an irritation of the nervous system resulting in con¬ 
vulsions. Disturbances in digestion, affections of the respira¬ 
tory tract, a sudden rise of temperature and incoordinations 
involving the gastro-intestinal tract are often responsible for 
convulsions. Convulsions are quite frequent at the onset of 
acute dis-eases such as whooping-cough, measles and mumps. 
They are often associated with enlargement of the thymus 
gland. X ! 

During the convulsion there may be loss of consciousness 
with tonic and clonic spasms in various degrees of severity. 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


383 


The urine may be voided and the bowels evacuated. In the 
very young infant a single attack may prove fatal, although 
this is rather unusual. When death occurs in this way it is 
most often due to asphyxia, or when the convulsions recur in 
rapid succession death will result from exhaustion. 

The clinical picture is quite typical. Usually there is pallor 
of the face which may be followed quickly with a twitching 
of the facial muscles, and sometimes those of the hands and 
feet. In most cases the attack comes on without warning; 
the eyes become fixed and rolled backward; the twitching 
usually begins in the face and very soon the entire body is 
involved. The face is distorted by muscular contractions, the 
head is drawn backward and the neck is thrown forward; 
there may be frothing at the mouth. The pulse is irregular 
and weak, the respiration is shallow and feeble while there is 
cold perspiration of the forehead and it may also be on the 
body. The thumbs are turned into the palms and the hands 
are tightly closed. There is rythmical convulsive movements 
consisting of alternating flexion and extension. 

The attack usually lasts from a few minutes to half an 
hour and sometimes longer. The patient is left in a more or 
less state of exhaustion and the attack may be followed by 
stupor and coma. Very often convulsions in children over 
two years of age indicate the onset of some acute condition 
such as pneumonia or scarlet fever. However, convulsions 
may mean very little with small children that are extremely 
nervous. During the first few days of life they may be the 
result of temporary circulatory disturbances in the brain from 
prolonged pressure in difficult labor. 

Family 

All cases of convulsions are in the spasms family no matter 
with what other conditions they are associated. If there are 
other complications, and there usually are, the family for the 
complications will depend upon the functions involved. 


384 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


Major Adjustment 

When a chiropractor is called to see a child that is having 
convulsions he should make a very careful inquiry into the 
history of the case and try to find the associated incoordina¬ 
tion. This is done for the purpose of determining the com¬ 
bination to be used. The major for location will be atlas or 
axis, while the combination will depend upon the associated 
condition. This may be K.P. or it may be S.P. or any other 
combination which would include the subluxation for condi¬ 
tion. 

Excellent results are obtained in cases of convulsions. The 
adjustment should be given as soon as possible. In many 
cases an adjustment of the atlas or axis will bring the child 
to consciousness and prevent a recurrence of the attack. The 
convulsion may be caused by an atlas subluxation with no 
accompanying condition. This is known as a direct convulsion 
and will respond very quickly to an adjustment. 

NOCTURNAL ENURESIS 

As early as the tenth or twelfth month of age the child 
may be trained to make known his desire to empty the bladder. 
However, with some children this may not be accomplished 
until two and a half years of age. If by the third year of 
age the child is unable to retain the urine for a normal length 
of time, it is evidence of some abnormality and should receive 
Chiropractic attention. The child is afflicted with what is 
known as enuresis, which may take place during the day or 
night, or both. If it occurs during the day, it is called diurnal; 
while if it takes place during the night, it is known as noc¬ 
turnal. It is more likely to take place during the night, since 
it may be possible for the child to control the bladder during 
waking hours. 

We are most concerned with the nocturnal enuresis, be- 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


385 


cause this form causes the child more discomfort and it is 
more difficult to control than the diurnal. 

We recognize nocturnal enuresis as an adaptative condi¬ 
tion. That is, the emptying of the bladder is a perfectly 
natural process and will always take place under certain con¬ 
ditions. For example, if the sphincter muscle relaxes, the 
urine will be voided. In this event, we are not concerned 
in the voiding of the urine, but in the cause for the relaxation 
of muscle which prevented the bladder from retaining the 
urine. There are a number of conditions to which nocturnal 
enuresis is adaptative. The following are the most common: 

Incoordinations involving the nervous system. 

Highly acid urine. 

Excessive quantity of urine. 

Abnormalities and incoordinations of the bladder. 

Irritation of the genital organs. 

Incoordinations of the Nervous System 

The incoordinations of the nervous system in which there 
may be nocturnal enuresis are those commonly found in ex¬ 
tremely neurotic children, and children who are under¬ 
nourished and anemic. Chorea, neurasthenia and hysteria are 
examples of conditions in which nocturnal enuresis is very 
common. Nervous children are easily disturbed during sleep 
and are prone to dream, at such times the innate interpreta¬ 
tion of the vibrations produced by the urine in the bladder 
reaches the educated mind and there is not sufficient reasoning 
of the conscious mind to enable the child to realize where he 
is or to prevent the following of the natural desire to uri¬ 
nate. 

The inability of the child to control the bladder during 
acute illness must not be mistaken for habitual nocturnal 
enuresis; for this will be only temporary, and will disappear 
when the child recovers from the acute attack. 


386 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


Highly Acid Urine 

In some cases, the urine being highly acid, produces vibra¬ 
tions in the bladder which results in Innate Intelligence caus¬ 
ing the sphincter muscle to relax, which results in the voiding 
of the urine. This is an adaptative action on the part of 
Innate to prevent 'the acidity of the urine from setting up 
an irritation in the bladder. If the urine remained in the 
bladder it would damage the tissues and call for an expendi¬ 
ture of energy for reparation; this is all prevented by getting 
the urine out of the bladder as soon as possible. The hyper¬ 
acidity of the urine is the result of the lack of the expression 
of mental impulses in the body and should receive immediate 
attention, that the cause of the incoordination may be removed. 
When this is accomplished the nocturnal enuresis will cease. 

Excessive Quantity of Urine 

In some incoordinations there is abnormal thirst which 
results in the child drinking more water than is required for 
the normal bodily processes. The natural channel through 
which this excessive amount of water is excreted is through 
the kidneys. This results in the bladder being filled often, 
which necessitates the frequent passing of urine. The child 
might be able to control the bladder during waking hours 
and make his wants known; but in sleep, as the bladder be¬ 
comes full, Innate would relax the sphincter muscle, which 
would allow the urine to escape in order to relieve the pressure. 
To overcome the nocturnal enuresis in a case of this kind, 
it is necessary to adjust for the cause of the excessive thirst; 
and when this is corrected, the bed wetting will cease. 

Incoordinations of the Bladder 

Abnormal conditions of the bladder will cause difficulty 
in retaining the urine for a normal length of time. An 
inflammation of the bladder is greatly exaggerated by the 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


387 


presence of urine, therefore an irritation would be set up which 
would result in a desire to empty the bladder. This would 
invariably result in nocturnal enuresis. An interference with 
the transmission of motor mental impulses to the sphincter 
muscle would be another cause for bed wetting. In this case, 
it would be impossible to retain the urine after a certain 
amount had passed into the bladder. This would result in 
enuresis, since there would be nothing to prevent the urine 
from passing freely from the bladder. 

Irritation of the Genital Organs 

In some cases there is an irritation of the genital organs 
resulting in the production of vibrations which, when the child 
is asleep, results in enuresis. This irritation may be produced 
by an adherent prepuce. Balanitis and phimosis are also quite 
common conditions. There may be an irritation of the rectum 
produced by pin-worms. Vaginal irritation may be the result 
of vulvovaginitis, or due to adherent clitoris. 

Correction of the Condition 

It is asserted by some that nocturnal enuresis in many 
cases is due largely to habit. We see no more reason for 
considering this condition a habit than for considering any 
other abnormal condition a habit. It is the result of inter¬ 
ference with the transmission of mental impulses, and it is 
the duty of the chiropractor to find the condition to which 
nocturnal enuresis is adaptative and correct the cause of that 
condition. 

Some parents have the idea that bed wetting is a habit, 
and the child should be punished in an effort to break him 
of the habit. This, however, is the wrong attitude and no 
good will be accomplished in this manner. Punishment will 
only tend to make the child nervous and the condition worse. 

This condition yields so easily to Chiropractic adjustments 
that there is no reason for allowing a child to continue without 


388 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


relief from this most annoying condition. We have never seen 
a case that did not respond to adjustments after the proper 
analysis was obtained. 

In analyzing a care of nocturnal enuresis it must not be 
taken for granted that the major is K.P., or even a lumbar. 
For this may not be true. A most thorough analysis should 
be made to determine the exact condition of the child. If the 
nervous system is involved, there will likely be found an atlas 
or axis subluxation. We have seen many cases that had been 
adjusted persistently at K.P. and a lumbar, but with no results, 
while an adjustment of the axis would get almost immediate 
results. This does not mean that every stubborn case will 
respond to an axis adjustment. 

Scanty and highly colored urine, which has a tendency to 
scale and irritate the skin, usually indicates highly acid urine. 
In this case a careful analysis must be made to determine the 
cause of the acidity. The palpation will reveal a subluxation 
and most likely a hot box at C.P. and K.P. In many cases 
the child will be anemic, and in a general rundown condition; 
in this case the combination will be S.P. and K.P.; the com¬ 
bination may also include a lumbar. 

In the cases involving the bladder, the major will be a 
lumbar vertebra. The combination will be determined by the 
local condition, which may necessitate the use of K.P. When 
there is an irritation of the genital organs or adjacent struc¬ 
tures, the major will include a lower lumbar vertebra and 
may or may not require a K.P., the combination depending 
upon the character of the local condition. 

From the foregoing it will be observed that the major 
for nocturnal enuresis varies, depending upon the condition to 
which it is adaptative. The major may include At., Ax., C.P., 
K.P., lumbar, or any combination of these or other subluxa¬ 
tions. When the impingements are found, and the causative 
subluxations adjusted, complete results will be obtained—in 
every case. 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


389 


OPHTHALMIA 

This is an incoordination characterized by inflammation 
of the conjunctiva. It is also called purulent conjunctivitis. 
Medically these cases are supposed to be produced by gon¬ 
orrhea, although in many of the milder forms the gonococcus 
is not present. This is evidence that the cause is not the 
gonococcus but that the germs, when present, are there be¬ 
cause of the pathological condition of the tissues. 

Symptoms 

The eyelids are swollen, there is a copious, purulent dis¬ 
charge, and there may be ulceration of the eyelids. 

Major Adjustment 

The major for this condition is a combination major which 
includes a middle or upper cervical for the location and kidney 
place for elimination. 

TETANUS IN INFANTS 

This is a condition which is occasionally found in young 
infants and is the result of an infection usually of the umbilical 
wound. It is most prevalent where conditions are unsanitary. 
Tetanus is characterized by a tonic spasm of the muscles. It 
may affect all the muscles of the body or it may be limited 
to the muscles of the jaw, producing what is known as trismus 
or lockjaw. 

Symptoms 

The first symptom to appear may be the spasm in the 
masseter muscle which interferes with nursing the child. The 
muscle of the face and jaws appear firm and hot and the lips 
slightly protrude. Intervals will occur when the muscles will 
be completely relaxed. At first these paroxysms appear at 
intervals, between which the relaxation is complete; but later 


390 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


they become more frequent and the relaxations less marked 
until there is more or less of a continuous rigidity. This con¬ 
traction grows more exaggerated until the entire body becomes 
rigid. The jaws become set and may be separated only 
slightly, if at all. There is a peculiar characteristic facial 
expression due to the contraction of the facial muscles. Swal¬ 
lowing becomes very difficult. There is a weak, rapid pulse. 
In the mild cases there is only a slight temperature, but in 
the more severe cases the temperature may become extremely 
high. The cry becomes weak and whining. The incoordina¬ 
tion is of short duration. The child soon dies from exhaustion 
or from suffocation due to the rigidity of the respiratory 
muscles or it may be due to a spasm of the larynx. While 
tetanus is not a very common incoordination, the mortality 
is very high. Authorities place the fatality as high as 90% 
and even 95%. 

Equation and Family 

The equation is excretion minus (E—). The family is 
poison and contractures. 

Major Adjustment 

If these cases are adjusted at an early stage excellent 
results will be obtained. There is a combination major at 
At.P, C.P., and K.P. 

PEMPHIGUS NEONATORUM 

This is a rather unusual condition seldom found in general 
practice. It usually occurs as epidemics in institutions where 
large numbers of children are cared for. Outside of such 
institutions it is more common among children in unhygienic 
surroundings. It is characterized by an eruption of blebs 
containing a serous fluid. 


CHIROPRACTIC PEDIATRICS 


391 


Symptoms 

These blebs appear about the third or fourth day and may 
be found upon any part of the body, but usually upon the 
exposed parts. They remain for a time and then rupture or 
dry up. There is no suppuration. As the blebs enlarge they 
sometimes coalesce, covering quite a large area. The epidermis 
is loosened by a serous exudate which occurs directly beneath 
it and separates it from the true skin. The case produces a 
very striking picture having the appearance of being exten¬ 
sively burned. After the blebs have ruptured the epidermis 
hangs in shreds, leaving a very bright red surface beneath/ 
In this way there may be large areas of the body almost 
completely denuded of the epidermis. There may be a very 
slight temperature and slight restlessness. There is great 
depression and marked weakness. The symptoms at first 
appear rather slowly, later the dis-ease progresses very rapidly, 
death often occurring in from twenty-four to forty-eight hours. 
Pemphigus neonatorum should be distinguished from con¬ 
genital syphilis. The liver and spleen are usually very greatly 
enlarged in syphilitic cases and there are usually other char¬ 
acteristic symptoms present, such as changes in the nails, 
mucous membrane and other parts. 

Equation and Family 

The general equation is excretion minus (E—). The con¬ 
dition is in the poison and fever families. 

Major Adjustment 

The major adjustment is C.P. and K.P. 










IJN DEX 


A 



PAGE 



Cold dry. 

. 57 


PAGE 

Complemental . 

. 65 

Abdomen, circumference of 

.294 

Constituents of. 

. 44 

Enlargement of. 

.295 

Emboli. 

. 53 

Normal . 

.295 

Foul . 

. 68 

Abscesses of brain. 

.382 

Fresh . 

.66 

Absolute humidity. 

. 56 

Humidity of. 

. 55 

Absorption . 

. 17 

Impurities in. 

. 67 

Absorption of gases. 

. 52 

Increased pressure.... 

. 51 

Acid, carbolic. 

.213 

Normal pressure. 

. 50 

Action, adaptative. 

..22,187 

Oxygenated . 

. 51 

Active occupations. 

.196 

Pressure at sea level. 

. 54 

Acute catarrhal bronchitis. 

.340 

Pressure increased.... 

.51 

Equation .. 

.342 

Pressure, normal. 

. 50 

Family . 

.342 

Pressure, reduced.... 

. 50 

Major adjustment. 

.342 

Rarefied . 

. 51 

Symptoms . 

.341 

Residual . 

....45,66 

Acute catarrhal laryngitis. 

.334 

Sources of impurities 

in.... 67 

Major adjustment. 

.336 

Space . 

. 34 

Acute dis-ease. 

.171 

Space per capita. 

. 70 

Acute intestinal indigestion. 

.359 

Supplemental. 

.65 

Major adjustment. 

.360 

Temperature of. 

. 55 

Acute nasal catarrh. 

.327 

Tidal . 

. 65 

Equation. 

.328 

Warm dry. 

. 61 

Family .. 

.328 

Warm moist. 

. 59 

Major adjustment.. 

.328 

Airing a room. 

. 70 

Symptoms . 

.327 

Albuminoids . 

.267 

Adaptation .48, 50, 52, 54, 96,188 

Algse . 

.127 

Adaptation to environment. 

. 20 

Alveolar air. 

. 45 

Adaptative action. 

.22,187 

Ammonia . 

....44,49 

Adaptability of body. 

_186 

Analyzing infants. 

.307 

Adenoid growths. 

.330,349 

History of case. 

.307 

Adjusting infants. 

.321 

Objective symptoms.. 

.307 

Adjustments during dentition. .303 

Zones involved. 

.312 

Adulteration of food. 

....248 

Anemia . 

.376 

Aerated water. 

.110 

Animals as source of communi- 

Aerating . 

.129 

cation. 

. 22 

Aerial envelope. 

. 68 

Animal foods. 

.237 

Aim and function of hygiene and 

Animal life. 

.45 

sanitation . 

. 15 

Anorexia . 

..341,360 

Air . 

.... 44 

Anterior fontanels. 

.293 

Alveolar . 

. 45 

Anthrax . 

..207,212 

Cells . 

. 48 

Antibiosis .. 

.175 

Cold damp. 

. 60 

Antibodies . 

.176 


393 




















































































394 


INDEX 


PAGE 

Antigens .176 

Antineurotic vitamin.241 

Antiseptic .207 

Apathy .341 

Aphonia .334 

Acute catarrhal laryngitis.. .334 

Appetite . 232 

Argon .44,46 

Arsenic poisoning.167 

Arteriosclerosis in lead poison¬ 
ing .166 

Artificial foundation beds. 33 

Artificial lighting.99,162 

Artificial methods of water puri¬ 
fication .128 

Artificial reservoir.116 

Artificially high temperatures.. .163 

Artificially fed babies.286 

Asbestos . 34 

Asepsis.208 

Aspect, importance of. 29 

Assimilation, food.374 

Asthma .348 

Equation .349 

Family.349 

Major adjustment.349 

Symptoms .348 

Atmosphere . 44 

Atmospheric pressure. 50 

Atrophy, infantile.375 

Autolytic enzymes.267 

Average weight of boys.287 

Aquasphere . 44 

Aqueducts .106 

Aqueous humor. 96 

B 

Baby, the.277 

Bottle-fed.353 

Breast-fed .353 

Food .277 

Bacilli .173,196 

Bacteria. 196 

Balanced rations.236 

Barlow’s dis-ease.376 

Barns and Barnyards.259 

Basement .32,33 

Basement of school building.... 141 

Bassinet.283 

Bath tub. 37 


PAGE 

Beaded ribs.377 

Bed .222 

Bed pan.223 

Bedrooms . 30 

Bed wetting.386 

Bedding .222 

Beginners, age of.148 

Bends . 53 

Beriberi.241 

Blackboards.145 

Bladder .384 

Bladder, control of.284 

Bladder worms.270 

Blast furnace workers.163 

Blebs .390 

Body heat. 81 

Bodily temperature. 58 

Boiling .211 

Boracic acid.261 

Borax.261 

Botulism .246,248 

Bottle-fed babies.278,291,353 

Bottling milk.260 

Bowels.284 

Bow-legs .281 

Brain, development of.279 

Brass .166 

Breast feeding .278, 353, 374 

Breathing . 48 

Brick. 36 

Bronchi, foreign bodies in.338 

Symptoms.339 

Bronchial croup.343 

Major adjustment.343 

Bronchitis, acute catarrhal.340 

Bronchitis, chronic.342 

Bronchitis, fibrinous.343 

Broncho-pneumonia .344 

Building construction. 32 

Building site. 28 

Buildings, character of.161 

Butter .262 

C 

Cachexia .376 

Caisson dis-ease. 53 

Caisson workers.52,163 

Calisthenics .150 

Calorific mental impulses. 80 

Capillary attraction. 31 



























































































INDEX 


395 


Caput quadratum.377 

Carbolic acid.213 

Carbon dioxide.... .44, 45,47,67,108 

Carbohydrates.239 

Care in milking.258 

Care of cows.258 

Care of food animals.269 

Care of sick room.220 

Carpopedal spasms.333 

Carriers.200 

Casein .238,255 

Casing .. 125 

Casts, fibrinous.343 

Catarrh, acute nasal.327 

Catarrh, chronic nasal.329 

Cause of dis-ease. 21 

Central heating. 88 

Cerebral incoordination.379 

Cerebral tumors.382 

Cesspools .125 

Channels of entry.201 

Digestive tract.201 

Genito-urinary tract.201 

Respiratory tract.*201 

Skin.201 

Character of buildings.161 

Character of cry.309 

Charts :.146 

Chemical agents.210 

Chemical composition of foods..238 

Chemical purification.131 

Chemically pure water.108, 109 

Cheese.263 

Chicken pox.'..173 

Child exercise from handling.. .281 

Child’s cry.313 

Children, effects of labor upon. .158 

Chiropractic hygiene. 19 

Chiropractor .192 

Choice of occupation.157 

Chorea.385 

Cholera infantum.360 

Major adjustment.361 

Chronic bronchitis.342 

Major adjustment.343 

Symptoms.342 

Chronic dis-ease. 171 

Chronic gastritis.354 

Major adjustment.355 


Chronic intestinal indigestion.. .361 


PAGE 

Chronic laryngitis.336 

Major adjustment.336 

Symptoms .336 

Chronic nasal catarrh.329 

Equation .330 

Family .330 

Major adjustment.331 

Symptoms .330 

Chyle . 17 

Chyme .. 17 

Circumference of abdomen.294 

Cisterns.113 

Classification of dis-ease.171 

Classification of foods.237 

Cleanliness . 15 

Cleanliness, external. 15 

Cleanliness, internal. 15 

Cloak rooms.146 

Clonic convulsion.381 

Cocci.173 

Cold damp air. 60 

Cold dry air. 57 

Cold in head.327 

Colic.362,368 

Major adjustment.363 

Colicky pain.359 

Combustion .79,81 

Commensal. 175 

Communicable dis-ease, cause 

of .226 

Communicability.175 

Communication, source of.. .22, 198 

Competitive games.281 

-Complemental air. 65 

Composition of water.107 

Composition of meat.267 

Compression, air. 52 

Condensation ..-.126 

Condensed milk.261 

Condiments .239 

Condition of eyes. 308 

Conduction . 86 

Conductivity of atmosphere. 58 

Congestion . 346 

Constipation.366, 358 

Major adjustment.367 

Constituents of air. 44 

Constitutional dis-ease.170 

Construction, fire-proof. 36 

Contact infection.199 

Contagious .173, 202 


26 

































































































396 


INDEX 


PAGE 

Contractures .279 

Convection . 88 

Convection through water. 89 

Conveyance, media of.198 

Convulsions .279, 381 

Clonic .381 

Family.383 

Major adjustment.384 

Tonic.381 

Copper.166 

Corpuscles. 50 

Corridors .141 

Coryza.327 

Cows, care of.258 

Cows’ milk.278 

Creeks .114 

Creoline.213 

Cresoles.213 

Croup .332 

Croup, bronchial.343 

Crude sewage.133 

Crying .280 

Crying, incessant.314 

Crystalline lens. 96 

Curiosity of child.280 

Cutting teeth.299 

Cyanosis .374, 308 

Cyclic vomiting.365 

D 

Dairy barn, unsanitary.259 

Dampness .29,32 

Damp site. 29 

Deciduous or milk teeth.299 

Decomposing food between teeth.302 

Decompression, air. 52 

Decreased air pressure... 50 

Deep sleep.279 

Deep wells.123 

Deformities of the thorax.295 

Degree of infection.172 

Dental caries.302 

Dentition .299 

Dentition, incoordinations dur¬ 
ing . .300 

Dentition, symptoms exagger¬ 
ated by.300 

Deodorant.209 

Desk, school.144 


PAGE 

Distinction between sanitation 


and hygiene. 14 

Development.285 

Development of brain.279 

Diameter of chest.294 

Diaper, changing.283 

Diaphragm .280,340 

Diarrhea during dentition.300 

Definitions .171 

Digestion, gastric.357 

Digestive organs.278 

Digestive tract.353 

Dilution.127 

Diphtheric germs.197 

Direct infection.199 

Direct lighting.101 

Direct radiation. 87 

Dis-ease acute.171,226 

Dis-ease, cause of. 21 

Dis-ease, constitutional.171 

Dis-ease, germs do not cause_191 

Dis-ease the cause of germs... .189 

Disinfection .207,210 

Disposal of excreta..’.223 

Distillation of water.109 

Distilled water.129 

Divers .51, 163 

Diver’s palsy. 53 

Diving bells. 52 

Diving suits. 52 

Domestic water supply.118 

Drafts .282 

Drainage.. 32 

Draw sheet.222 

Drinking fountains.146 

Dry heat.211 

Dry man.247 

Dry milk.262 

Dustless chalk.145 

Dusty trades, classification of... 165 
Dyspnea .334,335, 343 

E 

Ear drums. 52 

Echinococcus.271 

Edema of glottis.339 

Equation .339 

Major adjustment.339 

Symptoms .339 

Educated mind.220 


























































































INDEX 


397 


PAGE 

Educated mind, function of.219-220 


Effects of dust.164 

Effect of labor upon children... 158 

Effect of posture.159 

Electric discharges. 49 

Elimination of water from body.Ill 

Endemic.177 

Energy, expenditure of. 61 

Environment .;. 381 

Environment, importance of... .218 

Environment, necessity of quiet.279 

Enzymes, autolytic.267 

Epidemic.177 

Epistaxis .331 

Equation .331 

Family.332 

Major adjustment.332 

Equation, epistaxes.331 

Equilibrium .50, 296 

Eruption .301 

Evaporation .31, 58,126 

Evolution of lighting systems... 99 

Exercise.277,280 

Exercise, outdoor.281 

Excessive quantity of urine....386 

Exhaustion, muscular.282 

Exhaustion theory.184 

Expenditure of energy. 61 

Expired air. 65 

Exposure .172 

Exposure, stage of.172 

External cleanliness. 15 

Eye. 96 

Adaptation to light. 96 

Aqueous humor. 96 

Crystalline lens. 96 

Fovea centralis. 96 

Iris . 96 

Macula lutea. 96 

Protection .284 

Retina . 96 

Vitreous humor. 96 

Eyelids during sleep.. .290 

F 

Facial expression.308 

Fans, plenum. 73 

Fat soluble A.240,256 

Fatigue .59,160 

Fatigue, muscular.228 


PAGE 

Fats .239,255 

Feces .223 

Feeding.277 

Fermentation. 31 

Fibers, taut.171 

Fibrinous bronchitis.343 

Fibrinous casts.343 

Filter beds.130 

Filtration .129 

Filtration, mechanical.128, 131 

Fire escapes.36,37 

Fire extinguishers. 36 

Fireplace.84,85 

Fireproofing . 36 

Fire protection. 36 

Fire-resisting. 36 

Fixtures of bathroom. 37 

Floors .32,33 

Floors, construction of. 34 

Floors, sanitary requirements... 33 
Fluctuation of ground water.... 30 

Flushing tanks. 39 

Fomites .178 

Fontanels .293,377 

Fontanels, in cretinism.293 

Fontanels, in hydrocephalus.293 

Fontanels, in rachitis.293 

Food, adulteration of.248 

Foods, animal.237 

Food animals.269 

Food animals, care of.269 

Food assimilation.374 

Food .231,233 

Balanced rations.236 

Carbohydrates .239 

Casein.238 

Chemical composition of... .238 

Condiments.239 

Fats .239 

Function of.238 

Infection .245,246 

Intoxication .245,248 

Meat, unfit for.269 

Milk .240 

Necessity for.231 

Physical properties of.338 

Poisons .245 

Proteins .238 

Roughage .237 

Value of meat.268 

























































































398 


INDEX 


PAGE 

Vitamins .237,240 

Foot tub. 37 

Footings, foundation. 33 

Forces, adaptative.217 

Foreign bodies in bronchi.338 

Symptoms.339 

Foreign bodies in larynx.338 

Symptoms .339 

Foreign bodies in the nose....329 
Foreign ingredients in water... .108 

Formaldehyde .208,209,210,261 

Formation, limestone.123 

Foul air. 68 

Fouling of seal. 39 

Foundation . 32 

Footings . 33 

Preparation of. 33 

Fovea centralis. 96 

Fresh air. 66 

Fumigation.209,210 

Function of foods.238 

Function of hygiene and sanita¬ 
tion . 15 

Function of school life.147 

Functional activity.186 

Furnace heating.. 88 

Furniture of playroom.282 


Furniture of sleeping room.282 

G 


Games, competitive.281 

Systematic .281 

Garbage cans.135 

Gaseous disinfectants.210 

Gastric digestion.357 

Gastritis .353 

Catarrhal . 353 

Chronic.354 

Corrosive.353 

Major adjustment.353 

Membranous.353 

Symptoms .353 

Ulcerative.353 

Gelatinoids... 267 

Genital organs, irritation of....387 

Genito-urinary .202 

Germ, a scavenger.189 

Germ medium, milk a.257 

Germ theory, origin of.195 

Germicide .208 


PAGE 

Germs ...23,196,197 

Germs, cause of dis-ease.189 

Diphtheria .197 

Do not cause disease.191 

Non-pathogenic.174 

Pathogenic .174 

Glass blowers.163 

Glossitis .356 

Equation .356 

Family . 356 

Major adjustment.356 

Glottis, edema of.339 

God of medicine. 13 

Goddess of health. 13 

Gonococcus .389 

Gray hepatization.346 

Green plants. 47 

Grimace .308 

Ground air. 30 

Ground water.30,113,118,121 

Growth and development.285 

Growth, evidence of health.... .285 
Gums .376 

H 

Hard water.110 

Heat. 80 

Heat exhaustion. 68 

Heat loss... 58 

Heat, molecular theory of. 79 

Heat stroke. 59 

Heating. 79 

Central . 88 

Combustion . 79 

Conduction. 86 

Convection . 88 

Fireplace. 84 

Hot air. 88 

Hot water. 89 

Local .84,85 

Methods of. 83 

Normal heat. 80 

Of schoolroom.144 

Proper temperature.82, 83 

Radiators . 89 

Radiation . 84 

Steam. 91 

Stove . 86 

System, requirements of.... 83 
Three methods of. 83 




























































































INDEX 


399 


PAGE 

Head .292 

Health, meat danger to.....270 

Hearing .290 

Height of child.289 

Table showing average.287 

Helium .44,46 

Hemoglobin .46,48 

Hepatization.340 

Gray.346 

Red 346 

Highly acid urine.386 

History of public water supply. 106 

Host.175 

Hot air . 88 

Hot box.314,347 

Hot water. 89 

House dampness. 34 

House plumbing. 37 

House sewer. 39 

Humidity .55, 58, 61, 62 

Absolute . 56 

Relative . 56 

Hunger .232 

Hunger cry .313 

Hydatid .271 

Hydrogen . 44 

Hydrogen peroxide.44,49 

Hydrocephalus .382 

Hygeia . 13 

Hygiene .19,301 

Chiropractic. 19 

Defined . 13 

Housing . 28 

Layman’s . 19 

Medical . 19 

Personal . 13 

Public . 14 

Sanitation, aim and function 

of .. -15 

Three viewpoints on. 19 

Hygienic measures.329 

In so-called communicable 

diseases .224 

Hyperacidity of urine.386 

Hypertrophic stenosis.357 

Hysteria .385 

I 

Ice coils. 73 


Ice, manufactured.127 


PAGE 

Icterus .369 

Equation .370 

Family.370 

Major adjustment.370 

Pathological.369 

Physiological .369 

Symptoms.369 

Ignition nroof. 36 

Ill effects of damp houses. 35 

Immunity .181,191,192 

Acquired.183 

Adaptability of body in.... 186 

Artificial .183 

Defined ..181 

Exhaustion theory.184,189 

Mechanism of.188 

Natural .182 

Retention theory.184 

Various theories of.185 

Impounding reservoirs.116 

Impervious strata.119 

Impurities in air.30,67 

Inanition.235, 236 

Major adjustments...374 

Symptoms.374 

Incandescent electric light.100 

Incessant crying.314 

Incineration of refuse.134 

Incoordinations of bladder.386 

Of infants, zones involved. .312 

Of larynx.332 

Of lungs.340 

Increased air pressure. 51 

Increased rate of breathing. 50 

Incubation, stage of.172 

Indigestion .357 

Acute intestinal.359 

Chronic intestinal.361 

Indirect infection.199, 200 

Method of lighting.102 

Radiation .,. 87 

Industrial dusts.164 

Industrial establishments.161 

Industrial hygiene.156 

Definition .156 

Dust, classification of.. 164,165 

Place of work.159 

Poisons ... 158,165,166,167,168 

Work places.162 

Infant, thorax of.340 

Infantile atrophy.375 




























































































400 


INDEX 


PAGE 

Infants, adjusting.321 

Infection .23,172,199, 200 

Infection, channels of.199 

Degree of.172 

Direct.199 

Indirect .200 

Mode of.199 

Period of.172 

Source of.23,198 

Infectious .173, 202 

Inflammable. 36 

Inorganic detritus. 67 

Inorganic salts.239 

Insecticide .208 

Inspiration of air. 48 

Instrumental birth.308 

Intellectual adaptation..... 50 

Intellectual adaptation in im¬ 
munity .181 

Intercepting sewers. 39 

Interference with transmission.. 61 

Internal cleanliness. 15 

Internal resistance. 54 

Intussusception .367 

Major adjustment.369 

Stools in.368 

Symptoms.368 

Invasion, period of.172 

Iris . 96 

Irritability, during dentition.300 

Irritation of genital organs.387 

J 

Jaundice .308 

K 

Kidneys . 60 

Klebs-Loeffler bacilli.335 

Krypton .44, 46 

L 

Labor, effect upon children.158 

Lactalbumin.255 

Lactoglobulin.255 

Lactose.256 

Lakes .114,115 

Languor . 59 


PAGE 

Larvae, of taenia saginata.270 

Laryngeal obstruction.335 

Laryngismus stridulus.333 

Laryngitis, acute catarrhal.334 

Chronic .336 

Tubercular ..337 

Larynx, foreign bodies in.338 

Symptoms .339 

Larynx, incoordination of.332 

Lavatory. 37 

Layman’s hygiene.19 

Lead colic.166 

Lead palsy.166 

Lead poisoning.166 

Lighting . 95 

Artificial .99, 162 

Direct .101 

Incandescent electric light.. 100 

of schoolroom.142 

Psychological effect of.100 

Systems of.101,102 

Physiological effect of.100 

Schoolroom .142 

Value of sunlight. 98 

Window area.98, 99 

Limestone formation.121,123 

Limestone regions.119 

Lips, tactile sensibility of.290 

Liquid disinfectants.210 

Living rooms. 30 

Lobar pneumonia.344 

Symptoms of.346 

Local heating. 84 

Location of work.164 

Lockjaw . .38 9 

Loss of light. 98 

Loss of seal. 38 

Loss of weight.287 

Lungs . 45 

Lysol .213 

M 

Macula lutea. 96 

Main sewer. 37 

Malnutrition .373 

Major adjustment.374 

Symptoms.373 

Man, as source of communica¬ 
tion . 22 





















































































INDEX 


PAGE 

Manufactured ice.127 

Manure .259 

Marasmus . 375 

Major adjustment.375 

Matron .147 

Measles .173 

Measly beef.270 

Meat. 267,268 

Care of food animals.269 

Composition of.267 

Danger to health.270 

Food value of.268 

Source of.268 

Unfit for food.269 

Mechanical devices to aid walk¬ 
ing .296 

Mechanical filtration.128, 131 

Mechanical ventilation.72, 164 

Mechanism of immunity.188 

Meconium .366 

Media of conveyance.198 

Medical hygiene. 19 

Meningitis .382 

Mental impulses.186 

Mercurial poisoning.167 

Mercury .166 

Mercury, use of.167 

Metallic cough, croup.332 

Methods of sewage disposal.... 132 
Methods of water purification.. 126 

Miasmatic .203 

Microcephalus .293 

Milk.240,261 

As a food.254 

Condensed .261 

Dry .262 

Germ medium.257 

Pasteurization .261 

Products, preparation of... .261 

Proper temperature.260 

Sanitary measures in pro¬ 
duction .257 

Sugar . 256 

Milk teeth, appearance of.299 

Mineral wool. 34 

Mode of infection.199 

Model site. 28 

Modes of transfer.199 

Moisture in houses. 35 

Molecular theory. 79 

Morbific agents.P3 


401 


PAGE 

Mosquitoes. 32 

Mouldings in school room.142 

Mountain climbers.163 

Mouth breathing.330 

Mucopurulent discharge.328 

Muddy water.110 

Municipal swimming pools.132 

Muscular exhaustion.282 

Muscular fatigue.282 

N 

Nail point two.323 

Nasal catarrh.327 

Acute .327 

Adjustment.328 

Chronic .329 

Equation .328 

Family.328 

Natural birth .308 

Natural immunity .182 

Natural light in buildings. 98 

Natural means of disinfection. .210 
Natural means of ventilation... 69 
Natural methods of water puri¬ 
fication .126 

Necessity for food.231 

Necessity for water in body.... 109 
Need for conserving energy... .220 

Neon.44, 46 

Nerve tracing.316 

Nervous mechanism.279 

Nervousness .280 

Neurotic children.379, 3851 

Equation .380 

Family.380 

Major adjustment.381 

Nocturnal enuresis.384, 387 

Correction of condition.387 

Excessive quantity of urine 

in.386 

Highly acid urine in.386 

Incoordinations of bladder 

in .386 

Incoordination of nervous 

system .385 

Irritation of genital organs 

in .387 

Nocturnal restlessness.377 

Non-nitrogenous food.238 

Non-pathogenic germs.174 























































































402 


INDEX 


PAGE 

Normal air pressure.50, 163 

Normal bodily temperature.81 

Normal bowel movement.284 

Normal heat . 80 

Normal stool .366 

Nose bleed.331 

Nourishment .277 

Nitric acid. 49 

N itrogen .44, 46 

Nitrogenous foods.238 

Nude baby.280 

Nurseries .282 

Nursery furniture of.282 

Temperature of.283 

Ventilation of.282 

O 

Obligate saprophytes.176 

Obstetrician..277 

Occipito-frontal measurements. .292 

Occupation ...157 

Active .160 

Choice of...157 

Effect of posture.159 

Effect upon children.158 

Effect upon health.156 

Fatigue . 160 

Personal factors in.157 

Place of work.159 

Sedentary . 160 

Odor of urine. 18 

Oleomargarine.262 

Ophthalmia .389 

Major adjustment.389 

Symptoms .389 

Opisthotonos .. 379 

Origin of germ theory.195 

Outdoor exercise .281 

Outside airing.284 

Overwork. 160 

Oxidation . 46 

Oxidizing agent. 49 

Oxygen . 44 

Oxygenated air. 51 

Ozone ..44, 49 

P 

Pain, colicky.359 

Palatability of water.108 


page 

Pallor .308 

Palpating the infant.314 

Palpation of cervical vertebrae. .316 

Palpation of sacrum.316, 317 

Pandemic .178 

Papillomatous . 337 

Parasites .175 

Partitions . 37 

Pasteurization of milk.261 

Pathogenic action .174 

Pathogenic germs .174 

Peculiarities of child considered. 149 

Pemphigus neonatorum.390 

Equation.391 

Family ..391 

Major adjustment.391 

Symptoms .391 

Period of infection.172 

Period of invasion.172 

Periodical vomiting.365 

Permanent hardness of water...Ill 

Permanent teeth, table of.301 

Personal factors in occupation.. 157 

Perspiration .18, 60 

Personal hygiene. 13 

Petrosphere . 44 

Phosphorus .166 

Phosphorus poisoning.168 

Physical agents of disinfection .210 

Physical properties of food.238 

Pigeon breast.377 

Pillow of the infant.283 

Pinched expression.308 

Pisiform bone.322 

Place of work.159 

Plant foods.237 

Play .281 

Play periods necessary.148 

Playroom .282 

Plenum system.69, 72, 73, 164 

Pneumonia .343 

Equation .347 

Family . ..347 

Major adjustment.347 

Symptoms .315 

Poison .233 

Cycle . 22 

Poisoning, Arsenic.167 

Chromium .168 

Industrial .158 

Lead .166 




























































































INDEX 


403 


PAGE 

Mercurial .167 

Phosphorus .168 

Poisonous gas. 49 

Pollution of well water.119 

Ponds .114 

Pools, Swimming.132 

Portland cement. 37 

Position of infant for adjust¬ 
ments .321 

Posture .149,159 

Pott's disease.295 

Preface . 7 

Preparation of foundation. 33 

Preparation of milk and milk 

products .261 

Prevention of siphona?e. 39 

Prism glass.142 

Privy vault.132 

Process of respirat’on. 48 

Production of milk i:i sanitary 

measures.257 

Prophylactic measures in lead 

poisoning .166 

Prophylaxis .152 

Proteins ..238,255 

Psychological effects of light... 100 

Ptomaines.270 

Public hygiene. 14 

Pulmonary tuberculosis.342 

Pulse rate.311 

Disturbances in.311 

Table of...311 

Purification, chemical.131 

Sewage .133 

Purified milk.261 

Pylorospasm .357 

Pylorus, stenosis of.357 

R 


PAGE 

Recirculated air. 68 

Recoil.321 

Red blood cells. 45 

Red hepatization.346 

Reduced air pressure. 50 

Refuse disposal..132, 134 

Regulation of breathing. 48 

Reinforced concrete. 36 

Floors . 34 

Relative humidity.56, 61, 62 

Removal of sewage.132 

Requirements of ventilating sys¬ 
tems . 67 

Reserve energy.187 

Reservoirs, impounding.116 

Residual air.45, 66 

Respiration.44, 65, 309, 310, 383 

Respiratory system.48, 327 

Restlessness during dentition... .300 

Retching.365 

Retention theory.184 

Retina . 96 

Retropharyngeal abscess.328 

Rhinopharyngitis .327 

Rickets ..295,376 

Deformities of abdomen in.378 
Deformities of extremities 

in.378 

Deformities of head in.377 

Deformities of spine in.378 

Deformities of thorax in...377 

Equation .379 

Major adjustments.379 

Symptoms .377 

Rivers .114 

Roof . 34 

Room, proper temperature of... 83 

Roughage .237 

Rudimentary spinous processes. .317 


Rachitic girdle .378 

Rachitic rosary.378 

Radiation.79, 84 

Direct . 87 

Indirect . 87 

Radiator .89, 90 

Rain water.113,114 

Rales ..341,345 

Rarefied air. 51 

Rate of respiration. 65 

Recess .150 


S 

Sacral adjustments.323, 324 

Sand filter.128, 129, 130 

Sandstone rock.123 

Sanitary art. 14 

Sanitary environment. 20 

Measures in production of 

milk .257 

Requirements of floors.33 

Science ...,.. 14 




















































































404 


INDEX 


PAGE 

Sanitation and hygiene, distinc¬ 


tion between. 14 

Sanitation, sick room hygiene.. .217 

Sapremia.177 

Saprophytes .176 

Sarcolactic .267 

Scavengers .226 

School building.140 

Basement .141 

Blackboards .145 

Charts .146 

Cloakrooms .146 

Corridors .141 

Heating.144 

Lighting of.142 

School desks.144 

School room, size of.141 

Stairways .140 

Toilets .147 

Ventilation of.143 

Water supply.146 

Window area.142 

Window shades.143 

School hygiene, age of beginner. 148 

Peculiarities of child.149 

Personal factors.147 

Play periods.148 

Recess .150 

School diseases.151 

School desks.144 

School diseases.151 

School hygiene.140 

School life, functions of.147 

School room, size of.141 

Science, Sanitary. 14 

Screens .221 

Scurvy.376 

Major adjustment.376 

Symptoms.376 

Sea level. 54 

Seal .. 37 

Secretions . 50 

Sedentary occupations.160 

Sedimentation .115,128 

Self purification of water.127 

Semi-indirect lighting.101 

Septic method of sewage purifi¬ 
cation .133 

Septicemia .177 

Serous circulation. 61 

Sewage, crude.133 


PAGE 

Sewage disposal .132 

Sewage pollution.. .116 

Sewage purification, septic 

method. 133 

Sewage, removal of.132 

Sewage system of body. 16 

Sewerage system. 39 

Sewer air. 39 

Sewer gas. 39 

Shallow wells.123 

Shape of head.294 

Shingles . 34 

Sick room.217 

Bed and bedding of.222 

Bed pan.223 

Care of.220 

Disposal of excreta.223 

Draw sheet.222 

Sponge bath.224 

Ventilation of.221 

Sight.289 

Siphonage . 38 

Site, building.28 

Site of school building.140 

Slate and tile roofs. 34 

Sleep .278 

Sleeping rooms or nurseries-282 

Slow sand filter.130 

Smallpox.173 

Smell .291 

Sneezing .327 

Snow water.113 

Soft water.110 

Soil . 30 

Soiled linen.222 

Soup stock.268 

Sources of communication. 22 

Source of food.237 

Source of infection . 23 

Source of impurities in air. 67 

Source of impurities in water... 118 

Spasmodic laryngitis.332 

Special senses.289 

Speech, age at which developed.291 

Sphincter muscle.386 

Spinograph.317 

Spirilli .173 

Sponge bath.224 

Sporadic .178 

Spring water.118 

Sputum .223 































































































INDEX 


PAGE 

Stable.259 

Stage of exposure.172 

Stagnant water.32,116,259 

Stairways .37,140 

Starvation .234 

States of aggregation of water.. 108 

Steam.115,212 

Steam heating. 91 

Steel floor beams. 37 

Stegomyia calopus.114 

Stenosis.334 

Stenosis hypertrophic of the 

pylorus .357 

Equation.358 

Family.358 

Major adjustment.359 

Symptoms.357 

Sterile milk.260 

Sterilization .207,212 

Stomatitis .355 

Equation .356 

Family.356 

Major adjustment.356 

Stone . 36 

Stool. 37 

In intussusception.368 

Normal .366 

Stooped shoulders.160 

Storm sewers. 39 

Stove . 86 

Strabismus .308 

Street sewer.. 39 

Stridulus, laryngismus.333 

Stupor .374 

Subsoil water.113,118,121 

Suction fans..*. 73 

Sulphur dioxide.209 

Sulphuric acid. 49 

Sunlight . 98,128 

Supplemental air. 65 

Supply, water..146 

Suppurative nephritis.339 

Surface water.113,114,117 

Sutures .292 

Sweat glands. 58 

Swimming pools.132 

Symbiosis .175 

System, respiratory.327 

Systematic games.281 

Systems of heating. 83 

Systems of lighting.101 


405 


T 

PAGE 

Table of heights .288 

Table of weight .288 

Tactile sensibility.290 

Taenia saginata, larva of.270 

Tapeworm .270 

Taste .’.291 

Taut fibers.171 

Technique .323 

Teeth .301 

Teeth, hygiene of.301 

Temperature . 62 

Artificially high.163 

Bodily .. 58 

Of buildings. 82 

Of playroom.282 

Tempering coils. 75 

Temporary hardness of water..110 

Temporary strabismus .290 

Terra-cotta .34, 36 

Tetanus .207,212 

Tetanus in infants.389 

Equation .390 

Family.390 

Major adjustment.390 

Symptoms.389 

Theories of immunity.182 

Thorax, shape of.294 

Deformities of.295 

Infants . 340 

Three viewpoints on hygiene.... 19 

Thymus gland.382 

Tidal air. 65 

Tile .31, 34 

Toilets . 147 

Tongue, tactile sensibility of....290 

Tonic spasm.381,389 

Toothache .302 

Top cover.222 

Touch .290 

Toxemia .177 

Transfer, modes of.199 

Trap.37, 38, 39 

Trichinosis .270 


Trismus . 

Tubercular laryngitis . 


Tubercular ridge .317 

Tuberculosis .166 

Tumors, cerebral.382 

Turbid water.HO 

































































































INDEX 


406 


PAGE 

Tympanites .359, 368 

Typhoid fever.173 

U 

Under drains. 39 

Underground water.121 

Unsanitary dairy barn.259 

Urine .223 

Excessive quantity of.386 

Highly acid.386 

Odor of. 18 

V 

Vacuum.69,164 

Vacuum system. 73 

Value of sunlight. 98 

Various theories of immunity... 185 

Vent pipe. 39 

Ventilating system. 67 

Ventilation . 66 

Air space per capita. 70 

Breathing zone. 72 

Defined . 65 

Means of. 69 

Mechanical . 72 

Natural means of. 69 

Of hall and stairways. 30 

Of playroom.282 

Plenum system of.69, 73 

Schoolroom .143 

Sick room.221 

Sleeping room.282 

Tempering coils. 74 

Vacuum system of.69, 73 

Washing the air.... 73 

Water curtain. 74 

Ventilators .282 

Vertical currents.117 

Visual analysis.309 

Vital resistance.187 

Vitamin.240,256 

Vitamin antineurotic.241 

Vitiated air.70,143 

Vitiation . 67 

Vitreous humor. 96 

Volume of air inspired, expired. 65 

Vomiting .363 

Cyclic.365 


PAGE 

Major adjustment.365 

Obstructive .364 

Periodical .365 

Recurrent ...365 

Symptoms .365 

W 

Walls . 33 

In school room.142 

Methods of construction.... 33 

Walking ..295 

Warm dry air. 61 

Warm moist air. 59 

Washing the air. 73 

Water .105,106,108 

Amount needed per day 111 

Artificial reservoirs.116 

Chemical purification of... .131 

Chemically pure.108, 109 

Cisterns .113 

Composition of.107 

Condensation.126 

Distillation of.109 , 

Distilled .129 

Elimination from body.Ill 

Evaporation .126 

Fall mixing of.117 

Filtration.129 

Foreign ingredients in.108 

General considerations.106 

Ground .113,120 

Hard .110 

Impounding reservoir.116 

Lakes .115 

Muddy .110 

Necessity for, in body.109 

Needed for all purposes.... Ill 

Palatability of.108 

Proper supply of.106 

Purification of.126 

Rain .113 

Sedimentation .128 

Self-purification of.126 

Snow .113 

Soft . 110 

Sources of impurities.118 

Spring .118 

Stagnation of.116 

States of aggregation.108 

Streams.115 
























































































INDEX 


407 


PAGE 

Subsoil .113,118,121 

Surface.113,114,117 

Taste of.110 

Turbid .110 

Underground .120 

Universal solvent.109 

Well .118 

Water curtain. 75 

Water-logged.33-375 

Water meters.113 

Waterproof .course in walls.35 

Water-soluble B.240,256 

Water-soluble C.240,256 

Water supply.112,113,146 

Water vapor . 55 

Water waste .113 

Weight, gain in.286 

Weight, how considered.286 

Weight, loss of.287 

Weight of boys at birth.285 


PAGE 

Weight of girls at birth.285 

Weight, table showing average. .287 

Wells .123 

Wet clothing.146 

Window area .-.98, 99 

Window hopper . 70 

Window shades .99,143 

Window ventilation . 69 

Wood shingles. 34 

Work, place of.159 

Work places.162 

Writer’s cramps.161 

X 

Xenon..44, 46 

Z 

Zinc .166 
































































































































































































































































* 
























- 





















































































. 




























4 

. 








4 






























































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































